Change-Id: I24c6e4e83efda86116245317464ef145e991d8ea
Signed-off-by: Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com>
Reviewed-on: http://photon-jenkins.eng.vmware.com:8082/16474
Tested-by: gerrit-photon <photon-checkins@vmware.com>
Reviewed-by: Tapas Kundu <tkundu@vmware.com>
| ... | ... |
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ |
| 3 | 3 |
Summary: The Apache Portable Runtime Utility Library |
| 4 | 4 |
Name: apr-util |
| 5 | 5 |
Version: 1.6.1 |
| 6 |
-Release: 9%{?dist}
|
|
| 6 |
+Release: 10%{?dist}
|
|
| 7 | 7 |
License: Apache License 2.0 |
| 8 | 8 |
URL: https://apr.apache.org |
| 9 | 9 |
Group: System Environment/Libraries |
| ... | ... |
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ BuildRequires: sqlite-devel |
| 18 | 18 |
BuildRequires: openssl-devel |
| 19 | 19 |
BuildRequires: nss-devel |
| 20 | 20 |
BuildRequires: expat-devel |
| 21 |
-BuildRequires: openldap |
|
| 21 |
+BuildRequires: openldap-devel |
|
| 22 | 22 |
BuildRequires: postgresql15-devel |
| 23 | 23 |
|
| 24 | 24 |
Requires: apr |
| ... | ... |
@@ -126,6 +126,8 @@ rm -rf %{buildroot}
|
| 126 | 126 |
%{_libdir}/%{name}-%{apuver}/apr_dbd_sqlite*
|
| 127 | 127 |
|
| 128 | 128 |
%changelog |
| 129 |
+* Wed Feb 08 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 1.6.1-10 |
|
| 130 |
+- Bump version as a part of openldap upgrade |
|
| 129 | 131 |
* Fri Jan 20 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 1.6.1-9 |
| 130 | 132 |
- Remove pgsql-12 dependency |
| 131 | 133 |
* Wed Jan 11 2023 Oliver Kurth <okurth@vmware.com> 1.6.1-8 |
| ... | ... |
@@ -3,27 +3,27 @@ |
| 3 | 3 |
Summary: Kernel Audit Tool |
| 4 | 4 |
Name: audit |
| 5 | 5 |
Version: 3.0.9 |
| 6 |
-Release: 5%{?dist}
|
|
| 6 |
+Release: 6%{?dist}
|
|
| 7 | 7 |
License: GPLv2+ |
| 8 | 8 |
Group: System Environment/Security |
| 9 | 9 |
URL: http://people.redhat.com/sgrubb/audit |
| 10 | 10 |
Vendor: VMware, Inc. |
| 11 | 11 |
Distribution: Photon |
| 12 | 12 |
|
| 13 |
-Source0: http://people.redhat.com/sgrubb/audit/%{name}-%{version}.tar.gz
|
|
| 14 |
-%define sha512 %{name}=5219eb0b41746eca3406008a97731c0083e7be50ec88563a39537de22cb69fe88490f5fe5a11535930f360b11a62538e2ff6cbe39e059cd760038363954ef4d6
|
|
| 13 |
+Source0: http://people.redhat.com/sgrubb/audit/%{name}-%{version}.tar.gz
|
|
| 14 |
+%define sha512 %{name}=5219eb0b41746eca3406008a97731c0083e7be50ec88563a39537de22cb69fe88490f5fe5a11535930f360b11a62538e2ff6cbe39e059cd760038363954ef4d6
|
|
| 15 | 15 |
|
| 16 | 16 |
# patches for audit workaround for linux-headers >= 5.17 |
| 17 | 17 |
# https://github.com/linux-audit/audit-userspace/issues/252 |
| 18 | 18 |
# https://github.com/linux-audit/audit-userspace/issues/236 |
| 19 | 19 |
# https://listman.redhat.com/archives/linux-audit/2022-February/msg00085.html |
| 20 | 20 |
# patch source: https://src.fedoraproject.org/rpms/audit/blob/rawhide/f/audit-3.0.8-flex-array-workaround.patch |
| 21 |
-Patch0: audit-3.0.8-flex-array-workaround.patch |
|
| 21 |
+Patch0: audit-3.0.8-flex-array-workaround.patch |
|
| 22 | 22 |
# patch source: https://src.fedoraproject.org/rpms/audit/blob/rawhide/f/audit-3.0.8-undo-flex-array.patch |
| 23 |
-Patch1: audit-3.0.8-undo-flex-array.patch |
|
| 23 |
+Patch1: audit-3.0.8-undo-flex-array.patch |
|
| 24 | 24 |
|
| 25 | 25 |
BuildRequires: krb5-devel |
| 26 |
-BuildRequires: openldap |
|
| 26 |
+BuildRequires: openldap-devel |
|
| 27 | 27 |
BuildRequires: tcp_wrappers-devel |
| 28 | 28 |
BuildRequires: libcap-ng-devel |
| 29 | 29 |
BuildRequires: swig |
| ... | ... |
@@ -55,20 +55,20 @@ Requires: %{name} = %{version}-%{release}
|
| 55 | 55 |
%description devel |
| 56 | 56 |
The libraries and header files needed for audit development. |
| 57 | 57 |
|
| 58 |
-%package -n python3-audit |
|
| 58 |
+%package -n python3-%{name}
|
|
| 59 | 59 |
Summary: Python3 bindings for libaudit |
| 60 | 60 |
License: LGPLv2+ |
| 61 | 61 |
Requires: %{name} = %{version}-%{release}
|
| 62 | 62 |
Requires: python3 |
| 63 | 63 |
|
| 64 |
-%description -n python3-audit |
|
| 64 |
+%description -n python3-%{name}
|
|
| 65 | 65 |
The python3-audit package contains the python2 bindings for libaudit |
| 66 | 66 |
and libauparse. |
| 67 | 67 |
|
| 68 | 68 |
%prep |
| 69 | 69 |
# Using autosetup is not feasible |
| 70 | 70 |
%setup -q |
| 71 |
-cp /usr/include/linux/audit.h lib/ |
|
| 71 |
+cp %{_includedir}/linux/%{name}.h lib/
|
|
| 72 | 72 |
%patch0 -p1 |
| 73 | 73 |
|
| 74 | 74 |
%build |
| ... | ... |
@@ -90,25 +90,27 @@ cp /usr/include/linux/audit.h lib/ |
| 90 | 90 |
%make_build |
| 91 | 91 |
|
| 92 | 92 |
%install |
| 93 |
-mkdir -p %{buildroot}/{etc/audispd/plugins.d,etc/audit/rules.d}
|
|
| 94 |
-mkdir -p %{buildroot}/%{_var}/opt/audit/log
|
|
| 95 |
-mkdir -p %{buildroot}/%{_var}/log
|
|
| 96 |
-mkdir -p %{buildroot}/%{_var}/spool/audit
|
|
| 97 |
-ln -sfv %{_var}/opt/audit/log %{buildroot}/%{_var}/log/audit
|
|
| 98 |
-%make_install |
|
| 93 |
+mkdir -p %{buildroot}/{etc/audispd/plugins.d,etc/%{name}/rules.d} \
|
|
| 94 |
+ %{buildroot}/%{_var}/opt/%{name}/log \
|
|
| 95 |
+ %{buildroot}/%{_var}/log \
|
|
| 96 |
+ %{buildroot}/%{_var}/spool/%{name}
|
|
| 97 |
+ln -sfrv %{buildroot}%{_var}/opt/%{name}/log %{buildroot}%{_var}/log/%{name}
|
|
| 99 | 98 |
|
| 100 |
-install -vdm755 %{buildroot}%{_libdir}/systemd/system-preset
|
|
| 101 |
-echo "disable auditd.service" > %{buildroot}%{_libdir}/systemd/system-preset/50-auditd.preset
|
|
| 99 |
+%make_install %{?_smp_mflags}
|
|
| 100 |
+ |
|
| 101 |
+install -vdm755 %{buildroot}%{_presetdir}
|
|
| 102 |
+echo "disable auditd.service" > %{buildroot}%{_presetdir}/50-auditd.preset
|
|
| 102 | 103 |
|
| 103 | 104 |
# undo the workaround |
| 104 |
-cur=`pwd` |
|
| 105 |
-cd %{buildroot}
|
|
| 105 |
+pushd %{buildroot}
|
|
| 106 | 106 |
patch --fuzz=1 -p0 < %{PATCH1}
|
| 107 | 107 |
find . -name '*.orig' -delete |
| 108 |
-cd $cur |
|
| 108 |
+popd |
|
| 109 | 109 |
|
| 110 |
+%if 0%{?with_check}
|
|
| 110 | 111 |
%check |
| 111 | 112 |
make %{?_smp_mflags} check
|
| 113 |
+%endif |
|
| 112 | 114 |
|
| 113 | 115 |
%post |
| 114 | 116 |
/sbin/ldconfig |
| ... | ... |
@@ -132,23 +134,23 @@ make %{?_smp_mflags} check
|
| 132 | 132 |
%{_mandir}/man5/*
|
| 133 | 133 |
%{_mandir}/man7/*
|
| 134 | 134 |
%{_mandir}/man8/*
|
| 135 |
-%dir %{_var}/opt/audit/log
|
|
| 136 |
-%{_var}/log/audit
|
|
| 137 |
-%{_var}/spool/audit
|
|
| 138 |
-%attr(750,root,root) %dir %{_sysconfdir}/audit
|
|
| 139 |
-%attr(750,root,root) %dir %{_sysconfdir}/audit/rules.d
|
|
| 135 |
+%dir %{_var}/opt/%{name}/log
|
|
| 136 |
+%{_var}/log/%{name}
|
|
| 137 |
+%{_var}/spool/%{name}
|
|
| 138 |
+%attr(750,root,root) %dir %{_sysconfdir}/%{name}
|
|
| 139 |
+%attr(750,root,root) %dir %{_sysconfdir}/%{name}/rules.d
|
|
| 140 | 140 |
|
| 141 | 141 |
%attr(750,root,root) %dir %{_sysconfdir}/audispd
|
| 142 | 142 |
%attr(750,root,root) %dir %{_sysconfdir}/audispd/plugins.d
|
| 143 |
-%config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_sysconfdir}/audit/auditd.conf
|
|
| 144 |
-%config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_sysconfdir}/audit/audisp-remote.conf
|
|
| 145 |
-%config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_sysconfdir}/audit/zos-remote.conf
|
|
| 146 |
-%config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_sysconfdir}/audit/plugins.d/*.conf
|
|
| 147 |
-%ghost %config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_sysconfdir}/audit/rules.d/audit.rules
|
|
| 148 |
-%ghost %config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_sysconfdir}/audit/audit.rules
|
|
| 149 |
-%ghost %config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_sysconfdir}/audit/audit-stop.rules
|
|
| 150 |
-%ghost %config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_datadir}/audit/sample-rules/*.rules
|
|
| 151 |
-%ghost %config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_datadir}/audit/sample-rules/README-rules
|
|
| 143 |
+%config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_sysconfdir}/%{name}/auditd.conf
|
|
| 144 |
+%config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_sysconfdir}/%{name}/audisp-remote.conf
|
|
| 145 |
+%config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_sysconfdir}/%{name}/zos-remote.conf
|
|
| 146 |
+%config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_sysconfdir}/%{name}/plugins.d/*.conf
|
|
| 147 |
+%ghost %config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_sysconfdir}/%{name}/rules.d/%{name}.rules
|
|
| 148 |
+%ghost %config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_sysconfdir}/%{name}/%{name}.rules
|
|
| 149 |
+%ghost %config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_sysconfdir}/%{name}/%{name}-stop.rules
|
|
| 150 |
+%ghost %config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_datadir}/%{name}/sample-rules/*.rules
|
|
| 151 |
+%ghost %config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_datadir}/%{name}/sample-rules/README-rules
|
|
| 152 | 152 |
%config(noreplace) %attr(640,root,root) %{_sysconfdir}/libaudit.conf
|
| 153 | 153 |
|
| 154 | 154 |
%files devel |
| ... | ... |
@@ -160,13 +162,15 @@ make %{?_smp_mflags} check
|
| 160 | 160 |
%endif |
| 161 | 161 |
%{_includedir}/*.h
|
| 162 | 162 |
%{_mandir}/man3/*
|
| 163 |
-%{_datadir}/aclocal/audit.m4
|
|
| 163 |
+%{_datadir}/aclocal/%{name}.m4
|
|
| 164 | 164 |
|
| 165 |
-%files -n python3-audit |
|
| 165 |
+%files -n python3-%{name}
|
|
| 166 | 166 |
%defattr(-,root,root,-) |
| 167 | 167 |
%{python3_sitelib}/*
|
| 168 | 168 |
|
| 169 | 169 |
%changelog |
| 170 |
+* Wed Feb 08 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 3.0.9-6 |
|
| 171 |
+- Bump version as a part of openldap upgrade |
|
| 170 | 172 |
* Thu Jan 26 2023 Ashwin Dayanand Kamat <kashwindayan@vmware.com> 3.0.9-5 |
| 171 | 173 |
- Bump version as a part of krb5 upgrade |
| 172 | 174 |
* Thu Jan 12 2023 Him Kalyan Bordoloi <bordoloih@vmware.com> 3.0.9-4 |
| ... | ... |
@@ -3,7 +3,7 @@ |
| 3 | 3 |
Name: elixir |
| 4 | 4 |
Summary: A modern approach to programming for the Erlang VM |
| 5 | 5 |
Version: 1.14.2 |
| 6 |
-Release: 1%{?dist}
|
|
| 6 |
+Release: 2%{?dist}
|
|
| 7 | 7 |
License: ASL 2.0 |
| 8 | 8 |
URL: http://elixir-lang.org |
| 9 | 9 |
Vendor: VMware, Inc. |
| ... | ... |
@@ -16,7 +16,6 @@ Source0: https://github.com/elixir-lang/%{name}/archive/v%{version}/%{name}-%{ve
|
| 16 | 16 |
BuildRequires: git |
| 17 | 17 |
BuildRequires: sed |
| 18 | 18 |
BuildRequires: erlang |
| 19 |
-BuildRequires: openldap |
|
| 20 | 19 |
|
| 21 | 20 |
Requires: erlang |
| 22 | 21 |
|
| ... | ... |
@@ -34,20 +33,23 @@ fault-tolerant, non-stop applications with hot code swapping. |
| 34 | 34 |
export LANG="en_US.UTF-8" |
| 35 | 35 |
make compile %{?_smp_mflags}
|
| 36 | 36 |
|
| 37 |
-%check |
|
| 38 |
-export LANG="en_US.UTF-8" |
|
| 39 |
-make test %{?_smp_mflags}
|
|
| 40 |
- |
|
| 41 | 37 |
%install |
| 42 | 38 |
mkdir -p %{buildroot}%{_datadir}/%{name}/%{version}
|
| 43 |
-cp -ra bin lib %{buildroot}%{_datadir}/%{name}/%{version}
|
|
| 39 |
+cp -pra bin lib %{buildroot}%{_datadir}/%{name}/%{version}
|
|
| 44 | 40 |
|
| 45 | 41 |
mkdir -p %{buildroot}%{_bindir}
|
| 46 |
-ln -s %{_datadir}/%{name}/%{version}/bin/{elixir,elixirc,iex,mix} %{buildroot}%{_bindir}/
|
|
| 42 |
+# don't create relative symlinks, this must be absolute symlink |
|
| 43 |
+# or else some builds fail with weird errors (rabbimq for example) |
|
| 44 |
+ln -sfv %{_datadir}/%{name}/%{version}/bin/{elixir,elixirc,iex,mix} %{buildroot}%{_bindir}
|
|
| 45 |
+ |
|
| 46 |
+%if 0%{?with_check}
|
|
| 47 |
+%check |
|
| 48 |
+export LANG="en_US.UTF-8" |
|
| 49 |
+make test %{?_smp_mflags}
|
|
| 50 |
+%endif |
|
| 47 | 51 |
|
| 48 | 52 |
%files |
| 49 | 53 |
%defattr(-,root,root) |
| 50 |
-%license LICENSE |
|
| 51 | 54 |
%{_bindir}/elixir
|
| 52 | 55 |
%{_bindir}/elixirc
|
| 53 | 56 |
%{_bindir}/iex
|
| ... | ... |
@@ -55,6 +57,8 @@ ln -s %{_datadir}/%{name}/%{version}/bin/{elixir,elixirc,iex,mix} %{buildroot}%{
|
| 55 | 55 |
%{_datadir}/%{name}
|
| 56 | 56 |
|
| 57 | 57 |
%changelog |
| 58 |
+* Wed Feb 08 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 1.14.2-2 |
|
| 59 |
+- Bump version as a part of openldap upgrade |
|
| 58 | 60 |
* Tue Dec 13 2022 Gerrit Photon <photon-checkins@vmware.com> 1.14.2-1 |
| 59 | 61 |
- Automatic Version Bump |
| 60 | 62 |
* Fri Oct 28 2022 Gerrit Photon <photon-checkins@vmware.com> 1.14.1-1 |
| ... | ... |
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ |
| 1 | 1 |
Summary: GSSAPI NTLMSSP Mechanism |
| 2 | 2 |
Name: gssntlmssp |
| 3 | 3 |
Version: 1.1.0 |
| 4 |
-Release: 6%{?dist}
|
|
| 4 |
+Release: 7%{?dist}
|
|
| 5 | 5 |
Vendor: VMware, Inc. |
| 6 | 6 |
Distribution: Photon |
| 7 | 7 |
License: LGPLv3+ |
| ... | ... |
@@ -30,16 +30,16 @@ BuildRequires: docbook-xsl |
| 30 | 30 |
BuildRequires: doxygen |
| 31 | 31 |
BuildRequires: gettext |
| 32 | 32 |
BuildRequires: pkg-config |
| 33 |
-BuildRequires: krb5-devel >= 1.11.2 |
|
| 33 |
+BuildRequires: krb5-devel |
|
| 34 | 34 |
BuildRequires: libunistring-devel |
| 35 | 35 |
BuildRequires: openssl-devel |
| 36 |
-BuildRequires: gnutls-devel >= 3.4.7 |
|
| 36 |
+BuildRequires: gnutls-devel |
|
| 37 | 37 |
BuildRequires: libtasn1-devel |
| 38 | 38 |
BuildRequires: libtirpc-devel |
| 39 |
-BuildRequires: openldap |
|
| 39 |
+BuildRequires: openldap-devel |
|
| 40 | 40 |
BuildRequires: Linux-PAM-devel |
| 41 | 41 |
BuildRequires: jansson-devel |
| 42 |
-BuildRequires: gnutls-devel >= 3.4.7 |
|
| 42 |
+BuildRequires: gnutls-devel |
|
| 43 | 43 |
BuildRequires: samba-client-libs |
| 44 | 44 |
BuildRequires: libwbclient |
| 45 | 45 |
BuildRequires: libwbclient-devel |
| ... | ... |
@@ -88,13 +88,14 @@ rm -rf %{buildroot}/*
|
| 88 | 88 |
%defattr(-,root,root) |
| 89 | 89 |
%config(noreplace) %{_sysconfdir}/gss/mech.d/ntlmssp.conf
|
| 90 | 90 |
%{_libdir}/%{name}/%{name}.so
|
| 91 |
-%doc COPYING |
|
| 92 | 91 |
|
| 93 | 92 |
%files devel |
| 94 | 93 |
%defattr(-,root,root) |
| 95 | 94 |
%{_includedir}/gssapi/gssapi_ntlmssp.h
|
| 96 | 95 |
|
| 97 | 96 |
%changelog |
| 97 |
+* Wed Feb 08 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 1.1.0-7 |
|
| 98 |
+- Bump version as a part of openldap upgrade |
|
| 98 | 99 |
* Thu Jan 26 2023 Ashwin Dayanand Kamat <kashwindayan@vmware.com> 1.1.0-6 |
| 99 | 100 |
- Bump version as a part of krb5 upgrade |
| 100 | 101 |
* Sat Jan 14 2023 Ashwin Dayanand Kamat <kashwindayan@vmware.com> 1.1.0-5 |
| ... | ... |
@@ -1,28 +1,26 @@ |
| 1 | 1 |
Summary: The Apache HTTP Server |
| 2 | 2 |
Name: httpd |
| 3 | 3 |
Version: 2.4.55 |
| 4 |
-Release: 1%{?dist}
|
|
| 4 |
+Release: 2%{?dist}
|
|
| 5 | 5 |
License: Apache License 2.0 |
| 6 | 6 |
URL: http://httpd.apache.org |
| 7 | 7 |
Group: Applications/System |
| 8 | 8 |
Vendor: VMware, Inc. |
| 9 | 9 |
Distribution: Photon |
| 10 | 10 |
|
| 11 |
-Source0: https://dlcdn.apache.org/%{name}/%{name}-%{version}.tar.bz2
|
|
| 12 |
-%define sha512 %{name}=94982f7a1fedac8961fc17b5a22cf763ac28cb27ee6facab2e6a15b249b927773667493fd3f7354fb13fcb34a6f1afc1bdd5cf4b7be030cba1dfb523e40d43fb
|
|
| 11 |
+Source0: https://dlcdn.apache.org/%{name}/%{name}-%{version}.tar.bz2
|
|
| 12 |
+%define sha512 %{name}=94982f7a1fedac8961fc17b5a22cf763ac28cb27ee6facab2e6a15b249b927773667493fd3f7354fb13fcb34a6f1afc1bdd5cf4b7be030cba1dfb523e40d43fb
|
|
| 13 | 13 |
|
| 14 | 14 |
# Patch0 is taken from: |
| 15 | 15 |
# https://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/svn |
| 16 |
-Patch0: %{name}-%{version}-blfs_layout-1.patch
|
|
| 17 |
-Patch1: %{name}-uncomment-ServerName.patch
|
|
| 16 |
+Patch0: %{name}-%{version}-blfs_layout-1.patch
|
|
| 17 |
+Patch1: %{name}-uncomment-ServerName.patch
|
|
| 18 | 18 |
|
| 19 |
-BuildRequires: openssl >= 1.1.1 |
|
| 20 |
-BuildRequires: openssl-devel >= 1.1.1 |
|
| 19 |
+BuildRequires: openssl-devel |
|
| 21 | 20 |
BuildRequires: pcre-devel |
| 22 | 21 |
BuildRequires: apr |
| 23 |
-BuildRequires: apr-util |
|
| 24 | 22 |
BuildRequires: apr-util-devel |
| 25 |
-BuildRequires: openldap |
|
| 23 |
+BuildRequires: openldap-devel |
|
| 26 | 24 |
BuildRequires: expat-devel |
| 27 | 25 |
BuildRequires: lua-devel |
| 28 | 26 |
BuildRequires: nghttp2-devel |
| ... | ... |
@@ -31,7 +29,7 @@ BuildRequires: systemd-devel |
| 31 | 31 |
Requires: nghttp2 |
| 32 | 32 |
Requires: pcre |
| 33 | 33 |
Requires: apr-util |
| 34 |
-Requires: openssl >= 1.1.1 |
|
| 34 |
+Requires: openssl |
|
| 35 | 35 |
Requires: openldap |
| 36 | 36 |
Requires: lua |
| 37 | 37 |
Requires(pre): /usr/sbin/useradd /usr/sbin/groupadd |
| ... | ... |
@@ -97,13 +95,13 @@ sh ./configure --host=%{_host} --build=%{_build} \
|
| 97 | 97 |
|
| 98 | 98 |
$(dirname $(gcc -print-prog-name=cc1))/install-tools/mkheaders |
| 99 | 99 |
|
| 100 |
-make %{?_smp_mflags}
|
|
| 100 |
+%make_build |
|
| 101 | 101 |
|
| 102 | 102 |
%install |
| 103 |
-make DESTDIR=%{buildroot} install %{?_smp_mflags}
|
|
| 103 |
+%make_install %{?_smp_mflags}
|
|
| 104 | 104 |
|
| 105 | 105 |
install -vdm755 %{buildroot}%{_unitdir}
|
| 106 |
-install -vdm755 %{buildroot}/etc/%{name}/logs
|
|
| 106 |
+install -vdm755 %{buildroot}%{_sysconfdir}/%{name}/logs
|
|
| 107 | 107 |
|
| 108 | 108 |
cat << EOF >> %{buildroot}%{_unitdir}/%{name}.service
|
| 109 | 109 |
[Unit] |
| ... | ... |
@@ -124,8 +122,8 @@ EOF |
| 124 | 124 |
install -vdm755 %{buildroot}%{_presetdir}
|
| 125 | 125 |
echo "disable %{name}.service" > %{buildroot}%{_presetdir}/50-%{name}.preset
|
| 126 | 126 |
|
| 127 |
-ln -sfv %{_sbindir}/%{name} %{buildroot}%{_sbindir}/apache2
|
|
| 128 |
-ln -sfv /etc/%{name}/conf/%{name}.conf %{buildroot}/etc/%{name}/%{name}.conf
|
|
| 127 |
+ln -sfrv %{buildroot}%{_sbindir}/%{name} %{buildroot}%{_sbindir}/apache2
|
|
| 128 |
+ln -sfrv %{buildroot}%{_sysconfdir}/%{name}/conf/%{name}.conf %{buildroot}%{_sysconfdir}/%{name}/%{name}.conf
|
|
| 129 | 129 |
|
| 130 | 130 |
mkdir -p %{buildroot}%{_tmpfilesdir}
|
| 131 | 131 |
cat >> %{buildroot}%{_tmpfilesdir}/%{name}.conf << EOF
|
| ... | ... |
@@ -145,12 +143,12 @@ if [ $1 -eq 1 ]; then |
| 145 | 145 |
-s /bin/false -u 25 apache |
| 146 | 146 |
fi |
| 147 | 147 |
|
| 148 |
- if [ -h /etc/mime.types ]; then |
|
| 149 |
- mv /etc/mime.types /etc/mime.types.orig |
|
| 148 |
+ if [ -h %{_sysconfdir}/mime.types ]; then
|
|
| 149 |
+ mv %{_sysconfdir}/mime.types %{_sysconfdir}/mime.types.orig
|
|
| 150 | 150 |
fi |
| 151 | 151 |
fi |
| 152 | 152 |
|
| 153 |
-ln -sf /etc/%{name}/conf/mime.types /etc/mime.types
|
|
| 153 |
+ln -sfr %{_sysconfdir}/%{name}/conf/mime.types %{_sysconfdir}/mime.types
|
|
| 154 | 154 |
systemd-tmpfiles --create %{name}.conf
|
| 155 | 155 |
%systemd_post %{name}.service
|
| 156 | 156 |
|
| ... | ... |
@@ -160,8 +158,8 @@ systemd-tmpfiles --create %{name}.conf
|
| 160 | 160 |
%postun |
| 161 | 161 |
/sbin/ldconfig |
| 162 | 162 |
if [ $1 -eq 0 ]; then |
| 163 |
- if [ -f /etc/mime.types.orig ]; then |
|
| 164 |
- mv /etc/mime.types.orig /etc/mime.types |
|
| 163 |
+ if [ -f %{_sysconfdir}/mime.types.orig ]; then
|
|
| 164 |
+ mv %{_sysconfdir}/mime.types.orig %{_sysconfdir}/mime.types
|
|
| 165 | 165 |
fi |
| 166 | 166 |
fi |
| 167 | 167 |
%systemd_postun_with_restart %{name}.service
|
| ... | ... |
@@ -204,6 +202,8 @@ fi |
| 204 | 204 |
%{_bindir}/dbmmanage
|
| 205 | 205 |
|
| 206 | 206 |
%changelog |
| 207 |
+* Wed Feb 08 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 2.4.55-2 |
|
| 208 |
+- Bump version as a part of openldap upgrade |
|
| 207 | 209 |
* Mon Jan 30 2023 Nitesh Kumar <kunitesh@vmware.com> 2.4.55-1 |
| 208 | 210 |
- Upgrade to v2.4.55 to fix following CVE's: |
| 209 | 211 |
- CVE-2006-20001, CVE-2022-37436, and CVE-2022-36760 |
| ... | ... |
@@ -1,9 +1,8 @@ |
| 1 |
-%global nssdir %{_lib}
|
|
| 2 |
-%global pamdir %{_lib}/security
|
|
| 1 |
+%global pamdir %{_libdir}/security
|
|
| 3 | 2 |
|
| 4 | 3 |
Name: nss-pam-ldapd |
| 5 | 4 |
Version: 0.9.12 |
| 6 |
-Release: 2%{?dist}
|
|
| 5 |
+Release: 3%{?dist}
|
|
| 7 | 6 |
Summary: nsswitch module which uses directory servers |
| 8 | 7 |
License: LGPLv2+ |
| 9 | 8 |
URL: https://github.com/arthurdejong/nss-pam-ldapd |
| ... | ... |
@@ -11,16 +10,20 @@ Group: System Environment/Security |
| 11 | 11 |
Vendor: VMware, Inc. |
| 12 | 12 |
Distribution: Photon |
| 13 | 13 |
|
| 14 |
-Source0: http://arthurdejong.org/nss-pam-ldapd/nss-pam-ldapd-%{version}.tar.gz
|
|
| 15 |
-%define sha512 %{name}=da154303ba2f86b8653d978acfbba4633d0190afd353b6a57386391078c531bf7b11195fbabbe53cf6f36545c6f1c71b9567fd042892a73251bf0016c5f018ee
|
|
| 14 |
+Source0: http://arthurdejong.org/nss-pam-ldapd/nss-pam-ldapd-%{version}.tar.gz
|
|
| 15 |
+%define sha512 %{name}=da154303ba2f86b8653d978acfbba4633d0190afd353b6a57386391078c531bf7b11195fbabbe53cf6f36545c6f1c71b9567fd042892a73251bf0016c5f018ee
|
|
| 16 |
+ |
|
| 16 | 17 |
Source1: nslcd.tmpfiles |
| 17 | 18 |
Source2: nslcd.service |
| 18 | 19 |
|
| 19 |
-BuildRequires: openldap, krb5-devel |
|
| 20 |
-BuildRequires: autoconf, automake |
|
| 20 |
+BuildRequires: openldap-devel |
|
| 21 |
+BuildRequires: krb5-devel |
|
| 22 |
+BuildRequires: automake |
|
| 23 |
+BuildRequires: autoconf |
|
| 21 | 24 |
BuildRequires: Linux-PAM-devel |
| 22 | 25 |
%{?systemd_requires}
|
| 23 | 26 |
|
| 27 |
+Requires: systemd |
|
| 24 | 28 |
Requires: openldap |
| 25 | 29 |
Requires: krb5 |
| 26 | 30 |
Requires: Linux-PAM |
| ... | ... |
@@ -32,47 +35,39 @@ nsswitch module. |
| 32 | 32 |
|
| 33 | 33 |
%prep |
| 34 | 34 |
%autosetup -p1 |
| 35 |
-autoreconf -f -i |
|
| 36 | 35 |
|
| 37 | 36 |
%build |
| 38 |
-%configure --libdir=%{nssdir} \
|
|
| 37 |
+autoreconf -f -i |
|
| 38 |
+%configure --libdir=%{_libdir} \
|
|
| 39 | 39 |
--disable-utils \ |
| 40 | 40 |
--with-pam-seclib-dir=%{pamdir}
|
| 41 |
-%make_build |
|
| 42 | 41 |
|
| 43 |
-%check |
|
| 44 |
-make check %{?_smp_mflags}
|
|
| 42 |
+%make_build |
|
| 45 | 43 |
|
| 46 | 44 |
%install |
| 47 |
-rm -rf %{buildroot}
|
|
| 48 |
-make install DESTDIR=%{buildroot} %{?_smp_mflags}
|
|
| 49 |
-mkdir -p %{buildroot}/{%{_libdir},%{_unitdir}}
|
|
| 50 |
-install -p -m644 %{SOURCE2} %{buildroot}/%{_unitdir}/
|
|
| 45 |
+%make_install %{?_smp_mflags}
|
|
| 46 |
+mkdir -p %{buildroot}{%{_libdir},%{_unitdir}} \
|
|
| 47 |
+ %{buildroot}/run/nslcd \
|
|
| 48 |
+ %{buildroot}%{_tmpfilesdir}
|
|
| 49 |
+ |
|
| 50 |
+install -p -m644 %{SOURCE2} %{buildroot}%{_unitdir}/
|
|
| 51 | 51 |
|
| 52 |
-ln -s libnss_ldap.so.2 %{buildroot}/%{nssdir}/libnss_ldap.so
|
|
| 52 |
+ln -sfrv %{buildroot}%{_libdir}/libnss_ldap.so.2 %{buildroot}%{_libdir}/libnss_ldap.so
|
|
| 53 | 53 |
|
| 54 | 54 |
sed -i -e 's,^uid.*,uid nslcd,g' -e 's,^gid.*,gid ldap,g' \ |
| 55 |
- %{buildroot}/%{_sysconfdir}/nslcd.conf
|
|
| 55 |
+ %{buildroot}%{_sysconfdir}/nslcd.conf
|
|
| 56 | 56 |
|
| 57 |
-mkdir -p -m 0755 %{buildroot}/var/run/nslcd
|
|
| 58 |
-mkdir -p -m 0755 %{buildroot}/%{_tmpfilesdir}
|
|
| 59 |
-install -p -m 0644 %{SOURCE1} %{buildroot}/%{_tmpfilesdir}/%{name}.conf
|
|
| 57 |
+install -p -m 0644 %{SOURCE1} %{buildroot}%{_tmpfilesdir}/%{name}.conf
|
|
| 60 | 58 |
|
| 61 |
-%files |
|
| 62 |
-%defattr(-,root,root) |
|
| 63 |
-%doc AUTHORS ChangeLog COPYING HACKING NEWS README TODO |
|
| 64 |
-%{_sbindir}/*
|
|
| 65 |
-%{nssdir}/*.so*
|
|
| 66 |
-%{pamdir}/pam_ldap.so
|
|
| 67 |
-%attr(0600,root,root) %config(noreplace) /etc/nslcd.conf |
|
| 68 |
-%attr(0644,root,root) %config(noreplace) %{_tmpfilesdir}/%{name}.conf
|
|
| 69 |
-%{_unitdir}/nslcd.service
|
|
| 70 |
-%attr(0775,nslcd,root) /var/run/nslcd |
|
| 59 |
+%if 0%{?with_check}
|
|
| 60 |
+%check |
|
| 61 |
+make check %{?_smp_mflags}
|
|
| 62 |
+%endif |
|
| 71 | 63 |
|
| 72 | 64 |
%pre |
| 73 |
-%{_bindir}/getent group ldap >/dev/null || %{_sbindir}/groupadd -r ldap
|
|
| 74 |
-%{_bindir}/getent passwd nslcd >/dev/null || \
|
|
| 75 |
- %{_sbindir}/useradd -r -g ldap -d / -s %{_sbindir}/nologin -c "nslcd ldap user" nslcd
|
|
| 65 |
+getent group ldap >/dev/null || groupadd -r ldap |
|
| 66 |
+getent passwd nslcd >/dev/null || \ |
|
| 67 |
+ useradd -r -g ldap -d / -s %{_sbindir}/nologin -c "nslcd ldap user" nslcd
|
|
| 76 | 68 |
|
| 77 | 69 |
%post |
| 78 | 70 |
/sbin/ldconfig |
| ... | ... |
@@ -84,15 +79,23 @@ install -p -m 0644 %{SOURCE1} %{buildroot}/%{_tmpfilesdir}/%{name}.conf
|
| 84 | 84 |
%postun |
| 85 | 85 |
/sbin/ldconfig |
| 86 | 86 |
%systemd_postun_with_restart nslcd.service |
| 87 |
-if [ $1 -eq 0 ]; then |
|
| 88 |
- %{_bindir}/getent passwd nslcd > /dev/null && %{_sbindir}/userdel -f nslcd
|
|
| 89 |
- %{_bindir}/getent group ldap > /dev/null && %{_sbindir}/groupdel -f ldap
|
|
| 90 |
-fi |
|
| 91 | 87 |
|
| 92 | 88 |
%clean |
| 93 | 89 |
rm -rf %{buildroot}/*
|
| 94 | 90 |
|
| 91 |
+%files |
|
| 92 |
+%defattr(-,root,root) |
|
| 93 |
+%{_sbindir}/*
|
|
| 94 |
+%{_libdir}/*.so*
|
|
| 95 |
+%{pamdir}/pam_ldap.so
|
|
| 96 |
+%attr(0600,root,root) %config(noreplace) %{_sysconfdir}/nslcd.conf
|
|
| 97 |
+%attr(0644,root,root) %config(noreplace) %{_tmpfilesdir}/%{name}.conf
|
|
| 98 |
+%{_unitdir}/nslcd.service
|
|
| 99 |
+%attr(0775,nslcd,root) /run/nslcd |
|
| 100 |
+ |
|
| 95 | 101 |
%changelog |
| 102 |
+* Wed Feb 08 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 0.9.12-3 |
|
| 103 |
+- Bump version as a part of openldap upgrade |
|
| 96 | 104 |
* Thu Jan 26 2023 Ashwin Dayanand Kamat <kashwindayan@vmware.com> 0.9.12-2 |
| 97 | 105 |
- Bump version as a part of krb5 upgrade |
| 98 | 106 |
* Mon May 30 2022 Gerrit Photon <photon-checkins@vmware.com> 0.9.12-1 |
| 99 | 107 |
deleted file mode 100644 |
| ... | ... |
@@ -1,376 +0,0 @@ |
| 1 |
-Submitted by: Bruce Dubbs <bdubbs at linuxfromscratch.org> |
|
| 2 |
-Date: 2012-03-26 |
|
| 3 |
-Initial Package Version: 2.4.40 |
|
| 4 |
-Upstream Status: BLFS Specific |
|
| 5 |
-Origin: Armin K. <krejzi at email dot com> and Debian |
|
| 6 |
-Comment: Rediffed by Fernando de Oliveira <famobr at yahoo dot |
|
| 7 |
- com dot br> for version 2.4.44 - 2016.02.06 |
|
| 8 |
- Rediffed by Pierre Labastie <pierre dot labastie at |
|
| 9 |
- neuf dot fr> to add mdb backend and slapd.ldif. See |
|
| 10 |
- ticket #7394 - 2016.02.24 |
|
| 11 |
- Rediffed by Douglas R. Reno <renodr at linuxfromscratch |
|
| 12 |
- dot org> to function on 2.4.51. - 2020-08-13 |
|
| 13 |
- Fixed the rediff to use a .c file instead of a .s, fixing |
|
| 14 |
- the test by Douglas R. Reno - 2020-08-13 |
|
| 15 |
-Description: Consolidate earlier patches to: |
|
| 16 |
- 1. Update various installation options, such as ldap database path, |
|
| 17 |
- configuration file options, slapd install location, etc. |
|
| 18 |
- 2. Remove reference to bdb module |
|
| 19 |
- 3. Enables symbol versioning in ldap libraries. Without these changes |
|
| 20 |
- some applications might generate a warning about missing symbol versions. |
|
| 21 |
- |
|
| 22 |
-diff -Naurp openldap-2.4.51.orig/build/openldap.m4 openldap-2.4.51/build/openldap.m4 |
|
| 23 |
-+++ openldap-2.4.51/build/openldap.m4 2020-08-13 20:37:46.287773696 -0500 |
|
| 24 |
-@@ -1115,3 +1115,54 @@ AC_DEFUN([OL_SSL_COMPAT], |
|
| 25 |
- #endif |
|
| 26 |
- ], [ol_cv_ssl_crl_compat=yes], [ol_cv_ssl_crl_compat=no])]) |
|
| 27 |
- ]) |
|
| 28 |
-+ |
|
| 29 |
-+dnl ==================================================================== |
|
| 30 |
-+dnl check for symbol versioning support |
|
| 31 |
-+AC_DEFUN([OL_SYMBOL_VERSIONING], |
|
| 32 |
-+[AC_CACHE_CHECK([for .symver assembler directive], |
|
| 33 |
-+ [ol_cv_asm_symver_directive],[ |
|
| 34 |
-+cat > conftest.s <<EOF |
|
| 35 |
-+${libc_cv_dot_text}
|
|
| 36 |
-+_sym: |
|
| 37 |
-+.symver _sym,sym@VERS |
|
| 38 |
-+EOF |
|
| 39 |
-+if ${CC-cc} -c $ASFLAGS conftest.s 1>&AS_MESSAGE_LOG_FD 2>&AS_MESSAGE_LOG_FD; then
|
|
| 40 |
-+ ol_cv_asm_symver_directive=yes |
|
| 41 |
-+else |
|
| 42 |
-+ ol_cv_asm_symver_directive=no |
|
| 43 |
-+fi |
|
| 44 |
-+rm -f conftest*]) |
|
| 45 |
-+AC_CACHE_CHECK([for ld --version-script], |
|
| 46 |
-+ [ol_cv_ld_version_script_option],[ |
|
| 47 |
-+if test $ol_cv_asm_symver_directive = yes; then |
|
| 48 |
-+ cat > conftest.s <<EOF |
|
| 49 |
-+${libc_cv_dot_text}
|
|
| 50 |
-+_sym: |
|
| 51 |
-+.symver _sym,sym@VERS |
|
| 52 |
-+EOF |
|
| 53 |
-+ cat > conftest.map <<EOF |
|
| 54 |
-+VERS_1 {
|
|
| 55 |
-+ global: sym; |
|
| 56 |
-+}; |
|
| 57 |
-+ |
|
| 58 |
-+VERS_2 {
|
|
| 59 |
-+ global: sym; |
|
| 60 |
-+} VERS_1; |
|
| 61 |
-+EOF |
|
| 62 |
-+ if ${CC-cc} -c $ASFLAGS conftest.s 1>&AS_MESSAGE_LOG_FD 2>&AS_MESSAGE_LOG_FD; then
|
|
| 63 |
-+ if AC_TRY_COMMAND([${CC-cc} $CFLAGS $LDFLAGS --shared
|
|
| 64 |
-+ -o conftest.so conftest.o |
|
| 65 |
-+ -Wl,--version-script,conftest.map |
|
| 66 |
-+ 1>&AS_MESSAGE_LOG_FD]); |
|
| 67 |
-+ then |
|
| 68 |
-+ ol_cv_ld_version_script_option=yes |
|
| 69 |
-+ else |
|
| 70 |
-+ ol_cv_ld_version_script_option=no |
|
| 71 |
-+ fi |
|
| 72 |
-+ else |
|
| 73 |
-+ ol_cv_ld_version_script_option=no |
|
| 74 |
-+ fi |
|
| 75 |
-+else |
|
| 76 |
-+ ol_cv_version_script_option=no |
|
| 77 |
-+fi |
|
| 78 |
-+rm -f conftest*])]) |
|
| 79 |
-diff -Naurp openldap-2.4.51.orig/build/top.mk openldap-2.4.51/build/top.mk |
|
| 80 |
-+++ openldap-2.4.51/build/top.mk 2020-08-13 17:05:06.758224238 -0500 |
|
| 81 |
-@@ -104,6 +104,9 @@ LTFLAGS_MOD = $(@PLAT@_LTFLAGS_MOD) |
|
| 82 |
- # LINK_LIBS referenced in library and module link commands. |
|
| 83 |
- LINK_LIBS = $(MOD_LIBS) $(@PLAT@_LINK_LIBS) |
|
| 84 |
- |
|
| 85 |
-+# option to pass to $(CC) to support library symbol versioning, if any |
|
| 86 |
-+VERSION_OPTION = @VERSION_OPTION@ |
|
| 87 |
-+ |
|
| 88 |
- LTSTATIC = @LTSTATIC@ |
|
| 89 |
- |
|
| 90 |
- LTLINK = $(LIBTOOL) --mode=link \ |
|
| 91 |
-@@ -113,7 +116,7 @@ LTCOMPILE_LIB = $(LIBTOOL) $(LTONLY_LIB) |
|
| 92 |
- $(CC) $(LT_CFLAGS) $(LT_CPPFLAGS) $(LIB_DEFS) -c |
|
| 93 |
- |
|
| 94 |
- LTLINK_LIB = $(LIBTOOL) $(LTONLY_LIB) --mode=link \ |
|
| 95 |
-- $(CC) $(LT_CFLAGS) $(LDFLAGS) $(LTFLAGS_LIB) |
|
| 96 |
-+ $(CC) $(LT_CFLAGS) $(LDFLAGS) $(LTFLAGS_LIB) $(VERSION_FLAGS) |
|
| 97 |
- |
|
| 98 |
- LTCOMPILE_MOD = $(LIBTOOL) $(LTONLY_MOD) --mode=compile \ |
|
| 99 |
- $(CC) $(LT_CFLAGS) $(LT_CPPFLAGS) $(MOD_DEFS) -c |
|
| 100 |
-diff -Naurp openldap-2.4.51.orig/configure.in openldap-2.4.51/configure.in |
|
| 101 |
-+++ openldap-2.4.51/configure.in 2020-08-13 17:06:23.965221512 -0500 |
|
| 102 |
-@@ -1921,6 +1921,13 @@ else |
|
| 103 |
- fi |
|
| 104 |
- AC_SUBST(LTSTATIC)dnl |
|
| 105 |
- |
|
| 106 |
-+VERSION_OPTION="" |
|
| 107 |
-+OL_SYMBOL_VERSIONING |
|
| 108 |
-+if test $ol_cv_ld_version_script_option = yes; then |
|
| 109 |
-+ VERSION_OPTION="-Wl,--version-script=" |
|
| 110 |
-+fi |
|
| 111 |
-+AC_SUBST(VERSION_OPTION) |
|
| 112 |
-+ |
|
| 113 |
- dnl ---------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
| 114 |
- if test $ol_enable_wrappers != no ; then |
|
| 115 |
- AC_CHECK_HEADERS(tcpd.h,[ |
|
| 116 |
-diff -Naurp openldap-2.4.51.orig/doc/man/man5/slapd-bdb.5 openldap-2.4.51/doc/man/man5/slapd-bdb.5 |
|
| 117 |
-+++ openldap-2.4.51/doc/man/man5/slapd-bdb.5 2020-08-13 17:06:49.002220627 -0500 |
|
| 118 |
-@@ -135,7 +135,7 @@ Specify the directory where the BDB file |
|
| 119 |
- associated indexes live. |
|
| 120 |
- A separate directory must be specified for each database. |
|
| 121 |
- The default is |
|
| 122 |
--.BR LOCALSTATEDIR/openldap\-data . |
|
| 123 |
-+.BR LOCALSTATEDIR/lib/openldap . |
|
| 124 |
- .TP |
|
| 125 |
- .B dirtyread |
|
| 126 |
- Allow reads of modified but not yet committed data. |
|
| 127 |
-diff -Naurp openldap-2.4.51.orig/doc/man/man5/slapd.conf.5 openldap-2.4.51/doc/man/man5/slapd.conf.5 |
|
| 128 |
-+++ openldap-2.4.51/doc/man/man5/slapd.conf.5 2020-08-13 17:08:39.869216713 -0500 |
|
| 129 |
-@@ -2037,7 +2037,7 @@ suffix "dc=our\-domain,dc=com" |
|
| 130 |
- # The database directory MUST exist prior to |
|
| 131 |
- # running slapd AND should only be accessible |
|
| 132 |
- # by the slapd/tools. Mode 0700 recommended. |
|
| 133 |
--directory LOCALSTATEDIR/openldap\-data |
|
| 134 |
-+directory LOCALSTATEDIR/lib/openldap |
|
| 135 |
- # Indices to maintain |
|
| 136 |
- index objectClass eq |
|
| 137 |
- index cn,sn,mail pres,eq,approx,sub |
|
| 138 |
-diff -Naurp openldap-2.4.51.orig/doc/man/man5/slapd-config.5 openldap-2.4.51/doc/man/man5/slapd-config.5 |
|
| 139 |
-+++ openldap-2.4.51/doc/man/man5/slapd-config.5 2020-08-13 17:07:57.079218224 -0500 |
|
| 140 |
-@@ -2067,7 +2067,7 @@ olcSuffix: "dc=our\-domain,dc=com" |
|
| 141 |
- # The database directory MUST exist prior to |
|
| 142 |
- # running slapd AND should only be accessible |
|
| 143 |
- # by the slapd/tools. Mode 0700 recommended. |
|
| 144 |
--olcDbDirectory: LOCALSTATEDIR/openldap\-data |
|
| 145 |
-+olcDbDirectory: LOCALSTATEDIR/lib/openldap |
|
| 146 |
- # Indices to maintain |
|
| 147 |
- olcDbIndex: objectClass eq |
|
| 148 |
- olcDbIndex: cn,sn,mail pres,eq,approx,sub |
|
| 149 |
-diff -Naurp openldap-2.4.51.orig/include/ldap_defaults.h openldap-2.4.51/include/ldap_defaults.h |
|
| 150 |
-+++ openldap-2.4.51/include/ldap_defaults.h 2020-08-13 17:10:11.297213484 -0500 |
|
| 151 |
-@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ |
|
| 152 |
- #define LDAP_ENV_PREFIX "LDAP" |
|
| 153 |
- |
|
| 154 |
- /* default ldapi:// socket */ |
|
| 155 |
--#define LDAPI_SOCK LDAP_RUNDIR LDAP_DIRSEP "run" LDAP_DIRSEP "ldapi" |
|
| 156 |
-+#define LDAPI_SOCK LDAP_RUNDIR LDAP_DIRSEP "run" LDAP_DIRSEP "openldap" LDAP_DIRSEP "ldapi" |
|
| 157 |
- |
|
| 158 |
- /* |
|
| 159 |
- * SLAPD DEFINITIONS |
|
| 160 |
-@@ -47,7 +47,7 @@ |
|
| 161 |
- /* location of the default slapd config file */ |
|
| 162 |
- #define SLAPD_DEFAULT_CONFIGFILE LDAP_SYSCONFDIR LDAP_DIRSEP "slapd.conf" |
|
| 163 |
- #define SLAPD_DEFAULT_CONFIGDIR LDAP_SYSCONFDIR LDAP_DIRSEP "slapd.d" |
|
| 164 |
--#define SLAPD_DEFAULT_DB_DIR LDAP_RUNDIR LDAP_DIRSEP "openldap-data" |
|
| 165 |
-+#define SLAPD_DEFAULT_DB_DIR LDAP_RUNDIR LDAP_DIRSEP "lib" LDAP_DIRSEP "openldap" |
|
| 166 |
- #define SLAPD_DEFAULT_DB_MODE 0600 |
|
| 167 |
- #define SLAPD_DEFAULT_UCDATA LDAP_DATADIR LDAP_DIRSEP "ucdata" |
|
| 168 |
- /* default max deref depth for aliases */ |
|
| 169 |
-diff -Naurp openldap-2.4.51.orig/libraries/liblber/liblber.map openldap-2.4.51/libraries/liblber/liblber.map |
|
| 170 |
-+++ openldap-2.4.51/libraries/liblber/liblber.map 2020-08-13 17:11:56.589209766 -0500 |
|
| 171 |
-@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@ |
|
| 172 |
-+OPENLDAP_2.4_2 {
|
|
| 173 |
-+ global: |
|
| 174 |
-+ ber_*; |
|
| 175 |
-+ der_alloc; |
|
| 176 |
-+ lutil_*; |
|
| 177 |
-+ local: |
|
| 178 |
-+ *; |
|
| 179 |
-+}; |
|
| 180 |
-diff -Naurp openldap-2.4.51.orig/libraries/liblber/Makefile.in openldap-2.4.51/libraries/liblber/Makefile.in |
|
| 181 |
-+++ openldap-2.4.51/libraries/liblber/Makefile.in 2020-08-13 17:11:02.505211676 -0500 |
|
| 182 |
-@@ -38,6 +38,9 @@ XLIBS = $(LIBRARY) $(LDAP_LIBLUTIL_A) |
|
| 183 |
- XXLIBS = |
|
| 184 |
- NT_LINK_LIBS = $(AC_LIBS) |
|
| 185 |
- UNIX_LINK_LIBS = $(AC_LIBS) |
|
| 186 |
-+ifneq (,$(VERSION_OPTION)) |
|
| 187 |
-+ VERSION_FLAGS = "$(VERSION_OPTION)$(srcdir)/liblber.map" |
|
| 188 |
-+endif |
|
| 189 |
- |
|
| 190 |
- dtest: $(XLIBS) dtest.o |
|
| 191 |
- $(LTLINK) -o $@ dtest.o $(LIBS) |
|
| 192 |
-@@ -48,6 +51,6 @@ idtest: $(XLIBS) idtest.o |
|
| 193 |
- |
|
| 194 |
- install-local: FORCE |
|
| 195 |
- -$(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 196 |
-- $(LTINSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) -m 644 $(LIBRARY) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 197 |
-+ $(LTINSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) -m 755 $(LIBRARY) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 198 |
- $(LTFINISH) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 199 |
- |
|
| 200 |
-diff -Naurp openldap-2.4.51.orig/libraries/libldap/libldap.map openldap-2.4.51/libraries/libldap/libldap.map |
|
| 201 |
-+++ openldap-2.4.51/libraries/libldap/libldap.map 2020-08-13 17:13:03.469207405 -0500 |
|
| 202 |
-@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@ |
|
| 203 |
-+OPENLDAP_2.4_2 {
|
|
| 204 |
-+ global: |
|
| 205 |
-+ ldap_*; |
|
| 206 |
-+ ldif_*; |
|
| 207 |
-+ local: |
|
| 208 |
-+ *; |
|
| 209 |
-+}; |
|
| 210 |
-diff -Naurp openldap-2.4.51.orig/libraries/libldap/Makefile.in openldap-2.4.51/libraries/libldap/Makefile.in |
|
| 211 |
-+++ openldap-2.4.51/libraries/libldap/Makefile.in 2020-08-13 17:12:40.847208204 -0500 |
|
| 212 |
-@@ -52,6 +52,9 @@ XLIBS = $(LIBRARY) $(LDAP_LIBLBER_LA) $( |
|
| 213 |
- XXLIBS = $(SECURITY_LIBS) $(LUTIL_LIBS) |
|
| 214 |
- NT_LINK_LIBS = $(LDAP_LIBLBER_LA) $(AC_LIBS) $(SECURITY_LIBS) |
|
| 215 |
- UNIX_LINK_LIBS = $(LDAP_LIBLBER_LA) $(AC_LIBS) $(SECURITY_LIBS) |
|
| 216 |
-+ifneq (,$(VERSION_OPTION)) |
|
| 217 |
-+ VERSION_FLAGS = $(VERSION_OPTION)$(srcdir)/libldap.map |
|
| 218 |
-+endif |
|
| 219 |
- |
|
| 220 |
- apitest: $(XLIBS) apitest.o |
|
| 221 |
- $(LTLINK) -o $@ apitest.o $(LIBS) |
|
| 222 |
-@@ -68,7 +71,7 @@ CFFILES=ldap.conf |
|
| 223 |
- |
|
| 224 |
- install-local: $(CFFILES) FORCE |
|
| 225 |
- -$(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 226 |
-- $(LTINSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) -m 644 $(LIBRARY) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 227 |
-+ $(LTINSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) -m 755 $(LIBRARY) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 228 |
- $(LTFINISH) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 229 |
- -$(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(sysconfdir) |
|
| 230 |
- @for i in $(CFFILES); do \ |
|
| 231 |
-diff -Naurp openldap-2.4.51.orig/libraries/libldap_r/Makefile.in openldap-2.4.51/libraries/libldap_r/Makefile.in |
|
| 232 |
-+++ openldap-2.4.51/libraries/libldap_r/Makefile.in 2020-08-13 17:14:46.760203758 -0500 |
|
| 233 |
-@@ -61,6 +61,9 @@ XXLIBS = $(SECURITY_LIBS) $(LUTIL_LIBS) |
|
| 234 |
- XXXLIBS = $(LTHREAD_LIBS) |
|
| 235 |
- NT_LINK_LIBS = $(LDAP_LIBLBER_LA) $(AC_LIBS) $(SECURITY_LIBS) |
|
| 236 |
- UNIX_LINK_LIBS = $(LDAP_LIBLBER_LA) $(AC_LIBS) $(SECURITY_LIBS) $(LTHREAD_LIBS) |
|
| 237 |
-+ifneq (,$(VERSION_OPTION)) |
|
| 238 |
-+ VERSION_FLAGS = "$(VERSION_OPTION)$(XXDIR)/libldap.map" |
|
| 239 |
-+endif |
|
| 240 |
- |
|
| 241 |
- .links : Makefile |
|
| 242 |
- @for i in $(XXSRCS); do \ |
|
| 243 |
-@@ -83,6 +86,6 @@ ltest: $(XLIBS) test.o |
|
| 244 |
- |
|
| 245 |
- install-local: $(CFFILES) FORCE |
|
| 246 |
- -$(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 247 |
-- $(LTINSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) -m 644 $(LIBRARY) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 248 |
-+ $(LTINSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) -m 755 $(LIBRARY) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 249 |
- $(LTFINISH) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 250 |
- |
|
| 251 |
-diff -Naurp openldap-2.4.51.orig/servers/slapd/Makefile.in openldap-2.4.51/servers/slapd/Makefile.in |
|
| 252 |
-+++ openldap-2.4.51/servers/slapd/Makefile.in 2020-08-13 17:16:03.270201056 -0500 |
|
| 253 |
-@@ -376,10 +376,10 @@ install-local-srv: install-slapd install |
|
| 254 |
- install-conf install-dbc-maybe install-schema install-tools |
|
| 255 |
- |
|
| 256 |
- install-slapd: FORCE |
|
| 257 |
-- -$(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(libexecdir) |
|
| 258 |
-+ -$(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir) |
|
| 259 |
- -$(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(localstatedir)/run |
|
| 260 |
- $(LTINSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) $(STRIP) -m 755 \ |
|
| 261 |
-- slapd$(EXEEXT) $(DESTDIR)$(libexecdir) |
|
| 262 |
-+ slapd$(EXEEXT) $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir) |
|
| 263 |
- @for i in $(SUBDIRS); do \ |
|
| 264 |
- if test -d $$i && test -f $$i/Makefile ; then \ |
|
| 265 |
- echo; echo " cd $$i; $(MAKE) $(MFLAGS) install"; \ |
|
| 266 |
-@@ -445,9 +445,9 @@ install-conf: FORCE |
|
| 267 |
- |
|
| 268 |
- install-db-config: FORCE |
|
| 269 |
- @-$(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(localstatedir) $(DESTDIR)$(sysconfdir) |
|
| 270 |
-- @-$(INSTALL) -m 700 -d $(DESTDIR)$(localstatedir)/openldap-data |
|
| 271 |
-+ @-$(INSTALL) -m 700 -d $(DESTDIR)$(localstatedir)/lib/openldap |
|
| 272 |
- $(INSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) -m 600 $(srcdir)/DB_CONFIG \ |
|
| 273 |
-- $(DESTDIR)$(localstatedir)/openldap-data/DB_CONFIG.example |
|
| 274 |
-+ $(DESTDIR)$(localstatedir)/lib/openldap/DB_CONFIG.example |
|
| 275 |
- $(INSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) -m 600 $(srcdir)/DB_CONFIG \ |
|
| 276 |
- $(DESTDIR)$(sysconfdir)/DB_CONFIG.example |
|
| 277 |
- |
|
| 278 |
-@@ -455,6 +455,6 @@ install-tools: FORCE |
|
| 279 |
- -$(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir) |
|
| 280 |
- for i in $(SLAPTOOLS); do \ |
|
| 281 |
- $(RM) $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir)/$$i$(EXEEXT); \ |
|
| 282 |
-- $(LN_S) -f $(DESTDIR)$(libexecdir)/slapd$(EXEEXT) $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir)/$$i$(EXEEXT); \ |
|
| 283 |
-+ $(LN_S) -f $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir)/slapd$(EXEEXT) $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir)/$$i$(EXEEXT); \ |
|
| 284 |
- done |
|
| 285 |
- |
|
| 286 |
-diff -Naurp openldap-2.4.51.orig/servers/slapd/slapd.conf openldap-2.4.51/servers/slapd/slapd.conf |
|
| 287 |
-+++ openldap-2.4.51/servers/slapd/slapd.conf 2020-08-13 17:17:01.239199009 -0500 |
|
| 288 |
-@@ -10,12 +10,12 @@ include %SYSCONFDIR%/schema/core.schema |
|
| 289 |
- # service AND an understanding of referrals. |
|
| 290 |
- #referral ldap://root.openldap.org |
|
| 291 |
- |
|
| 292 |
--pidfile %LOCALSTATEDIR%/run/slapd.pid |
|
| 293 |
--argsfile %LOCALSTATEDIR%/run/slapd.args |
|
| 294 |
-+pidfile %LOCALSTATEDIR%/run/openldap/slapd.pid |
|
| 295 |
-+argsfile %LOCALSTATEDIR%/run/openldap/slapd.args |
|
| 296 |
- |
|
| 297 |
- # Load dynamic backend modules: |
|
| 298 |
--# modulepath %MODULEDIR% |
|
| 299 |
--# moduleload back_mdb.la |
|
| 300 |
-+modulepath %MODULEDIR% |
|
| 301 |
-+moduleload back_mdb.la |
|
| 302 |
- # moduleload back_ldap.la |
|
| 303 |
- |
|
| 304 |
- # Sample security restrictions |
|
| 305 |
-@@ -60,6 +60,6 @@ rootpw secret |
|
| 306 |
- # The database directory MUST exist prior to running slapd AND |
|
| 307 |
- # should only be accessible by the slapd and slap tools. |
|
| 308 |
- # Mode 700 recommended. |
|
| 309 |
--directory %LOCALSTATEDIR%/openldap-data |
|
| 310 |
-+directory %LOCALSTATEDIR%/lib/openldap |
|
| 311 |
- # Indices to maintain |
|
| 312 |
- index objectClass eq |
|
| 313 |
-diff -Naurp openldap-2.4.51.orig/servers/slapd/slapd.ldif openldap-2.4.51/servers/slapd/slapd.ldif |
|
| 314 |
-+++ openldap-2.4.51/servers/slapd/slapd.ldif 2020-08-13 17:18:00.106196931 -0500 |
|
| 315 |
-@@ -9,8 +9,8 @@ cn: config |
|
| 316 |
- # |
|
| 317 |
- # Define global ACLs to disable default read access. |
|
| 318 |
- # |
|
| 319 |
--olcArgsFile: %LOCALSTATEDIR%/run/slapd.args |
|
| 320 |
--olcPidFile: %LOCALSTATEDIR%/run/slapd.pid |
|
| 321 |
-+olcArgsFile: %LOCALSTATEDIR%/run/openldap/slapd.args |
|
| 322 |
-+olcPidFile: %LOCALSTATEDIR%/run/openldap/slapd.pid |
|
| 323 |
- # |
|
| 324 |
- # Do not enable referrals until AFTER you have a working directory |
|
| 325 |
- # service AND an understanding of referrals. |
|
| 326 |
-@@ -26,11 +26,11 @@ olcPidFile: %LOCALSTATEDIR%/run/slapd.pi |
|
| 327 |
- # |
|
| 328 |
- # Load dynamic backend modules: |
|
| 329 |
- # |
|
| 330 |
--#dn: cn=module,cn=config |
|
| 331 |
--#objectClass: olcModuleList |
|
| 332 |
--#cn: module |
|
| 333 |
--#olcModulepath: %MODULEDIR% |
|
| 334 |
--#olcModuleload: back_mdb.la |
|
| 335 |
-+dn: cn=module,cn=config |
|
| 336 |
-+objectClass: olcModuleList |
|
| 337 |
-+cn: module |
|
| 338 |
-+olcModulepath: %MODULEDIR% |
|
| 339 |
-+olcModuleload: back_mdb.la |
|
| 340 |
- #olcModuleload: back_bdb.la |
|
| 341 |
- #olcModuleload: back_hdb.la |
|
| 342 |
- #olcModuleload: back_ldap.la |
|
| 343 |
-@@ -91,6 +91,6 @@ olcRootPW: secret |
|
| 344 |
- # The database directory MUST exist prior to running slapd AND |
|
| 345 |
- # should only be accessible by the slapd and slap tools. |
|
| 346 |
- # Mode 700 recommended. |
|
| 347 |
--olcDbDirectory: %LOCALSTATEDIR%/openldap-data |
|
| 348 |
-+olcDbDirectory: %LOCALSTATEDIR%/lib/openldap |
|
| 349 |
- # Indices to maintain |
|
| 350 |
- olcDbIndex: objectClass eq |
|
| 351 |
-diff -Naurp openldap-2.4.51.orig/servers/slapd/slapi/Makefile.in openldap-2.4.51/servers/slapd/slapi/Makefile.in |
|
| 352 |
-+++ openldap-2.4.51/servers/slapd/slapi/Makefile.in 2020-08-13 17:18:16.643196347 -0500 |
|
| 353 |
-@@ -46,6 +46,6 @@ BUILD_MOD = @BUILD_SLAPI@ |
|
| 354 |
- install-local: FORCE |
|
| 355 |
- if test "$(BUILD_MOD)" = "yes"; then \ |
|
| 356 |
- $(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir); \ |
|
| 357 |
-- $(LTINSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) -m 644 $(LIBRARY) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir); \ |
|
| 358 |
-+ $(LTINSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) -m 755 $(LIBRARY) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir); \ |
|
| 359 |
- fi |
|
| 360 |
- |
| 361 | 1 |
new file mode 100644 |
| ... | ... |
@@ -0,0 +1,4640 @@ |
| 0 |
+diff -Naurp openldap-2.6.2.orig/doc/man/man5/slapd.conf.5 openldap-2.6.2/doc/man/man5/slapd.conf.5 |
|
| 1 |
+--- openldap-2.6.2.orig/doc/man/man5/slapd.conf.5 2022-05-04 16:55:23.000000000 +0200 |
|
| 2 |
+@@ -2122,7 +2122,7 @@ suffix "dc=our\-domain,dc=com" |
|
| 3 |
+ # The database directory MUST exist prior to |
|
| 4 |
+ # running slapd AND should only be accessible |
|
| 5 |
+ # by the slapd/tools. Mode 0700 recommended. |
|
| 6 |
+-directory LOCALSTATEDIR/openldap\-data |
|
| 7 |
++directory LOCALSTATEDIR/lib/openldap |
|
| 8 |
+ # Indices to maintain |
|
| 9 |
+ index objectClass eq |
|
| 10 |
+ index cn,sn,mail pres,eq,approx,sub |
|
| 11 |
+diff -Naurp openldap-2.6.2.orig/doc/man/man5/slapd.conf.5.orig openldap-2.6.2/doc/man/man5/slapd.conf.5.orig |
|
| 12 |
+--- openldap-2.6.2.orig/doc/man/man5/slapd.conf.5.orig 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100 |
|
| 13 |
+@@ -0,0 +1,2167 @@ |
|
| 14 |
++.TH SLAPD.CONF 5 "RELEASEDATE" "OpenLDAP LDVERSION" |
|
| 15 |
++.\" Copyright 1998-2022 The OpenLDAP Foundation All Rights Reserved. |
|
| 16 |
++.\" Copying restrictions apply. See COPYRIGHT/LICENSE. |
|
| 17 |
++.\" $OpenLDAP$ |
|
| 18 |
++.SH NAME |
|
| 19 |
++slapd.conf \- configuration file for slapd, the stand-alone LDAP daemon |
|
| 20 |
++.SH SYNOPSIS |
|
| 21 |
++ETCDIR/slapd.conf |
|
| 22 |
++.SH DESCRIPTION |
|
| 23 |
++The file |
|
| 24 |
++.B ETCDIR/slapd.conf |
|
| 25 |
++contains configuration information for the |
|
| 26 |
++.BR slapd (8) |
|
| 27 |
++daemon. This configuration file is also used by the SLAPD tools |
|
| 28 |
++.BR slapacl (8), |
|
| 29 |
++.BR slapadd (8), |
|
| 30 |
++.BR slapauth (8), |
|
| 31 |
++.BR slapcat (8), |
|
| 32 |
++.BR slapdn (8), |
|
| 33 |
++.BR slapindex (8), |
|
| 34 |
++.BR slapmodify (8), |
|
| 35 |
++and |
|
| 36 |
++.BR slaptest (8). |
|
| 37 |
++.LP |
|
| 38 |
++The |
|
| 39 |
++.B slapd.conf |
|
| 40 |
++file consists of a series of global configuration options that apply to |
|
| 41 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 42 |
++as a whole (including all backends), followed by zero or more database |
|
| 43 |
++backend definitions that contain information specific to a backend |
|
| 44 |
++instance. |
|
| 45 |
++The configuration options are case-insensitive; |
|
| 46 |
++their value, on a case by case basis, may be case-sensitive. |
|
| 47 |
++.LP |
|
| 48 |
++The general format of |
|
| 49 |
++.B slapd.conf |
|
| 50 |
++is as follows: |
|
| 51 |
++.LP |
|
| 52 |
++.nf |
|
| 53 |
++ # comment - these options apply to every database |
|
| 54 |
++ <global configuration options> |
|
| 55 |
++ # first database definition & configuration options |
|
| 56 |
++ database <backend 1 type> |
|
| 57 |
++ <configuration options specific to backend 1> |
|
| 58 |
++ # subsequent database definitions & configuration options |
|
| 59 |
++ ... |
|
| 60 |
++.fi |
|
| 61 |
++.LP |
|
| 62 |
++As many backend-specific sections as desired may be included. Global |
|
| 63 |
++options can be overridden in a backend (for options that appear more |
|
| 64 |
++than once, the last appearance in the |
|
| 65 |
++.B slapd.conf |
|
| 66 |
++file is used). |
|
| 67 |
++.LP |
|
| 68 |
++If a line begins with white space, it is considered a continuation |
|
| 69 |
++of the previous line. No physical line should be over 2000 bytes |
|
| 70 |
++long. |
|
| 71 |
++.LP |
|
| 72 |
++Blank lines and comment lines beginning with |
|
| 73 |
++a `#' character are ignored. Note: continuation lines are unwrapped |
|
| 74 |
++before comment processing is applied. |
|
| 75 |
++.LP |
|
| 76 |
++Arguments on configuration lines are separated by white space. If an |
|
| 77 |
++argument contains white space, the argument should be enclosed in |
|
| 78 |
++double quotes. If an argument contains a double quote (`"') or a |
|
| 79 |
++backslash character (`\\'), the character should be preceded by a |
|
| 80 |
++backslash character. |
|
| 81 |
++.LP |
|
| 82 |
++The specific configuration options available are discussed below in the |
|
| 83 |
++Global Configuration Options, General Backend Options, and General Database |
|
| 84 |
++Options. Backend-specific options are discussed in the |
|
| 85 |
++.B slapd\-<backend>(5) |
|
| 86 |
++manual pages. Refer to the "OpenLDAP Administrator's Guide" for more |
|
| 87 |
++details on the slapd configuration file. |
|
| 88 |
++.SH GLOBAL CONFIGURATION OPTIONS |
|
| 89 |
++Options described in this section apply to all backends, unless specifically |
|
| 90 |
++overridden in a backend definition. Arguments that should be replaced by |
|
| 91 |
++actual text are shown in brackets <>. |
|
| 92 |
++.TP |
|
| 93 |
++.B access to <what> "[ by <who> <access> <control> ]+" |
|
| 94 |
++Grant access (specified by <access>) to a set of entries and/or |
|
| 95 |
++attributes (specified by <what>) by one or more requestors (specified |
|
| 96 |
++by <who>). |
|
| 97 |
++If no access controls are present, the default policy |
|
| 98 |
++allows anyone and everyone to read anything but restricts |
|
| 99 |
++updates to rootdn. (e.g., "access to * by * read"). |
|
| 100 |
++The rootdn can always read and write EVERYTHING! |
|
| 101 |
++See |
|
| 102 |
++.BR slapd.access (5) |
|
| 103 |
++and the "OpenLDAP's Administrator's Guide" for details. |
|
| 104 |
++.TP |
|
| 105 |
++.B allow <features> |
|
| 106 |
++Specify a set of features (separated by white space) to |
|
| 107 |
++allow (default none). |
|
| 108 |
++.B bind_v2 |
|
| 109 |
++allows acceptance of LDAPv2 bind requests. Note that |
|
| 110 |
++.BR slapd (8) |
|
| 111 |
++does not truly implement LDAPv2 (RFC 1777), now Historic (RFC 3494). |
|
| 112 |
++.B bind_anon_cred |
|
| 113 |
++allows anonymous bind when credentials are not empty (e.g. |
|
| 114 |
++when DN is empty). |
|
| 115 |
++.B bind_anon_dn |
|
| 116 |
++allows unauthenticated (anonymous) bind when DN is not empty. |
|
| 117 |
++.B update_anon |
|
| 118 |
++allows unauthenticated (anonymous) update operations to be processed |
|
| 119 |
++(subject to access controls and other administrative limits). |
|
| 120 |
++.B proxy_authz_anon |
|
| 121 |
++allows unauthenticated (anonymous) proxy authorization control to be processed |
|
| 122 |
++(subject to access controls, authorization and other administrative limits). |
|
| 123 |
++.TP |
|
| 124 |
++.B argsfile <filename> |
|
| 125 |
++The (absolute) name of a file that will hold the |
|
| 126 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 127 |
++server's command line (program name and options). |
|
| 128 |
++.TP |
|
| 129 |
++.B attributeoptions [option-name]... |
|
| 130 |
++Define tagging attribute options or option tag/range prefixes. |
|
| 131 |
++Options must not end with `\-', prefixes must end with `\-'. |
|
| 132 |
++The `lang\-' prefix is predefined. |
|
| 133 |
++If you use the |
|
| 134 |
++.B attributeoptions |
|
| 135 |
++directive, `lang\-' will no longer be defined and you must specify it |
|
| 136 |
++explicitly if you want it defined. |
|
| 137 |
++ |
|
| 138 |
++An attribute description with a tagging option is a subtype of that |
|
| 139 |
++attribute description without the option. |
|
| 140 |
++Except for that, options defined this way have no special semantics. |
|
| 141 |
++Prefixes defined this way work like the `lang\-' options: |
|
| 142 |
++They define a prefix for tagging options starting with the prefix. |
|
| 143 |
++That is, if you define the prefix `x\-foo\-', you can use the option |
|
| 144 |
++`x\-foo\-bar'. |
|
| 145 |
++Furthermore, in a search or compare, a prefix or range name (with |
|
| 146 |
++a trailing `\-') matches all options starting with that name, as well |
|
| 147 |
++as the option with the range name sans the trailing `\-'. |
|
| 148 |
++That is, `x\-foo\-bar\-' matches `x\-foo\-bar' and `x\-foo\-bar\-baz'. |
|
| 149 |
++ |
|
| 150 |
++RFC 4520 reserves options beginning with `x\-' for private experiments. |
|
| 151 |
++Other options should be registered with IANA, see RFC 4520 section 3.5. |
|
| 152 |
++OpenLDAP also has the `binary' option built in, but this is a transfer |
|
| 153 |
++option, not a tagging option. |
|
| 154 |
++.HP |
|
| 155 |
++.hy 0 |
|
| 156 |
++.B attributetype "(\ <oid>\ |
|
| 157 |
++ [NAME\ <name>]\ |
|
| 158 |
++ [DESC\ <description>]\ |
|
| 159 |
++ [OBSOLETE]\ |
|
| 160 |
++ [SUP\ <oid>]\ |
|
| 161 |
++ [EQUALITY\ <oid>]\ |
|
| 162 |
++ [ORDERING\ <oid>]\ |
|
| 163 |
++ [SUBSTR\ <oid>]\ |
|
| 164 |
++ [SYNTAX\ <oidlen>]\ |
|
| 165 |
++ [SINGLE\-VALUE]\ |
|
| 166 |
++ [COLLECTIVE]\ |
|
| 167 |
++ [NO\-USER\-MODIFICATION]\ |
|
| 168 |
++ [USAGE\ <attributeUsage>]\ )" |
|
| 169 |
++.RS |
|
| 170 |
++Specify an attribute type using the LDAPv3 syntax defined in RFC 4512. |
|
| 171 |
++The slapd parser extends the RFC 4512 definition by allowing string |
|
| 172 |
++forms as well as numeric OIDs to be used for the attribute OID and |
|
| 173 |
++attribute syntax OID. |
|
| 174 |
++(See the |
|
| 175 |
++.B objectidentifier |
|
| 176 |
++description.) |
|
| 177 |
++.RE |
|
| 178 |
++.TP |
|
| 179 |
++.B authid\-rewrite<cmd> <args> |
|
| 180 |
++Used by the authentication framework to convert simple user names |
|
| 181 |
++to an LDAP DN used for authorization purposes. |
|
| 182 |
++Its purpose is analogous to that of |
|
| 183 |
++.BR authz-regexp |
|
| 184 |
++(see below). |
|
| 185 |
++The prefix \fIauthid\-\fP is followed by a set of rules analogous |
|
| 186 |
++to those described in |
|
| 187 |
++.BR slapo\-rwm (5) |
|
| 188 |
++for data rewriting (replace the \fIrwm\-\fP prefix with \fIauthid\-\fP). |
|
| 189 |
++.B authid\-rewrite<cmd> |
|
| 190 |
++and |
|
| 191 |
++.B authz\-regexp |
|
| 192 |
++rules should not be intermixed. |
|
| 193 |
++.TP |
|
| 194 |
++.B authz\-policy <policy> |
|
| 195 |
++Used to specify which rules to use for Proxy Authorization. Proxy |
|
| 196 |
++authorization allows a client to authenticate to the server using one |
|
| 197 |
++user's credentials, but specify a different identity to use for authorization |
|
| 198 |
++and access control purposes. It essentially allows user A to login as user |
|
| 199 |
++B, using user A's password. |
|
| 200 |
++The |
|
| 201 |
++.B none |
|
| 202 |
++flag disables proxy authorization. This is the default setting. |
|
| 203 |
++The |
|
| 204 |
++.B from |
|
| 205 |
++flag will use rules in the |
|
| 206 |
++.I authzFrom |
|
| 207 |
++attribute of the authorization DN. |
|
| 208 |
++The |
|
| 209 |
++.B to |
|
| 210 |
++flag will use rules in the |
|
| 211 |
++.I authzTo |
|
| 212 |
++attribute of the authentication DN. |
|
| 213 |
++The |
|
| 214 |
++.B any |
|
| 215 |
++flag, an alias for the deprecated value of |
|
| 216 |
++.BR both , |
|
| 217 |
++will allow any of the above, whatever succeeds first (checked in |
|
| 218 |
++.BR to , |
|
| 219 |
++.B from |
|
| 220 |
++sequence. |
|
| 221 |
++The |
|
| 222 |
++.B all |
|
| 223 |
++flag requires both authorizations to succeed. |
|
| 224 |
++.LP |
|
| 225 |
++.RS |
|
| 226 |
++The rules are mechanisms to specify which identities are allowed |
|
| 227 |
++to perform proxy authorization. |
|
| 228 |
++The |
|
| 229 |
++.I authzFrom |
|
| 230 |
++attribute in an entry specifies which other users |
|
| 231 |
++are allowed to proxy login to this entry. The |
|
| 232 |
++.I authzTo |
|
| 233 |
++attribute in |
|
| 234 |
++an entry specifies which other users this user can authorize as. Use of |
|
| 235 |
++.I authzTo |
|
| 236 |
++rules can be easily |
|
| 237 |
++abused if users are allowed to write arbitrary values to this attribute. |
|
| 238 |
++In general the |
|
| 239 |
++.I authzTo |
|
| 240 |
++attribute must be protected with ACLs such that |
|
| 241 |
++only privileged users can modify it. |
|
| 242 |
++The value of |
|
| 243 |
++.I authzFrom |
|
| 244 |
++and |
|
| 245 |
++.I authzTo |
|
| 246 |
++describes an |
|
| 247 |
++.B identity |
|
| 248 |
++or a set of identities; it can take five forms: |
|
| 249 |
++.RS |
|
| 250 |
++.TP |
|
| 251 |
++.B ldap:///<base>??[<scope>]?<filter> |
|
| 252 |
++.RE |
|
| 253 |
++.RS |
|
| 254 |
++.B dn[.<dnstyle>]:<pattern> |
|
| 255 |
++.RE |
|
| 256 |
++.RS |
|
| 257 |
++.B u[.<mech>[/<realm>]]:<pattern> |
|
| 258 |
++.RE |
|
| 259 |
++.RS |
|
| 260 |
++.B group[/objectClass[/attributeType]]:<pattern> |
|
| 261 |
++.RE |
|
| 262 |
++.RS |
|
| 263 |
++.B <pattern> |
|
| 264 |
++.RE |
|
| 265 |
++.RS |
|
| 266 |
++ |
|
| 267 |
++.B <dnstyle>:={exact|onelevel|children|subtree|regex}
|
|
| 268 |
++ |
|
| 269 |
++.RE |
|
| 270 |
++The first form is a valid LDAP |
|
| 271 |
++.B URI |
|
| 272 |
++where the |
|
| 273 |
++.IR <host>:<port> , |
|
| 274 |
++the |
|
| 275 |
++.I <attrs> |
|
| 276 |
++and the |
|
| 277 |
++.I <extensions> |
|
| 278 |
++portions must be absent, so that the search occurs locally on either |
|
| 279 |
++.I authzFrom |
|
| 280 |
++or |
|
| 281 |
++.IR authzTo . |
|
| 282 |
++ |
|
| 283 |
++.LP |
|
| 284 |
++The second form is a |
|
| 285 |
++.BR DN . |
|
| 286 |
++The optional |
|
| 287 |
++.B dnstyle |
|
| 288 |
++modifiers |
|
| 289 |
++.IR exact , |
|
| 290 |
++.IR onelevel , |
|
| 291 |
++.IR children , |
|
| 292 |
++and |
|
| 293 |
++.I subtree |
|
| 294 |
++provide exact, onelevel, children and subtree matches, which cause |
|
| 295 |
++.I <pattern> |
|
| 296 |
++to be normalized according to the DN normalization rules. |
|
| 297 |
++The special |
|
| 298 |
++.B dnstyle |
|
| 299 |
++modifier |
|
| 300 |
++.I regex |
|
| 301 |
++causes the |
|
| 302 |
++.I <pattern> |
|
| 303 |
++to be treated as a POSIX (''extended'') regular expression, as
|
|
| 304 |
++discussed in |
|
| 305 |
++.BR regex (7) |
|
| 306 |
++and/or |
|
| 307 |
++.BR re_format (7). |
|
| 308 |
++A pattern of |
|
| 309 |
++.I * |
|
| 310 |
++means any non-anonymous DN. |
|
| 311 |
++ |
|
| 312 |
++.LP |
|
| 313 |
++The third form is a SASL |
|
| 314 |
++.BR id . |
|
| 315 |
++The optional fields |
|
| 316 |
++.I <mech> |
|
| 317 |
++and |
|
| 318 |
++.I <realm> |
|
| 319 |
++allow specification of a SASL |
|
| 320 |
++.BR mechanism , |
|
| 321 |
++and eventually a SASL |
|
| 322 |
++.BR realm , |
|
| 323 |
++for those mechanisms that support one. |
|
| 324 |
++The need to allow the specification of a mechanism is still debated, |
|
| 325 |
++and users are strongly discouraged to rely on this possibility. |
|
| 326 |
++ |
|
| 327 |
++.LP |
|
| 328 |
++The fourth form is a group specification. |
|
| 329 |
++It consists of the keyword |
|
| 330 |
++.BR group , |
|
| 331 |
++optionally followed by the specification of the group |
|
| 332 |
++.B objectClass |
|
| 333 |
++and |
|
| 334 |
++.BR attributeType . |
|
| 335 |
++The |
|
| 336 |
++.B objectClass |
|
| 337 |
++defaults to |
|
| 338 |
++.IR groupOfNames . |
|
| 339 |
++The |
|
| 340 |
++.B attributeType |
|
| 341 |
++defaults to |
|
| 342 |
++.IR member . |
|
| 343 |
++The group with DN |
|
| 344 |
++.B <pattern> |
|
| 345 |
++is searched with base scope, filtered on the specified |
|
| 346 |
++.BR objectClass . |
|
| 347 |
++The values of the resulting |
|
| 348 |
++.B attributeType |
|
| 349 |
++are searched for the asserted DN. |
|
| 350 |
++ |
|
| 351 |
++.LP |
|
| 352 |
++The fifth form is provided for backwards compatibility. If no identity |
|
| 353 |
++type is provided, i.e. only |
|
| 354 |
++.B <pattern> |
|
| 355 |
++is present, an |
|
| 356 |
++.I exact DN |
|
| 357 |
++is assumed; as a consequence, |
|
| 358 |
++.B <pattern> |
|
| 359 |
++is subjected to DN normalization. |
|
| 360 |
++ |
|
| 361 |
++.LP |
|
| 362 |
++Since the interpretation of |
|
| 363 |
++.I authzFrom |
|
| 364 |
++and |
|
| 365 |
++.I authzTo |
|
| 366 |
++can impact security, users are strongly encouraged |
|
| 367 |
++to explicitly set the type of identity specification that is being used. |
|
| 368 |
++A subset of these rules can be used as third arg in the |
|
| 369 |
++.B authz\-regexp |
|
| 370 |
++statement (see below); significantly, the |
|
| 371 |
++.IR URI , |
|
| 372 |
++provided it results in exactly one entry, |
|
| 373 |
++and the |
|
| 374 |
++.I dn.exact:<dn> |
|
| 375 |
++forms. |
|
| 376 |
++.RE |
|
| 377 |
++.TP |
|
| 378 |
++.B authz\-regexp <match> <replace> |
|
| 379 |
++Used by the authentication framework to convert simple user names, |
|
| 380 |
++such as provided by SASL subsystem, or extracted from certificates |
|
| 381 |
++in case of cert-based SASL EXTERNAL, or provided within the RFC 4370 |
|
| 382 |
++"proxied authorization" control, to an LDAP DN used for |
|
| 383 |
++authorization purposes. Note that the resulting DN need not refer |
|
| 384 |
++to an existing entry to be considered valid. When an authorization |
|
| 385 |
++request is received from the SASL subsystem, the SASL |
|
| 386 |
++.BR USERNAME , |
|
| 387 |
++.BR REALM , |
|
| 388 |
++and |
|
| 389 |
++.B MECHANISM |
|
| 390 |
++are taken, when available, and combined into a name of the form |
|
| 391 |
++.RS |
|
| 392 |
++.RS |
|
| 393 |
++.TP |
|
| 394 |
++.B UID=<username>[[,CN=<realm>],CN=<mechanism>],CN=auth |
|
| 395 |
++ |
|
| 396 |
++.RE |
|
| 397 |
++This name is then compared against the |
|
| 398 |
++.B match |
|
| 399 |
++POSIX (''extended'') regular expression, and if the match is successful,
|
|
| 400 |
++the name is replaced with the |
|
| 401 |
++.B replace |
|
| 402 |
++string. If there are wildcard strings in the |
|
| 403 |
++.B match |
|
| 404 |
++regular expression that are enclosed in parenthesis, e.g. |
|
| 405 |
++.RS |
|
| 406 |
++.TP |
|
| 407 |
++.B UID=([^,]*),CN=.* |
|
| 408 |
++ |
|
| 409 |
++.RE |
|
| 410 |
++then the portion of the name that matched the wildcard will be stored |
|
| 411 |
++in the numbered placeholder variable $1. If there are other wildcard strings |
|
| 412 |
++in parenthesis, the matching strings will be in $2, $3, etc. up to $9. The |
|
| 413 |
++placeholders can then be used in the |
|
| 414 |
++.B replace |
|
| 415 |
++string, e.g. |
|
| 416 |
++.RS |
|
| 417 |
++.TP |
|
| 418 |
++.B UID=$1,OU=Accounts,DC=example,DC=com |
|
| 419 |
++ |
|
| 420 |
++.RE |
|
| 421 |
++The replaced name can be either a DN, i.e. a string prefixed by "dn:", |
|
| 422 |
++or an LDAP URI. |
|
| 423 |
++If the latter, the server will use the URI to search its own database(s) |
|
| 424 |
++and, if the search returns exactly one entry, the name is |
|
| 425 |
++replaced by the DN of that entry. The LDAP URI must have no |
|
| 426 |
++hostport, attrs, or extensions components, but the filter is mandatory, |
|
| 427 |
++e.g. |
|
| 428 |
++.RS |
|
| 429 |
++.TP |
|
| 430 |
++.B ldap:///OU=Accounts,DC=example,DC=com??one?(UID=$1) |
|
| 431 |
++ |
|
| 432 |
++.RE |
|
| 433 |
++The protocol portion of the URI must be strictly |
|
| 434 |
++.BR ldap . |
|
| 435 |
++Note that this search is subject to access controls. Specifically, |
|
| 436 |
++the authentication identity must have "auth" access in the subject. |
|
| 437 |
++ |
|
| 438 |
++Multiple |
|
| 439 |
++.B authz\-regexp |
|
| 440 |
++options can be given in the configuration file to allow for multiple matching |
|
| 441 |
++and replacement patterns. The matching patterns are checked in the order they |
|
| 442 |
++appear in the file, stopping at the first successful match. |
|
| 443 |
++ |
|
| 444 |
++.\".B Caution: |
|
| 445 |
++.\"Because the plus sign + is a character recognized by the regular expression engine, |
|
| 446 |
++.\"and it will appear in names that include a REALM, be careful to escape the |
|
| 447 |
++.\"plus sign with a backslash \\+ to remove the character's special meaning. |
|
| 448 |
++.RE |
|
| 449 |
++.TP |
|
| 450 |
++.B concurrency <integer> |
|
| 451 |
++Specify a desired level of concurrency. Provided to the underlying |
|
| 452 |
++thread system as a hint. The default is not to provide any hint. This setting |
|
| 453 |
++is only meaningful on some platforms where there is not a one to one |
|
| 454 |
++correspondence between user threads and kernel threads. |
|
| 455 |
++.TP |
|
| 456 |
++.B conn_max_pending <integer> |
|
| 457 |
++Specify the maximum number of pending requests for an anonymous session. |
|
| 458 |
++If requests are submitted faster than the server can process them, they |
|
| 459 |
++will be queued up to this limit. If the limit is exceeded, the session |
|
| 460 |
++is closed. The default is 100. |
|
| 461 |
++.TP |
|
| 462 |
++.B conn_max_pending_auth <integer> |
|
| 463 |
++Specify the maximum number of pending requests for an authenticated session. |
|
| 464 |
++The default is 1000. |
|
| 465 |
++.TP |
|
| 466 |
++.B defaultsearchbase <dn> |
|
| 467 |
++Specify a default search base to use when client submits a |
|
| 468 |
++non-base search request with an empty base DN. |
|
| 469 |
++Base scoped search requests with an empty base DN are not affected. |
|
| 470 |
++.TP |
|
| 471 |
++.B disallow <features> |
|
| 472 |
++Specify a set of features (separated by white space) to |
|
| 473 |
++disallow (default none). |
|
| 474 |
++.B bind_anon |
|
| 475 |
++disables acceptance of anonymous bind requests. Note that this setting |
|
| 476 |
++does not prohibit anonymous directory access (See "require authc"). |
|
| 477 |
++.B bind_simple |
|
| 478 |
++disables simple (bind) authentication. |
|
| 479 |
++.B tls_2_anon |
|
| 480 |
++disables forcing session to anonymous status (see also |
|
| 481 |
++.BR tls_authc ) |
|
| 482 |
++upon StartTLS operation receipt. |
|
| 483 |
++.B tls_authc |
|
| 484 |
++disallows the StartTLS operation if authenticated (see also |
|
| 485 |
++.BR tls_2_anon ). |
|
| 486 |
++.B proxy_authz_non_critical |
|
| 487 |
++disables acceptance of the proxied authorization control (RFC4370) |
|
| 488 |
++with criticality set to FALSE. |
|
| 489 |
++.B dontusecopy_non_critical |
|
| 490 |
++disables acceptance of the dontUseCopy control (a work in progress) |
|
| 491 |
++with criticality set to FALSE. |
|
| 492 |
++.HP |
|
| 493 |
++.hy 0 |
|
| 494 |
++.B ditcontentrule "(\ <oid>\ |
|
| 495 |
++ [NAME\ <name>]\ |
|
| 496 |
++ [DESC\ <description>]\ |
|
| 497 |
++ [OBSOLETE]\ |
|
| 498 |
++ [AUX\ <oids>]\ |
|
| 499 |
++ [MUST\ <oids>]\ |
|
| 500 |
++ [MAY\ <oids>]\ |
|
| 501 |
++ [NOT\ <oids>]\ )" |
|
| 502 |
++.RS |
|
| 503 |
++Specify an DIT Content Rule using the LDAPv3 syntax defined in RFC 4512. |
|
| 504 |
++The slapd parser extends the RFC 4512 definition by allowing string |
|
| 505 |
++forms as well as numeric OIDs to be used for the attribute OID and |
|
| 506 |
++attribute syntax OID. |
|
| 507 |
++(See the |
|
| 508 |
++.B objectidentifier |
|
| 509 |
++description.) |
|
| 510 |
++.RE |
|
| 511 |
++.TP |
|
| 512 |
++.B gentlehup { on | off }
|
|
| 513 |
++A SIGHUP signal will only cause a 'gentle' shutdown-attempt: |
|
| 514 |
++.B Slapd |
|
| 515 |
++will stop listening for new connections, but will not close the |
|
| 516 |
++connections to the current clients. Future write operations return |
|
| 517 |
++unwilling-to-perform, though. Slapd terminates when all clients |
|
| 518 |
++have closed their connections (if they ever do), or \- as before \- |
|
| 519 |
++if it receives a SIGTERM signal. This can be useful if you wish to |
|
| 520 |
++terminate the server and start a new |
|
| 521 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 522 |
++server |
|
| 523 |
++.B with another database, |
|
| 524 |
++without disrupting the currently active clients. |
|
| 525 |
++The default is off. You may wish to use |
|
| 526 |
++.B idletimeout |
|
| 527 |
++along with this option. |
|
| 528 |
++.TP |
|
| 529 |
++.B idletimeout <integer> |
|
| 530 |
++Specify the number of seconds to wait before forcibly closing |
|
| 531 |
++an idle client connection. A setting of 0 disables this |
|
| 532 |
++feature. The default is 0. You may also want to set the |
|
| 533 |
++.B writetimeout |
|
| 534 |
++option. |
|
| 535 |
++.TP |
|
| 536 |
++.B include <filename> |
|
| 537 |
++Read additional configuration information from the given file before |
|
| 538 |
++continuing with the next line of the current file. |
|
| 539 |
++.TP |
|
| 540 |
++.B index_hash64 { on | off }
|
|
| 541 |
++Use a 64 bit hash for indexing. The default is to use 32 bit hashes. |
|
| 542 |
++These hashes are used for equality and substring indexing. The 64 bit |
|
| 543 |
++version may be needed to avoid index collisions when the number of |
|
| 544 |
++indexed values exceeds ~64 million. (Note that substring indexing |
|
| 545 |
++generates multiple index values per actual attribute value.) |
|
| 546 |
++Indices generated with 32 bit hashes are incompatible with the 64 bit |
|
| 547 |
++version, and vice versa. Any existing databases must be fully reloaded |
|
| 548 |
++when changing this setting. This directive is only supported on 64 bit CPUs. |
|
| 549 |
++.TP |
|
| 550 |
++.B index_intlen <integer> |
|
| 551 |
++Specify the key length for ordered integer indices. The most significant |
|
| 552 |
++bytes of the binary integer will be used for index keys. The default |
|
| 553 |
++value is 4, which provides exact indexing for 31 bit values. |
|
| 554 |
++A floating point representation is used to index too large values. |
|
| 555 |
++.TP |
|
| 556 |
++.B index_substr_if_maxlen <integer> |
|
| 557 |
++Specify the maximum length for subinitial and subfinal indices. Only |
|
| 558 |
++this many characters of an attribute value will be processed by the |
|
| 559 |
++indexing functions; any excess characters are ignored. The default is 4. |
|
| 560 |
++.TP |
|
| 561 |
++.B index_substr_if_minlen <integer> |
|
| 562 |
++Specify the minimum length for subinitial and subfinal indices. An |
|
| 563 |
++attribute value must have at least this many characters in order to be |
|
| 564 |
++processed by the indexing functions. The default is 2. |
|
| 565 |
++.TP |
|
| 566 |
++.B index_substr_any_len <integer> |
|
| 567 |
++Specify the length used for subany indices. An attribute value must have |
|
| 568 |
++at least this many characters in order to be processed. Attribute values |
|
| 569 |
++longer than this length will be processed in segments of this length. The |
|
| 570 |
++default is 4. The subany index will also be used in subinitial and |
|
| 571 |
++subfinal index lookups when the filter string is longer than the |
|
| 572 |
++.I index_substr_if_maxlen |
|
| 573 |
++value. |
|
| 574 |
++.TP |
|
| 575 |
++.B index_substr_any_step <integer> |
|
| 576 |
++Specify the steps used in subany index lookups. This value sets the offset |
|
| 577 |
++for the segments of a filter string that are processed for a subany index |
|
| 578 |
++lookup. The default is 2. For example, with the default values, a search |
|
| 579 |
++using this filter "cn=*abcdefgh*" would generate index lookups for |
|
| 580 |
++"abcd", "cdef", and "efgh". |
|
| 581 |
++ |
|
| 582 |
++.LP |
|
| 583 |
++Note: Indexing support depends on the particular backend in use. Also, |
|
| 584 |
++changing these settings will generally require deleting any indices that |
|
| 585 |
++depend on these parameters and recreating them with |
|
| 586 |
++.BR slapindex (8). |
|
| 587 |
++ |
|
| 588 |
++.HP |
|
| 589 |
++.hy 0 |
|
| 590 |
++.B ldapsyntax "(\ <oid>\ |
|
| 591 |
++ [DESC\ <description>]\ |
|
| 592 |
++ [X\-SUBST <substitute-syntax>]\ )" |
|
| 593 |
++.RS |
|
| 594 |
++Specify an LDAP syntax using the LDAPv3 syntax defined in RFC 4512. |
|
| 595 |
++The slapd parser extends the RFC 4512 definition by allowing string |
|
| 596 |
++forms as well as numeric OIDs to be used for the syntax OID. |
|
| 597 |
++(See the |
|
| 598 |
++.B objectidentifier |
|
| 599 |
++description.) |
|
| 600 |
++The slapd parser also honors the |
|
| 601 |
++.B X\-SUBST |
|
| 602 |
++extension (an OpenLDAP-specific extension), which allows one to use the |
|
| 603 |
++.B ldapsyntax |
|
| 604 |
++statement to define a non-implemented syntax along with another syntax, |
|
| 605 |
++the extension value |
|
| 606 |
++.IR substitute-syntax , |
|
| 607 |
++as its temporary replacement. |
|
| 608 |
++The |
|
| 609 |
++.I substitute-syntax |
|
| 610 |
++must be defined. |
|
| 611 |
++This allows one to define attribute types that make use of non-implemented syntaxes |
|
| 612 |
++using the correct syntax OID. |
|
| 613 |
++Unless |
|
| 614 |
++.B X\-SUBST |
|
| 615 |
++is used, this configuration statement would result in an error, |
|
| 616 |
++since no handlers would be associated to the resulting syntax structure. |
|
| 617 |
++.RE |
|
| 618 |
++ |
|
| 619 |
++.TP |
|
| 620 |
++.B listener-threads <integer> |
|
| 621 |
++Specify the number of threads to use for the connection manager. |
|
| 622 |
++The default is 1 and this is typically adequate for up to 16 CPU cores. |
|
| 623 |
++The value should be set to a power of 2. |
|
| 624 |
++.TP |
|
| 625 |
++.B localSSF <SSF> |
|
| 626 |
++Specifies the Security Strength Factor (SSF) to be given local LDAP sessions, |
|
| 627 |
++such as those to the ldapi:// listener. For a description of SSF values, |
|
| 628 |
++see |
|
| 629 |
++.BR sasl-secprops 's |
|
| 630 |
++.B minssf |
|
| 631 |
++option description. The default is 71. |
|
| 632 |
++.TP |
|
| 633 |
++.B logfile <filename> |
|
| 634 |
++Specify a file for recording slapd debug messages. By default these messages |
|
| 635 |
++only go to stderr, are not recorded anywhere else, and are unrelated to |
|
| 636 |
++messages exposed by the |
|
| 637 |
++.B loglevel |
|
| 638 |
++configuration parameter. Specifying a logfile copies messages to both stderr |
|
| 639 |
++and the logfile. |
|
| 640 |
++.TP |
|
| 641 |
++.B logfile-format debug | syslog-utc | syslog-localtime |
|
| 642 |
++Specify the prefix format for messages written to the logfile. The debug |
|
| 643 |
++format is the normal format used for slapd debug messages, with a timestamp |
|
| 644 |
++in hexadecimal, followed by a thread ID. The other options are to |
|
| 645 |
++use syslog(3) style prefixes, with timestamps either in UTC or in the |
|
| 646 |
++local timezone. The default is debug format. |
|
| 647 |
++.TP |
|
| 648 |
++.B logfile-only on | off |
|
| 649 |
++Specify that debug messages should only go to the configured logfile, and |
|
| 650 |
++not to stderr. |
|
| 651 |
++.TP |
|
| 652 |
++.B logfile-rotate <max> <Mbytes> <hours> |
|
| 653 |
++Specify automatic rotation for the configured logfile as the maximum |
|
| 654 |
++number of old logfiles to retain, a maximum size in megabytes to allow a |
|
| 655 |
++logfile to grow before rotation, and a maximum age in hours for a logfile |
|
| 656 |
++to be used before rotation. The maximum number must be in the range 1-99. |
|
| 657 |
++Setting Mbytes or hours to zero disables the size or age check, respectively. |
|
| 658 |
++At least one of Mbytes or hours must be non-zero. By default no automatic |
|
| 659 |
++rotation will be performed. |
|
| 660 |
++.TP |
|
| 661 |
++.B loglevel <integer> [...] |
|
| 662 |
++Specify the level at which debugging statements and operation |
|
| 663 |
++statistics should be syslogged (currently logged to the |
|
| 664 |
++.BR syslogd (8) |
|
| 665 |
++LOG_LOCAL4 facility). |
|
| 666 |
++They must be considered subsystems rather than increasingly verbose |
|
| 667 |
++log levels. |
|
| 668 |
++Some messages with higher priority are logged regardless |
|
| 669 |
++of the configured loglevel as soon as any logging is configured. |
|
| 670 |
++Log levels are additive, and available levels are: |
|
| 671 |
++.RS |
|
| 672 |
++.RS |
|
| 673 |
++.PD 0 |
|
| 674 |
++.TP |
|
| 675 |
++.B 1 |
|
| 676 |
++.B (0x1 trace) |
|
| 677 |
++trace function calls |
|
| 678 |
++.TP |
|
| 679 |
++.B 2 |
|
| 680 |
++.B (0x2 packets) |
|
| 681 |
++debug packet handling |
|
| 682 |
++.TP |
|
| 683 |
++.B 4 |
|
| 684 |
++.B (0x4 args) |
|
| 685 |
++heavy trace debugging (function args) |
|
| 686 |
++.TP |
|
| 687 |
++.B 8 |
|
| 688 |
++.B (0x8 conns) |
|
| 689 |
++connection management |
|
| 690 |
++.TP |
|
| 691 |
++.B 16 |
|
| 692 |
++.B (0x10 BER) |
|
| 693 |
++print out packets sent and received |
|
| 694 |
++.TP |
|
| 695 |
++.B 32 |
|
| 696 |
++.B (0x20 filter) |
|
| 697 |
++search filter processing |
|
| 698 |
++.TP |
|
| 699 |
++.B 64 |
|
| 700 |
++.B (0x40 config) |
|
| 701 |
++configuration file processing |
|
| 702 |
++.TP |
|
| 703 |
++.B 128 |
|
| 704 |
++.B (0x80 ACL) |
|
| 705 |
++access control list processing |
|
| 706 |
++.TP |
|
| 707 |
++.B 256 |
|
| 708 |
++.B (0x100 stats) |
|
| 709 |
++connections, LDAP operations, results (recommended) |
|
| 710 |
++.TP |
|
| 711 |
++.B 512 |
|
| 712 |
++.B (0x200 stats2) |
|
| 713 |
++stats2 log entries sent |
|
| 714 |
++.TP |
|
| 715 |
++.B 1024 |
|
| 716 |
++.B (0x400 shell) |
|
| 717 |
++print communication with shell backends |
|
| 718 |
++.TP |
|
| 719 |
++.B 2048 |
|
| 720 |
++.B (0x800 parse) |
|
| 721 |
++entry parsing |
|
| 722 |
++\".TP |
|
| 723 |
++\".B 4096 |
|
| 724 |
++\".B (0x1000 cache) |
|
| 725 |
++\"caching (unused) |
|
| 726 |
++\".TP |
|
| 727 |
++\".B 8192 |
|
| 728 |
++\".B (0x2000 index) |
|
| 729 |
++\"data indexing (unused) |
|
| 730 |
++.TP |
|
| 731 |
++.B 16384 |
|
| 732 |
++.B (0x4000 sync) |
|
| 733 |
++LDAPSync replication |
|
| 734 |
++.TP |
|
| 735 |
++.B 32768 |
|
| 736 |
++.B (0x8000 none) |
|
| 737 |
++only messages that get logged whatever log level is set |
|
| 738 |
++.PD |
|
| 739 |
++.RE |
|
| 740 |
++The desired log level can be input as a single integer that combines |
|
| 741 |
++the (ORed) desired levels, both in decimal or in hexadecimal notation, |
|
| 742 |
++as a list of integers (that are ORed internally), |
|
| 743 |
++or as a list of the names that are shown between parentheses, such that |
|
| 744 |
++.LP |
|
| 745 |
++.nf |
|
| 746 |
++ loglevel 129 |
|
| 747 |
++ loglevel 0x81 |
|
| 748 |
++ loglevel 128 1 |
|
| 749 |
++ loglevel 0x80 0x1 |
|
| 750 |
++ loglevel acl trace |
|
| 751 |
++.fi |
|
| 752 |
++.LP |
|
| 753 |
++are equivalent. |
|
| 754 |
++The keyword |
|
| 755 |
++.B any |
|
| 756 |
++can be used as a shortcut to enable logging at all levels (equivalent to \-1). |
|
| 757 |
++The keyword |
|
| 758 |
++.BR none , |
|
| 759 |
++or the equivalent integer representation, causes those messages |
|
| 760 |
++that are logged regardless of the configured loglevel to be logged. |
|
| 761 |
++In fact, if loglevel is set to 0, no logging occurs, |
|
| 762 |
++so at least the |
|
| 763 |
++.B none |
|
| 764 |
++level is required to have high priority messages logged. |
|
| 765 |
++ |
|
| 766 |
++Note that the |
|
| 767 |
++.BR packets , |
|
| 768 |
++.BR BER , |
|
| 769 |
++and |
|
| 770 |
++.B parse |
|
| 771 |
++levels are only available as debug output on stderr, and are not |
|
| 772 |
++sent to syslog. |
|
| 773 |
++ |
|
| 774 |
++The loglevel defaults to \fBstats\fP. |
|
| 775 |
++This level should usually also be included when using other loglevels, to |
|
| 776 |
++help analyze the logs. |
|
| 777 |
++.RE |
|
| 778 |
++.TP |
|
| 779 |
++.B maxfilterdepth <integer> |
|
| 780 |
++Specify the maximum depth of nested filters in search requests. |
|
| 781 |
++The default is 1000. |
|
| 782 |
++.TP |
|
| 783 |
++.B moduleload <filename> [<arguments>...] |
|
| 784 |
++Specify the name of a dynamically loadable module to load and any |
|
| 785 |
++additional arguments if supported by the module. The filename |
|
| 786 |
++may be an absolute path name or a simple filename. Non-absolute names |
|
| 787 |
++are searched for in the directories specified by the |
|
| 788 |
++.B modulepath |
|
| 789 |
++option. This option and the |
|
| 790 |
++.B modulepath |
|
| 791 |
++option are only usable if slapd was compiled with \-\-enable\-modules. |
|
| 792 |
++.TP |
|
| 793 |
++.B modulepath <pathspec> |
|
| 794 |
++Specify a list of directories to search for loadable modules. Typically |
|
| 795 |
++the path is colon-separated but this depends on the operating system. |
|
| 796 |
++The default is MODULEDIR, which is where the standard OpenLDAP install |
|
| 797 |
++will place its modules. |
|
| 798 |
++.HP |
|
| 799 |
++.hy 0 |
|
| 800 |
++.B objectclass "(\ <oid>\ |
|
| 801 |
++ [NAME\ <name>]\ |
|
| 802 |
++ [DESC\ <description>]\ |
|
| 803 |
++ [OBSOLETE]\ |
|
| 804 |
++ [SUP\ <oids>]\ |
|
| 805 |
++ [{ ABSTRACT | STRUCTURAL | AUXILIARY }]\
|
|
| 806 |
++ [MUST\ <oids>] [MAY\ <oids>] )" |
|
| 807 |
++.RS |
|
| 808 |
++Specify an objectclass using the LDAPv3 syntax defined in RFC 4512. |
|
| 809 |
++The slapd parser extends the RFC 4512 definition by allowing string |
|
| 810 |
++forms as well as numeric OIDs to be used for the object class OID. |
|
| 811 |
++(See the |
|
| 812 |
++.B |
|
| 813 |
++objectidentifier |
|
| 814 |
++description.) Object classes are "STRUCTURAL" by default. |
|
| 815 |
++.RE |
|
| 816 |
++.TP |
|
| 817 |
++.B objectidentifier <name> "{ <oid> | <name>[:<suffix>] }"
|
|
| 818 |
++Define a string name that equates to the given OID. The string can be used |
|
| 819 |
++in place of the numeric OID in objectclass and attribute definitions. The |
|
| 820 |
++name can also be used with a suffix of the form ":xx" in which case the |
|
| 821 |
++value "oid.xx" will be used. |
|
| 822 |
++.TP |
|
| 823 |
++.B password\-hash <hash> [<hash>...] |
|
| 824 |
++This option configures one or more hashes to be used in generation of user |
|
| 825 |
++passwords stored in the userPassword attribute during processing of |
|
| 826 |
++LDAP Password Modify Extended Operations (RFC 3062). |
|
| 827 |
++The <hash> must be one of |
|
| 828 |
++.BR {SSHA} ,
|
|
| 829 |
++.BR {SHA} ,
|
|
| 830 |
++.BR {SMD5} ,
|
|
| 831 |
++.BR {MD5} ,
|
|
| 832 |
++.BR {CRYPT} ,
|
|
| 833 |
++and |
|
| 834 |
++.BR {CLEARTEXT} .
|
|
| 835 |
++The default is |
|
| 836 |
++.BR {SSHA} .
|
|
| 837 |
++ |
|
| 838 |
++.B {SHA}
|
|
| 839 |
++and |
|
| 840 |
++.B {SSHA}
|
|
| 841 |
++use the SHA-1 algorithm (FIPS 160-1), the latter with a seed. |
|
| 842 |
++ |
|
| 843 |
++.B {MD5}
|
|
| 844 |
++and |
|
| 845 |
++.B {SMD5}
|
|
| 846 |
++use the MD5 algorithm (RFC 1321), the latter with a seed. |
|
| 847 |
++ |
|
| 848 |
++.B {CRYPT}
|
|
| 849 |
++uses the |
|
| 850 |
++.BR crypt (3). |
|
| 851 |
++ |
|
| 852 |
++.B {CLEARTEXT}
|
|
| 853 |
++indicates that the new password should be |
|
| 854 |
++added to userPassword as clear text. |
|
| 855 |
++ |
|
| 856 |
++Note that this option does not alter the normal user applications |
|
| 857 |
++handling of userPassword during LDAP Add, Modify, or other LDAP operations. |
|
| 858 |
++.TP |
|
| 859 |
++.B password\-crypt\-salt\-format <format> |
|
| 860 |
++Specify the format of the salt passed to |
|
| 861 |
++.BR crypt (3) |
|
| 862 |
++when generating {CRYPT} passwords (see
|
|
| 863 |
++.BR password\-hash ) |
|
| 864 |
++during processing of LDAP Password Modify Extended Operations (RFC 3062). |
|
| 865 |
++ |
|
| 866 |
++This string needs to be in |
|
| 867 |
++.BR sprintf (3) |
|
| 868 |
++format and may include one (and only one) %s conversion. |
|
| 869 |
++This conversion will be substituted with a string of random |
|
| 870 |
++characters from [A\-Za\-z0\-9./]. For example, "%.2s" |
|
| 871 |
++provides a two character salt and "$1$%.8s" tells some |
|
| 872 |
++versions of crypt(3) to use an MD5 algorithm and provides |
|
| 873 |
++8 random characters of salt. The default is "%s", which |
|
| 874 |
++provides 31 characters of salt. |
|
| 875 |
++.TP |
|
| 876 |
++.B pidfile <filename> |
|
| 877 |
++The (absolute) name of a file that will hold the |
|
| 878 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 879 |
++server's process ID (see |
|
| 880 |
++.BR getpid (2)). |
|
| 881 |
++.TP |
|
| 882 |
++.B pluginlog: <filename> |
|
| 883 |
++The ( absolute ) name of a file that will contain log |
|
| 884 |
++messages from |
|
| 885 |
++.B SLAPI |
|
| 886 |
++plugins. See |
|
| 887 |
++.BR slapd.plugin (5) |
|
| 888 |
++for details. |
|
| 889 |
++.TP |
|
| 890 |
++.B referral <url> |
|
| 891 |
++Specify the referral to pass back when |
|
| 892 |
++.BR slapd (8) |
|
| 893 |
++cannot find a local database to handle a request. |
|
| 894 |
++If specified multiple times, each url is provided. |
|
| 895 |
++.TP |
|
| 896 |
++.B require <conditions> |
|
| 897 |
++Specify a set of conditions (separated by white space) to |
|
| 898 |
++require (default none). |
|
| 899 |
++The directive may be specified globally and/or per-database; |
|
| 900 |
++databases inherit global conditions, so per-database specifications |
|
| 901 |
++are additive. |
|
| 902 |
++.B bind |
|
| 903 |
++requires bind operation prior to directory operations. |
|
| 904 |
++.B LDAPv3 |
|
| 905 |
++requires session to be using LDAP version 3. |
|
| 906 |
++.B authc |
|
| 907 |
++requires authentication prior to directory operations. |
|
| 908 |
++.B SASL |
|
| 909 |
++requires SASL authentication prior to directory operations. |
|
| 910 |
++.B strong |
|
| 911 |
++requires strong authentication prior to directory operations. |
|
| 912 |
++The strong keyword allows protected "simple" authentication |
|
| 913 |
++as well as SASL authentication. |
|
| 914 |
++.B none |
|
| 915 |
++may be used to require no conditions (useful to clear out globally |
|
| 916 |
++set conditions within a particular database); it must occur first |
|
| 917 |
++in the list of conditions. |
|
| 918 |
++.TP |
|
| 919 |
++.B reverse\-lookup on | off |
|
| 920 |
++Enable/disable client name unverified reverse lookup (default is |
|
| 921 |
++.BR off |
|
| 922 |
++if compiled with \-\-enable\-rlookups). |
|
| 923 |
++.TP |
|
| 924 |
++.B rootDSE <file> |
|
| 925 |
++Specify the name of an LDIF(5) file containing user defined attributes |
|
| 926 |
++for the root DSE. These attributes are returned in addition to the |
|
| 927 |
++attributes normally produced by slapd. |
|
| 928 |
++ |
|
| 929 |
++The root DSE is an entry with information about the server and its |
|
| 930 |
++capabilities, in operational attributes. |
|
| 931 |
++It has the empty DN, and can be read with e.g.: |
|
| 932 |
++.ti +4 |
|
| 933 |
++ldapsearch \-x \-b "" \-s base "+" |
|
| 934 |
++.br |
|
| 935 |
++See RFC 4512 section 5.1 for details. |
|
| 936 |
++.TP |
|
| 937 |
++.B sasl\-auxprops <plugin> [...] |
|
| 938 |
++Specify which auxprop plugins to use for authentication lookups. The |
|
| 939 |
++default is empty, which just uses slapd's internal support. Usually |
|
| 940 |
++no other auxprop plugins are needed. |
|
| 941 |
++.TP |
|
| 942 |
++.B sasl\-auxprops\-dontusecopy <attr> [...] |
|
| 943 |
++Specify which attribute(s) should be subject to the don't use copy control. This |
|
| 944 |
++is necessary for some SASL mechanisms such as OTP to work in a replicated |
|
| 945 |
++environment. The attribute "cmusaslsecretOTP" is the default value. |
|
| 946 |
++.TP |
|
| 947 |
++.B sasl\-auxprops\-dontusecopy\-ignore on | off |
|
| 948 |
++Used to disable replication of the attribute(s) defined by |
|
| 949 |
++sasl-auxprops-dontusecopy and instead use a local value for the attribute. This |
|
| 950 |
++allows the SASL mechanism to continue to work if the provider is offline. This can |
|
| 951 |
++cause replication inconsistency. Defaults to off. |
|
| 952 |
++.TP |
|
| 953 |
++.B sasl\-host <fqdn> |
|
| 954 |
++Used to specify the fully qualified domain name used for SASL processing. |
|
| 955 |
++.TP |
|
| 956 |
++.B sasl\-realm <realm> |
|
| 957 |
++Specify SASL realm. Default is empty. |
|
| 958 |
++.TP |
|
| 959 |
++.B sasl\-cbinding none | tls-unique | tls-endpoint |
|
| 960 |
++Specify the channel-binding type, see also LDAP_OPT_X_SASL_CBINDING. |
|
| 961 |
++Default is none. |
|
| 962 |
++.TP |
|
| 963 |
++.B sasl\-secprops <properties> |
|
| 964 |
++Used to specify Cyrus SASL security properties. |
|
| 965 |
++The |
|
| 966 |
++.B none |
|
| 967 |
++flag (without any other properties) causes the flag properties |
|
| 968 |
++default, "noanonymous,noplain", to be cleared. |
|
| 969 |
++The |
|
| 970 |
++.B noplain |
|
| 971 |
++flag disables mechanisms susceptible to simple passive attacks. |
|
| 972 |
++The |
|
| 973 |
++.B noactive |
|
| 974 |
++flag disables mechanisms susceptible to active attacks. |
|
| 975 |
++The |
|
| 976 |
++.B nodict |
|
| 977 |
++flag disables mechanisms susceptible to passive dictionary attacks. |
|
| 978 |
++The |
|
| 979 |
++.B noanonymous |
|
| 980 |
++flag disables mechanisms which support anonymous login. |
|
| 981 |
++The |
|
| 982 |
++.B forwardsec |
|
| 983 |
++flag require forward secrecy between sessions. |
|
| 984 |
++The |
|
| 985 |
++.B passcred |
|
| 986 |
++require mechanisms which pass client credentials (and allow |
|
| 987 |
++mechanisms which can pass credentials to do so). |
|
| 988 |
++The |
|
| 989 |
++.B minssf=<factor> |
|
| 990 |
++property specifies the minimum acceptable |
|
| 991 |
++.I security strength factor |
|
| 992 |
++as an integer approximate to effective key length used for |
|
| 993 |
++encryption. 0 (zero) implies no protection, 1 implies integrity |
|
| 994 |
++protection only, 128 allows RC4, Blowfish and other similar ciphers, |
|
| 995 |
++256 will require modern ciphers. The default is 0. |
|
| 996 |
++The |
|
| 997 |
++.B maxssf=<factor> |
|
| 998 |
++property specifies the maximum acceptable |
|
| 999 |
++.I security strength factor |
|
| 1000 |
++as an integer (see minssf description). The default is INT_MAX. |
|
| 1001 |
++The |
|
| 1002 |
++.B maxbufsize=<size> |
|
| 1003 |
++property specifies the maximum security layer receive buffer |
|
| 1004 |
++size allowed. 0 disables security layers. The default is 65536. |
|
| 1005 |
++.TP |
|
| 1006 |
++.B schemadn <dn> |
|
| 1007 |
++Specify the distinguished name for the subschema subentry that |
|
| 1008 |
++controls the entries on this server. The default is "cn=Subschema". |
|
| 1009 |
++.TP |
|
| 1010 |
++.B security <factors> |
|
| 1011 |
++Specify a set of security strength factors (separated by white space) |
|
| 1012 |
++to require (see |
|
| 1013 |
++.BR sasl\-secprops 's |
|
| 1014 |
++.B minssf |
|
| 1015 |
++option for a description of security strength factors). |
|
| 1016 |
++The directive may be specified globally and/or per-database. |
|
| 1017 |
++.B ssf=<n> |
|
| 1018 |
++specifies the overall security strength factor. |
|
| 1019 |
++.B transport=<n> |
|
| 1020 |
++specifies the transport security strength factor. |
|
| 1021 |
++.B tls=<n> |
|
| 1022 |
++specifies the TLS security strength factor. |
|
| 1023 |
++.B sasl=<n> |
|
| 1024 |
++specifies the SASL security strength factor. |
|
| 1025 |
++.B update_ssf=<n> |
|
| 1026 |
++specifies the overall security strength factor to require for |
|
| 1027 |
++directory updates. |
|
| 1028 |
++.B update_transport=<n> |
|
| 1029 |
++specifies the transport security strength factor to require for |
|
| 1030 |
++directory updates. |
|
| 1031 |
++.B update_tls=<n> |
|
| 1032 |
++specifies the TLS security strength factor to require for |
|
| 1033 |
++directory updates. |
|
| 1034 |
++.B update_sasl=<n> |
|
| 1035 |
++specifies the SASL security strength factor to require for |
|
| 1036 |
++directory updates. |
|
| 1037 |
++.B simple_bind=<n> |
|
| 1038 |
++specifies the security strength factor required for |
|
| 1039 |
++.I simple |
|
| 1040 |
++username/password authentication. |
|
| 1041 |
++Note that the |
|
| 1042 |
++.B transport |
|
| 1043 |
++factor is measure of security provided by the underlying transport, |
|
| 1044 |
++e.g. ldapi:// (and eventually IPSEC). It is not normally used. |
|
| 1045 |
++.TP |
|
| 1046 |
++.B serverID <integer> [<URL>] |
|
| 1047 |
++Specify an integer ID from 0 to 4095 for this server. The ID may also be |
|
| 1048 |
++specified as a hexadecimal ID by prefixing the value with "0x". |
|
| 1049 |
++Non-zero IDs are required when using multi-provider replication and each |
|
| 1050 |
++provider must have a unique non-zero ID. Note that this requirement also |
|
| 1051 |
++applies to separate providers contributing to a glued set of databases. |
|
| 1052 |
++If the URL is provided, this directive may be specified |
|
| 1053 |
++multiple times, providing a complete list of participating servers |
|
| 1054 |
++and their IDs. The fully qualified hostname of each server should be |
|
| 1055 |
++used in the supplied URLs. The IDs are used in the "replica id" field |
|
| 1056 |
++of all CSNs generated by the specified server. The default value is zero, which |
|
| 1057 |
++is only valid for single provider replication. |
|
| 1058 |
++Example: |
|
| 1059 |
++.LP |
|
| 1060 |
++.nf |
|
| 1061 |
++ serverID 1 ldap://ldap1.example.com |
|
| 1062 |
++ serverID 2 ldap://ldap2.example.com |
|
| 1063 |
++.fi |
|
| 1064 |
++.TP |
|
| 1065 |
++.B sizelimit {<integer>|unlimited}
|
|
| 1066 |
++.TP |
|
| 1067 |
++.B sizelimit size[.{soft|hard}]=<integer> [...]
|
|
| 1068 |
++Specify the maximum number of entries to return from a search operation. |
|
| 1069 |
++The default size limit is 500. |
|
| 1070 |
++Use |
|
| 1071 |
++.B unlimited |
|
| 1072 |
++to specify no limits. |
|
| 1073 |
++The second format allows a fine grain setting of the size limits. |
|
| 1074 |
++If no special qualifiers are specified, both soft and hard limits are set. |
|
| 1075 |
++Extra args can be added on the same line. |
|
| 1076 |
++Additional qualifiers are available; see |
|
| 1077 |
++.BR limits |
|
| 1078 |
++for an explanation of all of the different flags. |
|
| 1079 |
++.TP |
|
| 1080 |
++.B sockbuf_max_incoming <integer> |
|
| 1081 |
++Specify the maximum incoming LDAP PDU size for anonymous sessions. |
|
| 1082 |
++The default is 262143. |
|
| 1083 |
++.TP |
|
| 1084 |
++.B sockbuf_max_incoming_auth <integer> |
|
| 1085 |
++Specify the maximum incoming LDAP PDU size for authenticated sessions. |
|
| 1086 |
++The default is 4194303. |
|
| 1087 |
++.TP |
|
| 1088 |
++.B sortvals <attr> [...] |
|
| 1089 |
++Specify a list of multi-valued attributes whose values will always |
|
| 1090 |
++be maintained in sorted order. Using this option will allow Modify, |
|
| 1091 |
++Compare, and filter evaluations on these attributes to be performed |
|
| 1092 |
++more efficiently. The resulting sort order depends on the |
|
| 1093 |
++attributes' syntax and matching rules and may not correspond to |
|
| 1094 |
++lexical order or any other recognizable order. |
|
| 1095 |
++.TP |
|
| 1096 |
++.B tcp-buffer [listener=<URL>] [{read|write}=]<size>
|
|
| 1097 |
++Specify the size of the TCP buffer. |
|
| 1098 |
++A global value for both read and write TCP buffers related to any listener |
|
| 1099 |
++is defined, unless the listener is explicitly specified, |
|
| 1100 |
++or either the read or write qualifiers are used. |
|
| 1101 |
++See |
|
| 1102 |
++.BR tcp (7) |
|
| 1103 |
++for details. |
|
| 1104 |
++Note that some OS-es implement automatic TCP buffer tuning. |
|
| 1105 |
++.TP |
|
| 1106 |
++.B threads <integer> |
|
| 1107 |
++Specify the maximum size of the primary thread pool. |
|
| 1108 |
++The default is 16; the minimum value is 2. |
|
| 1109 |
++.TP |
|
| 1110 |
++.B threadqueues <integer> |
|
| 1111 |
++Specify the number of work queues to use for the primary thread pool. |
|
| 1112 |
++The default is 1 and this is typically adequate for up to 8 CPU cores. |
|
| 1113 |
++The value should not exceed the number of CPUs in the system. |
|
| 1114 |
++.TP |
|
| 1115 |
++.B timelimit {<integer>|unlimited}
|
|
| 1116 |
++.TP |
|
| 1117 |
++.B timelimit time[.{soft|hard}]=<integer> [...]
|
|
| 1118 |
++Specify the maximum number of seconds (in real time) |
|
| 1119 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 1120 |
++will spend answering a search request. The default time limit is 3600. |
|
| 1121 |
++Use |
|
| 1122 |
++.B unlimited |
|
| 1123 |
++to specify no limits. |
|
| 1124 |
++The second format allows a fine grain setting of the time limits. |
|
| 1125 |
++Extra args can be added on the same line. See |
|
| 1126 |
++.BR limits |
|
| 1127 |
++for an explanation of the different flags. |
|
| 1128 |
++.TP |
|
| 1129 |
++.B tool\-threads <integer> |
|
| 1130 |
++Specify the maximum number of threads to use in tool mode. |
|
| 1131 |
++This should not be greater than the number of CPUs in the system. |
|
| 1132 |
++The default is 1. |
|
| 1133 |
++.TP |
|
| 1134 |
++.B writetimeout <integer> |
|
| 1135 |
++Specify the number of seconds to wait before forcibly closing |
|
| 1136 |
++a connection with an outstanding write. This allows recovery from |
|
| 1137 |
++various network hang conditions. A writetimeout of 0 disables this |
|
| 1138 |
++feature. The default is 0. |
|
| 1139 |
++.SH TLS OPTIONS |
|
| 1140 |
++If |
|
| 1141 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 1142 |
++is built with support for Transport Layer Security, there are more options |
|
| 1143 |
++you can specify. |
|
| 1144 |
++.TP |
|
| 1145 |
++.B TLSCipherSuite <cipher-suite-spec> |
|
| 1146 |
++Permits configuring what ciphers will be accepted and the preference order. |
|
| 1147 |
++<cipher-suite-spec> should be a cipher specification for the TLS library |
|
| 1148 |
++in use (OpenSSL or GnuTLS). |
|
| 1149 |
++Example: |
|
| 1150 |
++.RS |
|
| 1151 |
++.RS |
|
| 1152 |
++.TP |
|
| 1153 |
++.I OpenSSL: |
|
| 1154 |
++TLSCipherSuite HIGH:MEDIUM:+SSLv2 |
|
| 1155 |
++.TP |
|
| 1156 |
++.I GnuTLS: |
|
| 1157 |
++TLSCiphersuite SECURE256:!AES-128-CBC |
|
| 1158 |
++.RE |
|
| 1159 |
++ |
|
| 1160 |
++To check what ciphers a given spec selects in OpenSSL, use: |
|
| 1161 |
++ |
|
| 1162 |
++.nf |
|
| 1163 |
++ openssl ciphers \-v <cipher-suite-spec> |
|
| 1164 |
++.fi |
|
| 1165 |
++ |
|
| 1166 |
++With GnuTLS the available specs can be found in the manual page of |
|
| 1167 |
++.BR gnutls\-cli (1) |
|
| 1168 |
++(see the description of the |
|
| 1169 |
++option |
|
| 1170 |
++.BR \-\-priority ). |
|
| 1171 |
++ |
|
| 1172 |
++In older versions of GnuTLS, where gnutls\-cli does not support the option |
|
| 1173 |
++\-\-priority, you can obtain the \(em more limited \(em list of ciphers by calling: |
|
| 1174 |
++ |
|
| 1175 |
++.nf |
|
| 1176 |
++ gnutls\-cli \-l |
|
| 1177 |
++.fi |
|
| 1178 |
++.RE |
|
| 1179 |
++.TP |
|
| 1180 |
++.B TLSCACertificateFile <filename> |
|
| 1181 |
++Specifies the file that contains certificates for all of the Certificate |
|
| 1182 |
++Authorities that |
|
| 1183 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 1184 |
++will recognize. The certificate for |
|
| 1185 |
++the CA that signed the server certificate must(GnuTLS)/may(OpenSSL) be included among |
|
| 1186 |
++these certificates. If the signing CA was not a top-level (root) CA, |
|
| 1187 |
++certificates for the entire sequence of CA's from the signing CA to |
|
| 1188 |
++the top-level CA should be present. Multiple certificates are simply |
|
| 1189 |
++appended to the file; the order is not significant. |
|
| 1190 |
++.TP |
|
| 1191 |
++.B TLSCACertificatePath <path> |
|
| 1192 |
++Specifies the path of directories that contain Certificate Authority |
|
| 1193 |
++certificates in separate individual files. Usually only one of this |
|
| 1194 |
++or the TLSCACertificateFile is used. If both are specified, both |
|
| 1195 |
++locations will be used. Multiple directories may be specified, |
|
| 1196 |
++separated by a semi-colon. |
|
| 1197 |
++.TP |
|
| 1198 |
++.B TLSCertificateFile <filename> |
|
| 1199 |
++Specifies the file that contains the |
|
| 1200 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 1201 |
++server certificate. |
|
| 1202 |
++ |
|
| 1203 |
++When using OpenSSL that file may also contain any number of intermediate |
|
| 1204 |
++certificates after the server certificate. |
|
| 1205 |
++.TP |
|
| 1206 |
++.B TLSCertificateKeyFile <filename> |
|
| 1207 |
++Specifies the file that contains the |
|
| 1208 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 1209 |
++server private key that matches the certificate stored in the |
|
| 1210 |
++.B TLSCertificateFile |
|
| 1211 |
++file. Currently, the private key must not be protected with a password, so |
|
| 1212 |
++it is of critical importance that it is protected carefully. |
|
| 1213 |
++.TP |
|
| 1214 |
++.B TLSDHParamFile <filename> |
|
| 1215 |
++This directive specifies the file that contains parameters for Diffie-Hellman |
|
| 1216 |
++ephemeral key exchange. This is required in order to use a DSA certificate on |
|
| 1217 |
++the server, or an RSA certificate missing the "key encipherment" key usage. |
|
| 1218 |
++Note that setting this option may also enable |
|
| 1219 |
++Anonymous Diffie-Hellman key exchanges in certain non-default cipher suites. |
|
| 1220 |
++Anonymous key exchanges should generally be avoided since they provide no |
|
| 1221 |
++actual client or server authentication and provide no protection against |
|
| 1222 |
++man-in-the-middle attacks. |
|
| 1223 |
++You should append "!ADH" to your cipher suites to ensure that these suites |
|
| 1224 |
++are not used. |
|
| 1225 |
++.TP |
|
| 1226 |
++.B TLSECName <name> |
|
| 1227 |
++Specify the name of the curve(s) to use for Elliptic curve Diffie-Hellman |
|
| 1228 |
++ephemeral key exchange. This option is only used for OpenSSL. |
|
| 1229 |
++This option is not used with GnuTLS; the curves may be |
|
| 1230 |
++chosen in the GnuTLS ciphersuite specification. |
|
| 1231 |
++.TP |
|
| 1232 |
++.B TLSProtocolMin <major>[.<minor>] |
|
| 1233 |
++Specifies minimum SSL/TLS protocol version that will be negotiated. |
|
| 1234 |
++If the server doesn't support at least that version, |
|
| 1235 |
++the SSL handshake will fail. |
|
| 1236 |
++To require TLS 1.x or higher, set this option to 3.(x+1), |
|
| 1237 |
++e.g., |
|
| 1238 |
++ |
|
| 1239 |
++.nf |
|
| 1240 |
++ TLSProtocolMin 3.2 |
|
| 1241 |
++.fi |
|
| 1242 |
++ |
|
| 1243 |
++would require TLS 1.1. |
|
| 1244 |
++Specifying a minimum that is higher than that supported by the |
|
| 1245 |
++OpenLDAP implementation will result in it requiring the |
|
| 1246 |
++highest level that it does support. |
|
| 1247 |
++This directive is ignored with GnuTLS. |
|
| 1248 |
++.TP |
|
| 1249 |
++.B TLSRandFile <filename> |
|
| 1250 |
++Specifies the file to obtain random bits from when /dev/[u]random |
|
| 1251 |
++is not available. Generally set to the name of the EGD/PRNGD socket. |
|
| 1252 |
++The environment variable RANDFILE can also be used to specify the filename. |
|
| 1253 |
++This directive is ignored with GnuTLS. |
|
| 1254 |
++.TP |
|
| 1255 |
++.B TLSVerifyClient <level> |
|
| 1256 |
++Specifies what checks to perform on client certificates in an |
|
| 1257 |
++incoming TLS session, if any. |
|
| 1258 |
++The |
|
| 1259 |
++.B <level> |
|
| 1260 |
++can be specified as one of the following keywords: |
|
| 1261 |
++.RS |
|
| 1262 |
++.TP |
|
| 1263 |
++.B never |
|
| 1264 |
++This is the default. |
|
| 1265 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 1266 |
++will not ask the client for a certificate. |
|
| 1267 |
++.TP |
|
| 1268 |
++.B allow |
|
| 1269 |
++The client certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, |
|
| 1270 |
++the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, |
|
| 1271 |
++it will be ignored and the session proceeds normally. |
|
| 1272 |
++.TP |
|
| 1273 |
++.B try |
|
| 1274 |
++The client certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, |
|
| 1275 |
++the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, |
|
| 1276 |
++the session is immediately terminated. |
|
| 1277 |
++.TP |
|
| 1278 |
++.B demand | hard | true |
|
| 1279 |
++These keywords are all equivalent, for compatibility reasons. |
|
| 1280 |
++The client certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, |
|
| 1281 |
++or a bad certificate is provided, the session is immediately terminated. |
|
| 1282 |
++ |
|
| 1283 |
++Note that a valid client certificate is required in order to use the |
|
| 1284 |
++SASL EXTERNAL authentication mechanism with a TLS session. As such, |
|
| 1285 |
++a non-default |
|
| 1286 |
++.B TLSVerifyClient |
|
| 1287 |
++setting must be chosen to enable SASL EXTERNAL authentication. |
|
| 1288 |
++.RE |
|
| 1289 |
++.TP |
|
| 1290 |
++.B TLSCRLCheck <level> |
|
| 1291 |
++Specifies if the Certificate Revocation List (CRL) of the CA should be |
|
| 1292 |
++used to verify if the client certificates have not been revoked. This |
|
| 1293 |
++requires |
|
| 1294 |
++.B TLSCACertificatePath |
|
| 1295 |
++parameter to be set. This directive is ignored with GnuTLS. |
|
| 1296 |
++.B <level> |
|
| 1297 |
++can be specified as one of the following keywords: |
|
| 1298 |
++.RS |
|
| 1299 |
++.TP |
|
| 1300 |
++.B none |
|
| 1301 |
++No CRL checks are performed |
|
| 1302 |
++.TP |
|
| 1303 |
++.B peer |
|
| 1304 |
++Check the CRL of the peer certificate |
|
| 1305 |
++.TP |
|
| 1306 |
++.B all |
|
| 1307 |
++Check the CRL for a whole certificate chain |
|
| 1308 |
++.RE |
|
| 1309 |
++.TP |
|
| 1310 |
++.B TLSCRLFile <filename> |
|
| 1311 |
++Specifies a file containing a Certificate Revocation List to be used |
|
| 1312 |
++for verifying that certificates have not been revoked. This directive is |
|
| 1313 |
++only valid when using GnuTLS. |
|
| 1314 |
++.SH GENERAL BACKEND OPTIONS |
|
| 1315 |
++Options in this section only apply to the configuration file section |
|
| 1316 |
++of all instances of the specified backend. All backends may support |
|
| 1317 |
++this class of options, but currently only back-mdb does. |
|
| 1318 |
++.TP |
|
| 1319 |
++.B backend <databasetype> |
|
| 1320 |
++Mark the beginning of a backend definition. <databasetype> |
|
| 1321 |
++should be one of |
|
| 1322 |
++.BR asyncmeta , |
|
| 1323 |
++.BR config , |
|
| 1324 |
++.BR dnssrv , |
|
| 1325 |
++.BR ldap , |
|
| 1326 |
++.BR ldif , |
|
| 1327 |
++.BR mdb , |
|
| 1328 |
++.BR meta , |
|
| 1329 |
++.BR monitor , |
|
| 1330 |
++.BR null , |
|
| 1331 |
++.BR passwd , |
|
| 1332 |
++.BR perl , |
|
| 1333 |
++.BR relay , |
|
| 1334 |
++.BR sock , |
|
| 1335 |
++.BR sql , |
|
| 1336 |
++or |
|
| 1337 |
++.BR wt . |
|
| 1338 |
++At present, only back-mdb implements any options of this type, so this |
|
| 1339 |
++setting is not needed for any other backends. |
|
| 1340 |
++ |
|
| 1341 |
++.SH GENERAL DATABASE OPTIONS |
|
| 1342 |
++Options in this section only apply to the configuration file section |
|
| 1343 |
++for the database in which they are defined. They are supported by every |
|
| 1344 |
++type of backend. Note that the |
|
| 1345 |
++.B database |
|
| 1346 |
++and at least one |
|
| 1347 |
++.B suffix |
|
| 1348 |
++option are mandatory for each database. |
|
| 1349 |
++.TP |
|
| 1350 |
++.B database <databasetype> |
|
| 1351 |
++Mark the beginning of a new database instance definition. <databasetype> |
|
| 1352 |
++should be one of |
|
| 1353 |
++.BR asyncmeta , |
|
| 1354 |
++.BR config , |
|
| 1355 |
++.BR dnssrv , |
|
| 1356 |
++.BR ldap , |
|
| 1357 |
++.BR ldif , |
|
| 1358 |
++.BR mdb , |
|
| 1359 |
++.BR meta , |
|
| 1360 |
++.BR monitor , |
|
| 1361 |
++.BR null , |
|
| 1362 |
++.BR passwd , |
|
| 1363 |
++.BR perl , |
|
| 1364 |
++.BR relay , |
|
| 1365 |
++.BR sock , |
|
| 1366 |
++.BR sql , |
|
| 1367 |
++or |
|
| 1368 |
++.BR wt , |
|
| 1369 |
++depending on which backend will serve the database. |
|
| 1370 |
++ |
|
| 1371 |
++LDAP operations, even subtree searches, normally access only one |
|
| 1372 |
++database. |
|
| 1373 |
++That can be changed by gluing databases together with the |
|
| 1374 |
++.B subordinate |
|
| 1375 |
++keyword. |
|
| 1376 |
++Access controls and some overlays can also involve multiple databases. |
|
| 1377 |
++.TP |
|
| 1378 |
++.B add_content_acl on | off |
|
| 1379 |
++Controls whether Add operations will perform ACL checks on |
|
| 1380 |
++the content of the entry being added. This check is off |
|
| 1381 |
++by default. See the |
|
| 1382 |
++.BR slapd.access (5) |
|
| 1383 |
++manual page for more details on ACL requirements for |
|
| 1384 |
++Add operations. |
|
| 1385 |
++.TP |
|
| 1386 |
++.B extra_attrs <attrlist> |
|
| 1387 |
++Lists what attributes need to be added to search requests. |
|
| 1388 |
++Local storage backends return the entire entry to the frontend. |
|
| 1389 |
++The frontend takes care of only returning the requested attributes |
|
| 1390 |
++that are allowed by ACLs. |
|
| 1391 |
++However, features like access checking and so may need specific |
|
| 1392 |
++attributes that are not automatically returned by remote storage |
|
| 1393 |
++backends, like proxy backends and so on. |
|
| 1394 |
++.B <attrlist> |
|
| 1395 |
++is a list of attributes that are needed for internal purposes |
|
| 1396 |
++and thus always need to be collected, even when not explicitly |
|
| 1397 |
++requested by clients. |
|
| 1398 |
++.TP |
|
| 1399 |
++.B hidden on | off |
|
| 1400 |
++Controls whether the database will be used to answer |
|
| 1401 |
++queries. A database that is hidden will never be |
|
| 1402 |
++selected to answer any queries, and any suffix configured |
|
| 1403 |
++on the database will be ignored in checks for conflicts |
|
| 1404 |
++with other databases. By default, hidden is off. |
|
| 1405 |
++.TP |
|
| 1406 |
++.B lastmod on | off |
|
| 1407 |
++Controls whether |
|
| 1408 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 1409 |
++will automatically maintain the |
|
| 1410 |
++modifiersName, modifyTimestamp, creatorsName, and |
|
| 1411 |
++createTimestamp attributes for entries. It also controls |
|
| 1412 |
++the entryCSN and entryUUID attributes, which are needed |
|
| 1413 |
++by the syncrepl provider. By default, lastmod is on. |
|
| 1414 |
++.TP |
|
| 1415 |
++.B lastbind on | off |
|
| 1416 |
++Controls whether |
|
| 1417 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 1418 |
++will automatically maintain the pwdLastSuccess attribute for |
|
| 1419 |
++entries. By default, lastbind is off. |
|
| 1420 |
++.TP |
|
| 1421 |
++.B lastbind-precision <integer> |
|
| 1422 |
++If lastbind is enabled, specifies how frequently pwdLastSuccess |
|
| 1423 |
++will be updated. More than |
|
| 1424 |
++.B integer |
|
| 1425 |
++seconds must have passed since the last successful bind. In a |
|
| 1426 |
++replicated environment with frequent bind activity it may be |
|
| 1427 |
++useful to set this to a large value. |
|
| 1428 |
++.TP |
|
| 1429 |
++.B limits <selector> <limit> [<limit> [...]] |
|
| 1430 |
++Specify time and size limits based on the operation's initiator or |
|
| 1431 |
++base DN. |
|
| 1432 |
++The argument |
|
| 1433 |
++.B <selector> |
|
| 1434 |
++can be any of |
|
| 1435 |
++.RS |
|
| 1436 |
++.RS |
|
| 1437 |
++.TP |
|
| 1438 |
++anonymous | users | [<dnspec>=]<pattern> | group[/oc[/at]]=<pattern> |
|
| 1439 |
++ |
|
| 1440 |
++.RE |
|
| 1441 |
++with |
|
| 1442 |
++.RS |
|
| 1443 |
++.TP |
|
| 1444 |
++<dnspec> ::= dn[.<type>][.<style>] |
|
| 1445 |
++.TP |
|
| 1446 |
++<type> ::= self | this |
|
| 1447 |
++.TP |
|
| 1448 |
++<style> ::= exact | base | onelevel | subtree | children | regex | anonymous |
|
| 1449 |
++ |
|
| 1450 |
++.RE |
|
| 1451 |
++DN type |
|
| 1452 |
++.B self |
|
| 1453 |
++is the default and means the bound user, while |
|
| 1454 |
++.B this |
|
| 1455 |
++means the base DN of the operation. |
|
| 1456 |
++The term |
|
| 1457 |
++.B anonymous |
|
| 1458 |
++matches all unauthenticated clients. |
|
| 1459 |
++The term |
|
| 1460 |
++.B users |
|
| 1461 |
++matches all authenticated clients; |
|
| 1462 |
++otherwise an |
|
| 1463 |
++.B exact |
|
| 1464 |
++dn pattern is assumed unless otherwise specified by qualifying |
|
| 1465 |
++the (optional) key string |
|
| 1466 |
++.B dn |
|
| 1467 |
++with |
|
| 1468 |
++.B exact |
|
| 1469 |
++or |
|
| 1470 |
++.B base |
|
| 1471 |
++(which are synonyms), to require an exact match; with |
|
| 1472 |
++.BR onelevel , |
|
| 1473 |
++to require exactly one level of depth match; with |
|
| 1474 |
++.BR subtree , |
|
| 1475 |
++to allow any level of depth match, including the exact match; with |
|
| 1476 |
++.BR children , |
|
| 1477 |
++to allow any level of depth match, not including the exact match; |
|
| 1478 |
++.BR regex |
|
| 1479 |
++explicitly requires the (default) match based on POSIX (''extended'')
|
|
| 1480 |
++regular expression pattern. |
|
| 1481 |
++Finally, |
|
| 1482 |
++.B anonymous |
|
| 1483 |
++matches unbound operations; the |
|
| 1484 |
++.B pattern |
|
| 1485 |
++field is ignored. |
|
| 1486 |
++The same behavior is obtained by using the |
|
| 1487 |
++.B anonymous |
|
| 1488 |
++form of the |
|
| 1489 |
++.B <selector> |
|
| 1490 |
++clause. |
|
| 1491 |
++The term |
|
| 1492 |
++.BR group , |
|
| 1493 |
++with the optional objectClass |
|
| 1494 |
++.B oc |
|
| 1495 |
++and attributeType |
|
| 1496 |
++.B at |
|
| 1497 |
++fields, followed by |
|
| 1498 |
++.BR pattern , |
|
| 1499 |
++sets the limits for any DN listed in the values of the |
|
| 1500 |
++.B at |
|
| 1501 |
++attribute (default |
|
| 1502 |
++.BR member ) |
|
| 1503 |
++of the |
|
| 1504 |
++.B oc |
|
| 1505 |
++group objectClass (default |
|
| 1506 |
++.BR groupOfNames ) |
|
| 1507 |
++whose DN exactly matches |
|
| 1508 |
++.BR pattern . |
|
| 1509 |
++ |
|
| 1510 |
++The currently supported limits are |
|
| 1511 |
++.B size |
|
| 1512 |
++and |
|
| 1513 |
++.BR time . |
|
| 1514 |
++ |
|
| 1515 |
++The syntax for time limits is |
|
| 1516 |
++.BR time[.{soft|hard}]=<integer> ,
|
|
| 1517 |
++where |
|
| 1518 |
++.I integer |
|
| 1519 |
++is the number of seconds slapd will spend answering a search request. |
|
| 1520 |
++If no time limit is explicitly requested by the client, the |
|
| 1521 |
++.BR soft |
|
| 1522 |
++limit is used; if the requested time limit exceeds the |
|
| 1523 |
++.BR hard |
|
| 1524 |
++.\"limit, an |
|
| 1525 |
++.\".I "Administrative limit exceeded" |
|
| 1526 |
++.\"error is returned. |
|
| 1527 |
++limit, the value of the limit is used instead. |
|
| 1528 |
++If the |
|
| 1529 |
++.BR hard |
|
| 1530 |
++limit is set to the keyword |
|
| 1531 |
++.IR soft , |
|
| 1532 |
++the soft limit is used in either case; if it is set to the keyword |
|
| 1533 |
++.IR unlimited , |
|
| 1534 |
++no hard limit is enforced. |
|
| 1535 |
++Explicit requests for time limits smaller or equal to the |
|
| 1536 |
++.BR hard |
|
| 1537 |
++limit are honored. |
|
| 1538 |
++If no limit specifier is set, the value is assigned to the |
|
| 1539 |
++.BR soft |
|
| 1540 |
++limit, and the |
|
| 1541 |
++.BR hard |
|
| 1542 |
++limit is set to |
|
| 1543 |
++.IR soft , |
|
| 1544 |
++to preserve the original behavior. |
|
| 1545 |
++ |
|
| 1546 |
++The syntax for size limits is |
|
| 1547 |
++.BR size[.{soft|hard|unchecked}]=<integer> ,
|
|
| 1548 |
++where |
|
| 1549 |
++.I integer |
|
| 1550 |
++is the maximum number of entries slapd will return answering a search |
|
| 1551 |
++request. |
|
| 1552 |
++If no size limit is explicitly requested by the client, the |
|
| 1553 |
++.BR soft |
|
| 1554 |
++limit is used; if the requested size limit exceeds the |
|
| 1555 |
++.BR hard |
|
| 1556 |
++.\"limit, an |
|
| 1557 |
++.\".I "Administrative limit exceeded" |
|
| 1558 |
++.\"error is returned. |
|
| 1559 |
++limit, the value of the limit is used instead. |
|
| 1560 |
++If the |
|
| 1561 |
++.BR hard |
|
| 1562 |
++limit is set to the keyword |
|
| 1563 |
++.IR soft , |
|
| 1564 |
++the soft limit is used in either case; if it is set to the keyword |
|
| 1565 |
++.IR unlimited , |
|
| 1566 |
++no hard limit is enforced. |
|
| 1567 |
++Explicit requests for size limits smaller or equal to the |
|
| 1568 |
++.BR hard |
|
| 1569 |
++limit are honored. |
|
| 1570 |
++The |
|
| 1571 |
++.BR unchecked |
|
| 1572 |
++specifier sets a limit on the number of candidates a search request is allowed |
|
| 1573 |
++to examine. |
|
| 1574 |
++The rationale behind it is that searches for non-properly indexed |
|
| 1575 |
++attributes may result in large sets of candidates, which must be |
|
| 1576 |
++examined by |
|
| 1577 |
++.BR slapd (8) |
|
| 1578 |
++to determine whether they match the search filter or not. |
|
| 1579 |
++The |
|
| 1580 |
++.B unchecked |
|
| 1581 |
++limit provides a means to drop such operations before they are even |
|
| 1582 |
++started. |
|
| 1583 |
++If the selected candidates exceed the |
|
| 1584 |
++.BR unchecked |
|
| 1585 |
++limit, the search will abort with |
|
| 1586 |
++.IR "Unwilling to perform" . |
|
| 1587 |
++If it is set to the keyword |
|
| 1588 |
++.IR unlimited , |
|
| 1589 |
++no limit is applied (the default). |
|
| 1590 |
++If it is set to |
|
| 1591 |
++.IR disabled , |
|
| 1592 |
++the search is not even performed; this can be used to disallow searches |
|
| 1593 |
++for a specific set of users. |
|
| 1594 |
++If no limit specifier is set, the value is assigned to the |
|
| 1595 |
++.BR soft |
|
| 1596 |
++limit, and the |
|
| 1597 |
++.BR hard |
|
| 1598 |
++limit is set to |
|
| 1599 |
++.IR soft , |
|
| 1600 |
++to preserve the original behavior. |
|
| 1601 |
++ |
|
| 1602 |
++In case of no match, the global limits are used. |
|
| 1603 |
++The default values are the same as for |
|
| 1604 |
++.B sizelimit |
|
| 1605 |
++and |
|
| 1606 |
++.BR timelimit ; |
|
| 1607 |
++no limit is set on |
|
| 1608 |
++.BR unchecked . |
|
| 1609 |
++ |
|
| 1610 |
++If |
|
| 1611 |
++.B pagedResults |
|
| 1612 |
++control is requested, the |
|
| 1613 |
++.B hard |
|
| 1614 |
++size limit is used by default, because the request of a specific page size |
|
| 1615 |
++is considered an explicit request for a limitation on the number |
|
| 1616 |
++of entries to be returned. |
|
| 1617 |
++However, the size limit applies to the total count of entries returned within |
|
| 1618 |
++the search, and not to a single page. |
|
| 1619 |
++Additional size limits may be enforced; the syntax is |
|
| 1620 |
++.BR size.pr={<integer>|noEstimate|unlimited} ,
|
|
| 1621 |
++where |
|
| 1622 |
++.I integer |
|
| 1623 |
++is the max page size if no explicit limit is set; the keyword |
|
| 1624 |
++.I noEstimate |
|
| 1625 |
++inhibits the server from returning an estimate of the total number |
|
| 1626 |
++of entries that might be returned |
|
| 1627 |
++(note: the current implementation does not return any estimate). |
|
| 1628 |
++The keyword |
|
| 1629 |
++.I unlimited |
|
| 1630 |
++indicates that no limit is applied to the pagedResults control page size. |
|
| 1631 |
++The syntax |
|
| 1632 |
++.B size.prtotal={<integer>|hard|unlimited|disabled}
|
|
| 1633 |
++allows one to set a limit on the total number of entries that the pagedResults |
|
| 1634 |
++control will return. |
|
| 1635 |
++By default it is set to the |
|
| 1636 |
++.B hard |
|
| 1637 |
++limit which will use the size.hard value. |
|
| 1638 |
++When set, |
|
| 1639 |
++.I integer |
|
| 1640 |
++is the max number of entries that the whole search with pagedResults control |
|
| 1641 |
++can return. |
|
| 1642 |
++Use |
|
| 1643 |
++.I unlimited |
|
| 1644 |
++to allow unlimited number of entries to be returned, e.g. to allow |
|
| 1645 |
++the use of the pagedResults control as a means to circumvent size |
|
| 1646 |
++limitations on regular searches; the keyword |
|
| 1647 |
++.I disabled |
|
| 1648 |
++disables the control, i.e. no paged results can be returned. |
|
| 1649 |
++Note that the total number of entries returned when the pagedResults control |
|
| 1650 |
++is requested cannot exceed the |
|
| 1651 |
++.B hard |
|
| 1652 |
++size limit of regular searches unless extended by the |
|
| 1653 |
++.B prtotal |
|
| 1654 |
++switch. |
|
| 1655 |
++ |
|
| 1656 |
++The \fBlimits\fP statement is typically used to let an unlimited |
|
| 1657 |
++number of entries be returned by searches performed |
|
| 1658 |
++with the identity used by the consumer for synchronization purposes |
|
| 1659 |
++by means of the RFC 4533 LDAP Content Synchronization protocol |
|
| 1660 |
++(see \fBsyncrepl\fP for details). |
|
| 1661 |
++ |
|
| 1662 |
++When using subordinate databases, it is necessary for any limits that |
|
| 1663 |
++are to be applied across the parent and its subordinates to be defined in |
|
| 1664 |
++both the parent and its subordinates. Otherwise the settings on the |
|
| 1665 |
++subordinate databases are not honored. |
|
| 1666 |
++.RE |
|
| 1667 |
++.TP |
|
| 1668 |
++.B maxderefdepth <depth> |
|
| 1669 |
++Specifies the maximum number of aliases to dereference when trying to |
|
| 1670 |
++resolve an entry, used to avoid infinite alias loops. The default is 15. |
|
| 1671 |
++.TP |
|
| 1672 |
++.B multiprovider on | off |
|
| 1673 |
++This option puts a consumer database into Multi-Provider mode. Update |
|
| 1674 |
++operations will be accepted from any user, not just the updatedn. The |
|
| 1675 |
++database must already be configured as a syncrepl consumer |
|
| 1676 |
++before this keyword may be set. This mode also requires a |
|
| 1677 |
++.B serverID |
|
| 1678 |
++(see above) to be configured. |
|
| 1679 |
++By default, multiprovider is off. |
|
| 1680 |
++.TP |
|
| 1681 |
++.B monitoring on | off |
|
| 1682 |
++This option enables database-specific monitoring in the entry related |
|
| 1683 |
++to the current database in the "cn=Databases,cn=Monitor" subtree |
|
| 1684 |
++of the monitor database, if the monitor database is enabled. |
|
| 1685 |
++Currently, only the MDB database provides database-specific monitoring. |
|
| 1686 |
++If monitoring is supported by the backend it defaults to on, otherwise |
|
| 1687 |
++off. |
|
| 1688 |
++.TP |
|
| 1689 |
++.B overlay <overlay-name> |
|
| 1690 |
++Add the specified overlay to this database. An overlay is a piece of |
|
| 1691 |
++code that intercepts database operations in order to extend or change |
|
| 1692 |
++them. Overlays are pushed onto |
|
| 1693 |
++a stack over the database, and so they will execute in the reverse |
|
| 1694 |
++of the order in which they were configured and the database itself |
|
| 1695 |
++will receive control last of all. See the |
|
| 1696 |
++.BR slapd.overlays (5) |
|
| 1697 |
++manual page for an overview of the available overlays. |
|
| 1698 |
++Note that all of the database's |
|
| 1699 |
++regular settings should be configured before any overlay settings. |
|
| 1700 |
++.TP |
|
| 1701 |
++.B readonly on | off |
|
| 1702 |
++This option puts the database into "read-only" mode. Any attempts to |
|
| 1703 |
++modify the database will return an "unwilling to perform" error. By |
|
| 1704 |
++default, readonly is off. |
|
| 1705 |
++.TP |
|
| 1706 |
++.B restrict <oplist> |
|
| 1707 |
++Specify a whitespace separated list of operations that are restricted. |
|
| 1708 |
++If defined inside a database specification, restrictions apply only |
|
| 1709 |
++to that database, otherwise they are global. |
|
| 1710 |
++Operations can be any of |
|
| 1711 |
++.BR add , |
|
| 1712 |
++.BR bind , |
|
| 1713 |
++.BR compare , |
|
| 1714 |
++.BR delete , |
|
| 1715 |
++.BR extended[=<OID>] , |
|
| 1716 |
++.BR modify , |
|
| 1717 |
++.BR rename , |
|
| 1718 |
++.BR search , |
|
| 1719 |
++or the special pseudo-operations |
|
| 1720 |
++.B read |
|
| 1721 |
++and |
|
| 1722 |
++.BR write , |
|
| 1723 |
++which respectively summarize read and write operations. |
|
| 1724 |
++The use of |
|
| 1725 |
++.I restrict write |
|
| 1726 |
++is equivalent to |
|
| 1727 |
++.I readonly on |
|
| 1728 |
++(see above). |
|
| 1729 |
++The |
|
| 1730 |
++.B extended |
|
| 1731 |
++keyword allows one to indicate the OID of the specific operation |
|
| 1732 |
++to be restricted. |
|
| 1733 |
++.TP |
|
| 1734 |
++.B rootdn <dn> |
|
| 1735 |
++Specify the distinguished name that is not subject to access control |
|
| 1736 |
++or administrative limit restrictions for operations on this database. |
|
| 1737 |
++This DN may or may not be associated with an entry. An empty root |
|
| 1738 |
++DN (the default) specifies no root access is to be granted. It is |
|
| 1739 |
++recommended that the rootdn only be specified when needed (such as |
|
| 1740 |
++when initially populating a database). If the rootdn is within |
|
| 1741 |
++a namingContext (suffix) of the database, a simple bind password |
|
| 1742 |
++may also be provided using the |
|
| 1743 |
++.B rootpw |
|
| 1744 |
++directive. Many optional features, including syncrepl, require the |
|
| 1745 |
++rootdn to be defined for the database. |
|
| 1746 |
++.TP |
|
| 1747 |
++.B rootpw <password> |
|
| 1748 |
++Specify a password (or hash of the password) for the rootdn. The |
|
| 1749 |
++password can only be set if the rootdn is within the namingContext |
|
| 1750 |
++(suffix) of the database. |
|
| 1751 |
++This option accepts all RFC 2307 userPassword formats known to |
|
| 1752 |
++the server (see |
|
| 1753 |
++.B password\-hash |
|
| 1754 |
++description) as well as cleartext. |
|
| 1755 |
++.BR slappasswd (8) |
|
| 1756 |
++may be used to generate a hash of a password. Cleartext |
|
| 1757 |
++and \fB{CRYPT}\fP passwords are not recommended. If empty
|
|
| 1758 |
++(the default), authentication of the root DN is by other means |
|
| 1759 |
++(e.g. SASL). Use of SASL is encouraged. |
|
| 1760 |
++.TP |
|
| 1761 |
++.B suffix <dn suffix> |
|
| 1762 |
++Specify the DN suffix of queries that will be passed to this |
|
| 1763 |
++backend database. Multiple suffix lines can be given and at least one is |
|
| 1764 |
++required for each database definition. |
|
| 1765 |
++ |
|
| 1766 |
++If the suffix of one database is "inside" that of another, the database |
|
| 1767 |
++with the inner suffix must come first in the configuration file. |
|
| 1768 |
++You may also want to glue such databases together with the |
|
| 1769 |
++.B subordinate |
|
| 1770 |
++keyword. |
|
| 1771 |
++.TP |
|
| 1772 |
++.B subordinate [advertise] |
|
| 1773 |
++Specify that the current backend database is a subordinate of another |
|
| 1774 |
++backend database. A subordinate database may have only one suffix. This |
|
| 1775 |
++option may be used to glue multiple databases into a single namingContext. |
|
| 1776 |
++If the suffix of the current database is within the namingContext of a |
|
| 1777 |
++superior database, searches against the superior database will be |
|
| 1778 |
++propagated to the subordinate as well. All of the databases |
|
| 1779 |
++associated with a single namingContext should have identical rootdns. |
|
| 1780 |
++Behavior of other LDAP operations is unaffected by this setting. In |
|
| 1781 |
++particular, it is not possible to use moddn to move an entry from |
|
| 1782 |
++one subordinate to another subordinate within the namingContext. |
|
| 1783 |
++ |
|
| 1784 |
++If the optional \fBadvertise\fP flag is supplied, the naming context of |
|
| 1785 |
++this database is advertised in the root DSE. The default is to hide this |
|
| 1786 |
++database context, so that only the superior context is visible. |
|
| 1787 |
++ |
|
| 1788 |
++If the slap tools |
|
| 1789 |
++.BR slapcat (8), |
|
| 1790 |
++.BR slapadd (8), |
|
| 1791 |
++.BR slapmodify (8), |
|
| 1792 |
++or |
|
| 1793 |
++.BR slapindex (8) |
|
| 1794 |
++are used on the superior database, any glued subordinates that support |
|
| 1795 |
++these tools are opened as well. |
|
| 1796 |
++ |
|
| 1797 |
++Databases that are glued together should usually be configured with the |
|
| 1798 |
++same indices (assuming they support indexing), even for attributes that |
|
| 1799 |
++only exist in some of these databases. In general, all of the glued |
|
| 1800 |
++databases should be configured as similarly as possible, since the intent |
|
| 1801 |
++is to provide the appearance of a single directory. |
|
| 1802 |
++ |
|
| 1803 |
++Note that the \fIsubordinate\fP functionality is implemented internally |
|
| 1804 |
++by the \fIglue\fP overlay and as such its behavior will interact with other |
|
| 1805 |
++overlays in use. By default, the glue overlay is automatically configured as |
|
| 1806 |
++the last overlay on the superior backend. Its position on the backend |
|
| 1807 |
++can be explicitly configured by setting an \fBoverlay glue\fP directive |
|
| 1808 |
++at the desired position. This explicit configuration is necessary e.g. |
|
| 1809 |
++when using the \fIsyncprov\fP overlay, which needs to follow \fIglue\fP |
|
| 1810 |
++in order to work over all of the glued databases. E.g. |
|
| 1811 |
++.RS |
|
| 1812 |
++.nf |
|
| 1813 |
++ database mdb |
|
| 1814 |
++ suffix dc=example,dc=com |
|
| 1815 |
++ ... |
|
| 1816 |
++ overlay glue |
|
| 1817 |
++ overlay syncprov |
|
| 1818 |
++.fi |
|
| 1819 |
++.RE |
|
| 1820 |
++.TP |
|
| 1821 |
++.B sync_use_subentry |
|
| 1822 |
++Store the syncrepl contextCSN in a subentry instead of the context entry |
|
| 1823 |
++of the database. The subentry's RDN will be "cn=ldapsync". By default |
|
| 1824 |
++the contextCSN is stored in the context entry. |
|
| 1825 |
++.HP |
|
| 1826 |
++.hy 0 |
|
| 1827 |
++.B syncrepl rid=<replica ID> |
|
| 1828 |
++.B provider=ldap[s]://<hostname>[:port] |
|
| 1829 |
++.B searchbase=<base DN> |
|
| 1830 |
++.B [type=refreshOnly|refreshAndPersist] |
|
| 1831 |
++.B [interval=dd:hh:mm:ss] |
|
| 1832 |
++.B [retry=[<retry interval> <# of retries>]+] |
|
| 1833 |
++.B [filter=<filter str>] |
|
| 1834 |
++.B [scope=sub|one|base|subord] |
|
| 1835 |
++.B [attrs=<attr list>] |
|
| 1836 |
++.B [exattrs=<attr list>] |
|
| 1837 |
++.B [attrsonly] |
|
| 1838 |
++.B [sizelimit=<limit>] |
|
| 1839 |
++.B [timelimit=<limit>] |
|
| 1840 |
++.B [schemachecking=on|off] |
|
| 1841 |
++.B [network\-timeout=<seconds>] |
|
| 1842 |
++.B [timeout=<seconds>] |
|
| 1843 |
++.B [tcp\-user\-timeout=<milliseconds>] |
|
| 1844 |
++.B [bindmethod=simple|sasl] |
|
| 1845 |
++.B [binddn=<dn>] |
|
| 1846 |
++.B [saslmech=<mech>] |
|
| 1847 |
++.B [authcid=<identity>] |
|
| 1848 |
++.B [authzid=<identity>] |
|
| 1849 |
++.B [credentials=<passwd>] |
|
| 1850 |
++.B [realm=<realm>] |
|
| 1851 |
++.B [secprops=<properties>] |
|
| 1852 |
++.B [keepalive=<idle>:<probes>:<interval>] |
|
| 1853 |
++.B [starttls=yes|critical] |
|
| 1854 |
++.B [tls_cert=<file>] |
|
| 1855 |
++.B [tls_key=<file>] |
|
| 1856 |
++.B [tls_cacert=<file>] |
|
| 1857 |
++.B [tls_cacertdir=<path>] |
|
| 1858 |
++.B [tls_reqcert=never|allow|try|demand] |
|
| 1859 |
++.B [tls_reqsan=never|allow|try|demand] |
|
| 1860 |
++.B [tls_cipher_suite=<ciphers>] |
|
| 1861 |
++.B [tls_ecname=<names>] |
|
| 1862 |
++.B [tls_crlcheck=none|peer|all] |
|
| 1863 |
++.B [tls_protocol_min=<major>[.<minor>]] |
|
| 1864 |
++.B [suffixmassage=<real DN>] |
|
| 1865 |
++.B [logbase=<base DN>] |
|
| 1866 |
++.B [logfilter=<filter str>] |
|
| 1867 |
++.B [syncdata=default|accesslog|changelog] |
|
| 1868 |
++.B [lazycommit] |
|
| 1869 |
++.RS |
|
| 1870 |
++Specify the current database as a consumer which is kept up-to-date with the |
|
| 1871 |
++provider content by establishing the current |
|
| 1872 |
++.BR slapd (8) |
|
| 1873 |
++as a replication consumer site running a |
|
| 1874 |
++.B syncrepl |
|
| 1875 |
++replication engine. |
|
| 1876 |
++The consumer content is kept synchronized to the provider content using |
|
| 1877 |
++the LDAP Content Synchronization protocol. Refer to the |
|
| 1878 |
++"OpenLDAP Administrator's Guide" for detailed information on |
|
| 1879 |
++setting up a replicated |
|
| 1880 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 1881 |
++directory service using the |
|
| 1882 |
++.B syncrepl |
|
| 1883 |
++replication engine. |
|
| 1884 |
++ |
|
| 1885 |
++.B rid |
|
| 1886 |
++identifies the current |
|
| 1887 |
++.B syncrepl |
|
| 1888 |
++directive within the replication consumer site. |
|
| 1889 |
++It is a non-negative integer not greater than 999 (limited |
|
| 1890 |
++to three decimal digits). |
|
| 1891 |
++ |
|
| 1892 |
++.B provider |
|
| 1893 |
++specifies the replication provider site containing the provider content |
|
| 1894 |
++as an LDAP URI. If <port> is not given, the standard LDAP port number |
|
| 1895 |
++(389 or 636) is used. |
|
| 1896 |
++ |
|
| 1897 |
++The content of the |
|
| 1898 |
++.B syncrepl |
|
| 1899 |
++consumer is defined using a search |
|
| 1900 |
++specification as its result set. The consumer |
|
| 1901 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 1902 |
++will send search requests to the provider |
|
| 1903 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 1904 |
++according to the search specification. The search specification includes |
|
| 1905 |
++.BR searchbase ", " scope ", " filter ", " attrs ", " attrsonly ", " sizelimit ", " |
|
| 1906 |
++and |
|
| 1907 |
++.B timelimit |
|
| 1908 |
++parameters as in the normal search specification. The |
|
| 1909 |
++.B exattrs |
|
| 1910 |
++option may also be used to specify attributes that should be omitted |
|
| 1911 |
++from incoming entries. |
|
| 1912 |
++The \fBscope\fP defaults to \fBsub\fP, the \fBfilter\fP defaults to |
|
| 1913 |
++\fB(objectclass=*)\fP, and there is no default \fBsearchbase\fP. The |
|
| 1914 |
++\fBattrs\fP list defaults to \fB"*,+"\fP to return all user and operational |
|
| 1915 |
++attributes, and \fBattrsonly\fP and \fBexattrs\fP are unset by default. |
|
| 1916 |
++The \fBsizelimit\fP and \fBtimelimit\fP only |
|
| 1917 |
++accept "unlimited" and positive integers, and both default to "unlimited". |
|
| 1918 |
++The \fBsizelimit\fP and \fBtimelimit\fP parameters define |
|
| 1919 |
++a consumer requested limitation on the number of entries that can be returned |
|
| 1920 |
++by the LDAP Content Synchronization operation; these should be left unchanged |
|
| 1921 |
++from the default otherwise replication may never succeed. |
|
| 1922 |
++Note, however, that any provider-side limits for the replication identity |
|
| 1923 |
++will be enforced by the provider regardless of the limits requested |
|
| 1924 |
++by the LDAP Content Synchronization operation, much like for any other |
|
| 1925 |
++search operation. |
|
| 1926 |
++ |
|
| 1927 |
++The LDAP Content Synchronization protocol has two operation types. |
|
| 1928 |
++In the |
|
| 1929 |
++.B refreshOnly |
|
| 1930 |
++operation, the next synchronization search operation |
|
| 1931 |
++is periodically rescheduled at an interval time (specified by |
|
| 1932 |
++.B interval |
|
| 1933 |
++parameter; 1 day by default) |
|
| 1934 |
++after each synchronization operation finishes. |
|
| 1935 |
++In the |
|
| 1936 |
++.B refreshAndPersist |
|
| 1937 |
++operation, a synchronization search remains persistent in the provider slapd. |
|
| 1938 |
++Further updates to the provider will generate |
|
| 1939 |
++.B searchResultEntry |
|
| 1940 |
++to the consumer slapd as the search responses to the persistent |
|
| 1941 |
++synchronization search. If the initial search fails due to an error, the |
|
| 1942 |
++next synchronization search operation is periodically rescheduled at an |
|
| 1943 |
++interval time (specified by |
|
| 1944 |
++.B interval |
|
| 1945 |
++parameter; 1 day by default) |
|
| 1946 |
++ |
|
| 1947 |
++If an error occurs during replication, the consumer will attempt to |
|
| 1948 |
++reconnect according to the |
|
| 1949 |
++.B retry |
|
| 1950 |
++parameter which is a list of the <retry interval> and <# of retries> pairs. |
|
| 1951 |
++For example, retry="60 10 300 3" lets the consumer retry every 60 seconds |
|
| 1952 |
++for the first 10 times and then retry every 300 seconds for the next 3 |
|
| 1953 |
++times before stop retrying. The `+' in <# of retries> means indefinite |
|
| 1954 |
++number of retries until success. |
|
| 1955 |
++If no |
|
| 1956 |
++.B retry |
|
| 1957 |
++is specified, by default syncrepl retries every hour forever. |
|
| 1958 |
++ |
|
| 1959 |
++The schema checking can be enforced at the LDAP Sync |
|
| 1960 |
++consumer site by turning on the |
|
| 1961 |
++.B schemachecking |
|
| 1962 |
++parameter. The default is \fBoff\fP. |
|
| 1963 |
++Schema checking \fBon\fP means that replicated entries must have |
|
| 1964 |
++a structural objectClass, must obey to objectClass requirements |
|
| 1965 |
++in terms of required/allowed attributes, and that naming attributes |
|
| 1966 |
++and distinguished values must be present. |
|
| 1967 |
++As a consequence, schema checking should be \fBoff\fP when partial |
|
| 1968 |
++replication is used. |
|
| 1969 |
++ |
|
| 1970 |
++The |
|
| 1971 |
++.B network\-timeout |
|
| 1972 |
++parameter sets how long the consumer will wait to establish a |
|
| 1973 |
++network connection to the provider. Once a connection is |
|
| 1974 |
++established, the |
|
| 1975 |
++.B timeout |
|
| 1976 |
++parameter determines how long the consumer will wait for the initial |
|
| 1977 |
++Bind request to complete. The defaults for these parameters come |
|
| 1978 |
++from |
|
| 1979 |
++.BR ldap.conf (5). |
|
| 1980 |
++The |
|
| 1981 |
++.B tcp\-user\-timeout |
|
| 1982 |
++parameter, if non-zero, corresponds to the |
|
| 1983 |
++.B TCP_USER_TIMEOUT |
|
| 1984 |
++set on the target connections, overriding the operating system setting. |
|
| 1985 |
++Only some systems support the customization of this parameter, it is |
|
| 1986 |
++ignored otherwise and system-wide settings are used. |
|
| 1987 |
++ |
|
| 1988 |
++A |
|
| 1989 |
++.B bindmethod |
|
| 1990 |
++of |
|
| 1991 |
++.B simple |
|
| 1992 |
++requires the options |
|
| 1993 |
++.B binddn |
|
| 1994 |
++and |
|
| 1995 |
++.B credentials |
|
| 1996 |
++and should only be used when adequate security services |
|
| 1997 |
++(e.g. TLS or IPSEC) are in place. |
|
| 1998 |
++.B REMEMBER: simple bind credentials must be in cleartext! |
|
| 1999 |
++A |
|
| 2000 |
++.B bindmethod |
|
| 2001 |
++of |
|
| 2002 |
++.B sasl |
|
| 2003 |
++requires the option |
|
| 2004 |
++.B saslmech. |
|
| 2005 |
++Depending on the mechanism, an authentication identity and/or |
|
| 2006 |
++credentials can be specified using |
|
| 2007 |
++.B authcid |
|
| 2008 |
++and |
|
| 2009 |
++.B credentials. |
|
| 2010 |
++The |
|
| 2011 |
++.B authzid |
|
| 2012 |
++parameter may be used to specify an authorization identity. |
|
| 2013 |
++Specific security properties (as with the |
|
| 2014 |
++.B sasl\-secprops |
|
| 2015 |
++keyword above) for a SASL bind can be set with the |
|
| 2016 |
++.B secprops |
|
| 2017 |
++option. A non default SASL realm can be set with the |
|
| 2018 |
++.B realm |
|
| 2019 |
++option. |
|
| 2020 |
++The identity used for synchronization by the consumer should be allowed |
|
| 2021 |
++to receive an unlimited number of entries in response to a search request. |
|
| 2022 |
++The provider, other than allowing authentication of the syncrepl identity, |
|
| 2023 |
++should grant that identity appropriate access privileges to the data |
|
| 2024 |
++that is being replicated (\fBaccess\fP directive), and appropriate time |
|
| 2025 |
++and size limits. |
|
| 2026 |
++This can be accomplished by either allowing unlimited \fBsizelimit\fP |
|
| 2027 |
++and \fBtimelimit\fP, or by setting an appropriate \fBlimits\fP statement |
|
| 2028 |
++in the consumer's configuration (see \fBsizelimit\fP and \fBlimits\fP |
|
| 2029 |
++for details). |
|
| 2030 |
++ |
|
| 2031 |
++The |
|
| 2032 |
++.B keepalive |
|
| 2033 |
++parameter sets the values of \fIidle\fP, \fIprobes\fP, and \fIinterval\fP |
|
| 2034 |
++used to check whether a socket is alive; |
|
| 2035 |
++.I idle |
|
| 2036 |
++is the number of seconds a connection needs to remain idle before TCP |
|
| 2037 |
++starts sending keepalive probes; |
|
| 2038 |
++.I probes |
|
| 2039 |
++is the maximum number of keepalive probes TCP should send before dropping |
|
| 2040 |
++the connection; |
|
| 2041 |
++.I interval |
|
| 2042 |
++is interval in seconds between individual keepalive probes. |
|
| 2043 |
++Only some systems support the customization of these values; |
|
| 2044 |
++the |
|
| 2045 |
++.B keepalive |
|
| 2046 |
++parameter is ignored otherwise, and system-wide settings are used. |
|
| 2047 |
++ |
|
| 2048 |
++The |
|
| 2049 |
++.B starttls |
|
| 2050 |
++parameter specifies use of the StartTLS extended operation |
|
| 2051 |
++to establish a TLS session before Binding to the provider. If the |
|
| 2052 |
++.B critical |
|
| 2053 |
++argument is supplied, the session will be aborted if the StartTLS request |
|
| 2054 |
++fails. Otherwise the syncrepl session continues without TLS. The |
|
| 2055 |
++.B tls_reqcert |
|
| 2056 |
++setting defaults to "demand", the |
|
| 2057 |
++.B tls_reqsan |
|
| 2058 |
++setting defaults to "allow", and the other TLS settings |
|
| 2059 |
++default to the same as the main slapd TLS settings. |
|
| 2060 |
++ |
|
| 2061 |
++The |
|
| 2062 |
++.B suffixmassage |
|
| 2063 |
++parameter allows the consumer to pull entries from a remote directory |
|
| 2064 |
++whose DN suffix differs from the local directory. The portion of the |
|
| 2065 |
++remote entries' DNs that matches the \fIsearchbase\fP will be replaced |
|
| 2066 |
++with the suffixmassage DN. |
|
| 2067 |
++ |
|
| 2068 |
++Rather than replicating whole entries, the consumer can query logs of |
|
| 2069 |
++data modifications. This mode of operation is referred to as \fIdelta |
|
| 2070 |
++syncrepl\fP. In addition to the above parameters, the |
|
| 2071 |
++.B logbase |
|
| 2072 |
++and |
|
| 2073 |
++.B logfilter |
|
| 2074 |
++parameters must be set appropriately for the log that will be used. The |
|
| 2075 |
++.B syncdata |
|
| 2076 |
++parameter must be set to either "accesslog" if the log conforms to the |
|
| 2077 |
++.BR slapo\-accesslog (5) |
|
| 2078 |
++log format, or "changelog" if the log conforms |
|
| 2079 |
++to the obsolete \fIchangelog\fP format. If the |
|
| 2080 |
++.B syncdata |
|
| 2081 |
++parameter is omitted or set to "default" then the log parameters are |
|
| 2082 |
++ignored. |
|
| 2083 |
++ |
|
| 2084 |
++The |
|
| 2085 |
++.B lazycommit |
|
| 2086 |
++parameter tells the underlying database that it can store changes without |
|
| 2087 |
++performing a full flush after each change. This may improve performance |
|
| 2088 |
++for the consumer, while sacrificing safety or durability. |
|
| 2089 |
++.RE |
|
| 2090 |
++.TP |
|
| 2091 |
++.B updatedn <dn> |
|
| 2092 |
++This option is only applicable in a replica |
|
| 2093 |
++database. |
|
| 2094 |
++It specifies the DN permitted to update (subject to access controls) |
|
| 2095 |
++the replica. It is only needed in certain push-mode |
|
| 2096 |
++replication scenarios. Generally, this DN |
|
| 2097 |
++.I should not |
|
| 2098 |
++be the same as the |
|
| 2099 |
++.B rootdn |
|
| 2100 |
++used at the provider. |
|
| 2101 |
++.TP |
|
| 2102 |
++.B updateref <url> |
|
| 2103 |
++Specify the referral to pass back when |
|
| 2104 |
++.BR slapd (8) |
|
| 2105 |
++is asked to modify a replicated local database. |
|
| 2106 |
++If specified multiple times, each url is provided. |
|
| 2107 |
++ |
|
| 2108 |
++.SH DATABASE-SPECIFIC OPTIONS |
|
| 2109 |
++Each database may allow specific configuration options; they are |
|
| 2110 |
++documented separately in the backends' manual pages. See the |
|
| 2111 |
++.BR slapd.backends (5) |
|
| 2112 |
++manual page for an overview of available backends. |
|
| 2113 |
++.SH EXAMPLES |
|
| 2114 |
++.LP |
|
| 2115 |
++Here is a short example of a configuration file: |
|
| 2116 |
++.LP |
|
| 2117 |
++.RS |
|
| 2118 |
++.nf |
|
| 2119 |
++include SYSCONFDIR/schema/core.schema |
|
| 2120 |
++pidfile LOCALSTATEDIR/run/slapd.pid |
|
| 2121 |
++ |
|
| 2122 |
++# Subtypes of "name" (e.g. "cn" and "ou") with the |
|
| 2123 |
++# option ";x\-hidden" can be searched for/compared, |
|
| 2124 |
++# but are not shown. See \fBslapd.access\fP(5). |
|
| 2125 |
++attributeoptions x\-hidden lang\- |
|
| 2126 |
++access to attrs=name;x\-hidden by * =cs |
|
| 2127 |
++ |
|
| 2128 |
++# Protect passwords. See \fBslapd.access\fP(5). |
|
| 2129 |
++access to attrs=userPassword by * auth |
|
| 2130 |
++# Read access to other attributes and entries. |
|
| 2131 |
++access to * by * read |
|
| 2132 |
++ |
|
| 2133 |
++database mdb |
|
| 2134 |
++suffix "dc=our\-domain,dc=com" |
|
| 2135 |
++# The database directory MUST exist prior to |
|
| 2136 |
++# running slapd AND should only be accessible |
|
| 2137 |
++# by the slapd/tools. Mode 0700 recommended. |
|
| 2138 |
++directory LOCALSTATEDIR/openldap\-data |
|
| 2139 |
++# Indices to maintain |
|
| 2140 |
++index objectClass eq |
|
| 2141 |
++index cn,sn,mail pres,eq,approx,sub |
|
| 2142 |
++ |
|
| 2143 |
++# We serve small clients that do not handle referrals, |
|
| 2144 |
++# so handle remote lookups on their behalf. |
|
| 2145 |
++database ldap |
|
| 2146 |
++suffix "" |
|
| 2147 |
++uri ldap://ldap.some\-server.com/ |
|
| 2148 |
++lastmod off |
|
| 2149 |
++.fi |
|
| 2150 |
++.RE |
|
| 2151 |
++.LP |
|
| 2152 |
++"OpenLDAP Administrator's Guide" contains a longer annotated |
|
| 2153 |
++example of a configuration file. |
|
| 2154 |
++The original ETCDIR/slapd.conf is another example. |
|
| 2155 |
++.SH FILES |
|
| 2156 |
++.TP |
|
| 2157 |
++ETCDIR/slapd.conf |
|
| 2158 |
++default slapd configuration file |
|
| 2159 |
++.SH SEE ALSO |
|
| 2160 |
++.BR ldap (3), |
|
| 2161 |
++.BR gnutls\-cli (1), |
|
| 2162 |
++.BR slapd\-config (5), |
|
| 2163 |
++.BR slapd.access (5), |
|
| 2164 |
++.BR slapd.backends (5), |
|
| 2165 |
++.BR slapd.overlays (5), |
|
| 2166 |
++.BR slapd.plugin (5), |
|
| 2167 |
++.BR slapd (8), |
|
| 2168 |
++.BR slapacl (8), |
|
| 2169 |
++.BR slapadd (8), |
|
| 2170 |
++.BR slapauth (8), |
|
| 2171 |
++.BR slapcat (8), |
|
| 2172 |
++.BR slapdn (8), |
|
| 2173 |
++.BR slapindex (8), |
|
| 2174 |
++.BR slapmodify (8), |
|
| 2175 |
++.BR slappasswd (8), |
|
| 2176 |
++.BR slaptest (8). |
|
| 2177 |
++.LP |
|
| 2178 |
++"OpenLDAP Administrator's Guide" (http://www.OpenLDAP.org/doc/admin/) |
|
| 2179 |
++.SH ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS |
|
| 2180 |
++.so ../Project |
|
| 2181 |
+diff -Naurp openldap-2.6.2.orig/doc/man/man5/slapd-config.5 openldap-2.6.2/doc/man/man5/slapd-config.5 |
|
| 2182 |
+--- openldap-2.6.2.orig/doc/man/man5/slapd-config.5 2022-05-04 16:55:23.000000000 +0200 |
|
| 2183 |
+@@ -2233,7 +2233,7 @@ olcSuffix: "dc=our\-domain,dc=com" |
|
| 2184 |
+ # The database directory MUST exist prior to |
|
| 2185 |
+ # running slapd AND should only be accessible |
|
| 2186 |
+ # by the slapd/tools. Mode 0700 recommended. |
|
| 2187 |
+-olcDbDirectory: LOCALSTATEDIR/openldap\-data |
|
| 2188 |
++olcDbDirectory: LOCALSTATEDIR/lib/openldap |
|
| 2189 |
+ # Indices to maintain |
|
| 2190 |
+ olcDbIndex: objectClass eq |
|
| 2191 |
+ olcDbIndex: cn,sn,mail pres,eq,approx,sub |
|
| 2192 |
+diff -Naurp openldap-2.6.2.orig/doc/man/man5/slapd-config.5.orig openldap-2.6.2/doc/man/man5/slapd-config.5.orig |
|
| 2193 |
+--- openldap-2.6.2.orig/doc/man/man5/slapd-config.5.orig 1970-01-01 01:00:00.000000000 +0100 |
|
| 2194 |
+@@ -0,0 +1,2302 @@ |
|
| 2195 |
++.TH SLAPD-CONFIG 5 "RELEASEDATE" "OpenLDAP LDVERSION" |
|
| 2196 |
++.\" Copyright 1998-2022 The OpenLDAP Foundation All Rights Reserved. |
|
| 2197 |
++.\" Copying restrictions apply. See COPYRIGHT/LICENSE. |
|
| 2198 |
++.\" $OpenLDAP$ |
|
| 2199 |
++.SH NAME |
|
| 2200 |
++slapd\-config \- configuration backend to slapd |
|
| 2201 |
++.SH SYNOPSIS |
|
| 2202 |
++ETCDIR/slapd.d |
|
| 2203 |
++.SH DESCRIPTION |
|
| 2204 |
++The |
|
| 2205 |
++.B config |
|
| 2206 |
++backend manages all of the configuration information for the |
|
| 2207 |
++.BR slapd (8) |
|
| 2208 |
++daemon. This configuration information is also used by the SLAPD tools |
|
| 2209 |
++.BR slapacl (8), |
|
| 2210 |
++.BR slapadd (8), |
|
| 2211 |
++.BR slapauth (8), |
|
| 2212 |
++.BR slapcat (8), |
|
| 2213 |
++.BR slapdn (8), |
|
| 2214 |
++.BR slapindex (8), |
|
| 2215 |
++.BR slapmodify (8), |
|
| 2216 |
++and |
|
| 2217 |
++.BR slaptest (8). |
|
| 2218 |
++.LP |
|
| 2219 |
++The |
|
| 2220 |
++.B config |
|
| 2221 |
++backend is backward compatible with the older |
|
| 2222 |
++.BR slapd.conf (5) |
|
| 2223 |
++file but provides the ability to change the configuration dynamically |
|
| 2224 |
++at runtime. If slapd is run with only a |
|
| 2225 |
++.B slapd.conf |
|
| 2226 |
++file dynamic changes will be allowed but they will not persist across |
|
| 2227 |
++a server restart. Dynamic changes are only saved when slapd is running |
|
| 2228 |
++from a |
|
| 2229 |
++.B slapd.d |
|
| 2230 |
++configuration directory. |
|
| 2231 |
++.LP |
|
| 2232 |
++ |
|
| 2233 |
++Unlike other backends, there can only be one instance of the |
|
| 2234 |
++.B config |
|
| 2235 |
++backend, and most of its structure is predefined. The root of the |
|
| 2236 |
++database is hardcoded to |
|
| 2237 |
++.B "cn=config" |
|
| 2238 |
++and this root entry contains |
|
| 2239 |
++global settings for slapd. Multiple child entries underneath the |
|
| 2240 |
++root entry are used to carry various other settings: |
|
| 2241 |
++.RS |
|
| 2242 |
++.TP |
|
| 2243 |
++.B cn=Module |
|
| 2244 |
++dynamically loaded modules |
|
| 2245 |
++.TP |
|
| 2246 |
++.B cn=Schema |
|
| 2247 |
++schema definitions |
|
| 2248 |
++.TP |
|
| 2249 |
++.B olcBackend=xxx |
|
| 2250 |
++backend-specific settings |
|
| 2251 |
++.TP |
|
| 2252 |
++.B olcDatabase=xxx |
|
| 2253 |
++database-specific settings |
|
| 2254 |
++.RE |
|
| 2255 |
++ |
|
| 2256 |
++The |
|
| 2257 |
++.B cn=Module |
|
| 2258 |
++entries will only appear in configurations where slapd |
|
| 2259 |
++was built with support for dynamically loaded modules. There can be |
|
| 2260 |
++multiple entries, one for each configured module path. Within each |
|
| 2261 |
++entry there will be values recorded for each module loaded on a |
|
| 2262 |
++given path. These entries have no children. |
|
| 2263 |
++ |
|
| 2264 |
++The |
|
| 2265 |
++.B cn=Schema |
|
| 2266 |
++entry contains all of the hardcoded schema elements. |
|
| 2267 |
++The children of this entry contain all user-defined schema elements. |
|
| 2268 |
++In schema that were loaded from include files, the child entry will |
|
| 2269 |
++be named after the include file from which the schema was loaded. |
|
| 2270 |
++Typically the first child in this subtree will be |
|
| 2271 |
++.BR cn=core,cn=schema,cn=config . |
|
| 2272 |
++ |
|
| 2273 |
++.B olcBackend |
|
| 2274 |
++entries are for storing settings specific to a single |
|
| 2275 |
++backend type (and thus global to all database instances of that type). |
|
| 2276 |
++At present, only back-mdb implements any options of this type, so this |
|
| 2277 |
++setting is not needed for any other backends. |
|
| 2278 |
++ |
|
| 2279 |
++.B olcDatabase |
|
| 2280 |
++entries store settings specific to a single database |
|
| 2281 |
++instance. These entries may have |
|
| 2282 |
++.B olcOverlay |
|
| 2283 |
++child entries corresponding |
|
| 2284 |
++to any overlays configured on the database. The olcDatabase and |
|
| 2285 |
++olcOverlay entries may also have miscellaneous child entries for |
|
| 2286 |
++other settings as needed. There are two special database entries |
|
| 2287 |
++that are predefined \- one is an entry for the config database itself, |
|
| 2288 |
++and the other is for the "frontend" database. Settings in the |
|
| 2289 |
++frontend database are inherited by the other databases, unless |
|
| 2290 |
++they are explicitly overridden in a specific database. |
|
| 2291 |
++.LP |
|
| 2292 |
++The specific configuration options available are discussed below in the |
|
| 2293 |
++Global Configuration Options, General Backend Options, and General Database |
|
| 2294 |
++Options. Options are set by defining LDAP attributes with specific values. |
|
| 2295 |
++In general the names of the LDAP attributes are the same as the corresponding |
|
| 2296 |
++.B slapd.conf |
|
| 2297 |
++keyword, with an "olc" prefix added on. |
|
| 2298 |
++ |
|
| 2299 |
++The parser for many of these attributes is the same as used for parsing |
|
| 2300 |
++the slapd.conf keywords. As such, slapd.conf keywords that allow multiple |
|
| 2301 |
++items to be specified on one line, separated by whitespace, will allow |
|
| 2302 |
++multiple items to be specified in one attribute value. However, when |
|
| 2303 |
++reading the attribute via LDAP, the items will be returned as individual |
|
| 2304 |
++attribute values. |
|
| 2305 |
++ |
|
| 2306 |
++Backend-specific options are discussed in the |
|
| 2307 |
++.B slapd\-<backend>(5) |
|
| 2308 |
++manual pages. Refer to the "OpenLDAP Administrator's Guide" for more |
|
| 2309 |
++details on configuring slapd. |
|
| 2310 |
++.SH GLOBAL CONFIGURATION OPTIONS |
|
| 2311 |
++Options described in this section apply to the server as a whole. |
|
| 2312 |
++Arguments that should be replaced by |
|
| 2313 |
++actual text are shown in brackets <>. |
|
| 2314 |
++ |
|
| 2315 |
++These options may only be specified in the |
|
| 2316 |
++.B cn=config |
|
| 2317 |
++entry. This entry must have an objectClass of |
|
| 2318 |
++.BR olcGlobal . |
|
| 2319 |
++ |
|
| 2320 |
++.TP |
|
| 2321 |
++.B olcAllows: <features> |
|
| 2322 |
++Specify a set of features to allow (default none). |
|
| 2323 |
++.B bind_v2 |
|
| 2324 |
++allows acceptance of LDAPv2 bind requests. Note that |
|
| 2325 |
++.BR slapd (8) |
|
| 2326 |
++does not truly implement LDAPv2 (RFC 1777), now Historic (RFC 3494). |
|
| 2327 |
++.B bind_anon_cred |
|
| 2328 |
++allows anonymous bind when credentials are not empty (e.g. |
|
| 2329 |
++when DN is empty). |
|
| 2330 |
++.B bind_anon_dn |
|
| 2331 |
++allows unauthenticated (anonymous) bind when DN is not empty. |
|
| 2332 |
++.B update_anon |
|
| 2333 |
++allows unauthenticated (anonymous) update operations to be processed |
|
| 2334 |
++(subject to access controls and other administrative limits). |
|
| 2335 |
++.B proxy_authz_anon |
|
| 2336 |
++allows unauthenticated (anonymous) proxy authorization control to be processed |
|
| 2337 |
++(subject to access controls, authorization and other administrative limits). |
|
| 2338 |
++.TP |
|
| 2339 |
++.B olcArgsFile: <filename> |
|
| 2340 |
++The (absolute) name of a file that will hold the |
|
| 2341 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 2342 |
++server's command line (program name and options). |
|
| 2343 |
++.TP |
|
| 2344 |
++.B olcAttributeOptions: <option-name>... |
|
| 2345 |
++Define tagging attribute options or option tag/range prefixes. |
|
| 2346 |
++Options must not end with `\-', prefixes must end with `\-'. |
|
| 2347 |
++The `lang\-' prefix is predefined. |
|
| 2348 |
++If you use the |
|
| 2349 |
++.B olcAttributeOptions |
|
| 2350 |
++directive, `lang\-' will no longer be defined and you must specify it |
|
| 2351 |
++explicitly if you want it defined. |
|
| 2352 |
++ |
|
| 2353 |
++An attribute description with a tagging option is a subtype of that |
|
| 2354 |
++attribute description without the option. |
|
| 2355 |
++Except for that, options defined this way have no special semantics. |
|
| 2356 |
++Prefixes defined this way work like the `lang\-' options: |
|
| 2357 |
++They define a prefix for tagging options starting with the prefix. |
|
| 2358 |
++That is, if you define the prefix `x\-foo\-', you can use the option |
|
| 2359 |
++`x\-foo\-bar'. |
|
| 2360 |
++Furthermore, in a search or compare, a prefix or range name (with |
|
| 2361 |
++a trailing `\-') matches all options starting with that name, as well |
|
| 2362 |
++as the option with the range name sans the trailing `\-'. |
|
| 2363 |
++That is, `x\-foo\-bar\-' matches `x\-foo\-bar' and `x\-foo\-bar\-baz'. |
|
| 2364 |
++ |
|
| 2365 |
++RFC 4520 reserves options beginning with `x\-' for private experiments. |
|
| 2366 |
++Other options should be registered with IANA, see RFC 4520 section 3.5. |
|
| 2367 |
++OpenLDAP also has the `binary' option built in, but this is a transfer |
|
| 2368 |
++option, not a tagging option. |
|
| 2369 |
++.TP |
|
| 2370 |
++.B olcAuthIDRewrite: <rewrite\-rule> |
|
| 2371 |
++Used by the authentication framework to convert simple user names |
|
| 2372 |
++to an LDAP DN used for authorization purposes. |
|
| 2373 |
++Its purpose is analogous to that of |
|
| 2374 |
++.BR olcAuthzRegexp |
|
| 2375 |
++(see below). |
|
| 2376 |
++The |
|
| 2377 |
++.B rewrite\-rule |
|
| 2378 |
++is a set of rules analogous to those described in |
|
| 2379 |
++.BR slapo\-rwm (5) |
|
| 2380 |
++for data rewriting (after stripping the \fIrwm\-\fP prefix). |
|
| 2381 |
++.B olcAuthIDRewrite |
|
| 2382 |
++and |
|
| 2383 |
++.B olcAuthzRegexp |
|
| 2384 |
++should not be intermixed. |
|
| 2385 |
++.TP |
|
| 2386 |
++.B olcAuthzPolicy: <policy> |
|
| 2387 |
++Used to specify which rules to use for Proxy Authorization. Proxy |
|
| 2388 |
++authorization allows a client to authenticate to the server using one |
|
| 2389 |
++user's credentials, but specify a different identity to use for authorization |
|
| 2390 |
++and access control purposes. It essentially allows user A to login as user |
|
| 2391 |
++B, using user A's password. |
|
| 2392 |
++The |
|
| 2393 |
++.B none |
|
| 2394 |
++flag disables proxy authorization. This is the default setting. |
|
| 2395 |
++The |
|
| 2396 |
++.B from |
|
| 2397 |
++flag will use rules in the |
|
| 2398 |
++.I authzFrom |
|
| 2399 |
++attribute of the authorization DN. |
|
| 2400 |
++The |
|
| 2401 |
++.B to |
|
| 2402 |
++flag will use rules in the |
|
| 2403 |
++.I authzTo |
|
| 2404 |
++attribute of the authentication DN. |
|
| 2405 |
++The |
|
| 2406 |
++.B any |
|
| 2407 |
++flag, an alias for the deprecated value of |
|
| 2408 |
++.BR both , |
|
| 2409 |
++will allow any of the above, whatever succeeds first (checked in |
|
| 2410 |
++.BR to , |
|
| 2411 |
++.B from |
|
| 2412 |
++sequence. |
|
| 2413 |
++The |
|
| 2414 |
++.B all |
|
| 2415 |
++flag requires both authorizations to succeed. |
|
| 2416 |
++.LP |
|
| 2417 |
++.RS |
|
| 2418 |
++The rules are mechanisms to specify which identities are allowed |
|
| 2419 |
++to perform proxy authorization. |
|
| 2420 |
++The |
|
| 2421 |
++.I authzFrom |
|
| 2422 |
++attribute in an entry specifies which other users |
|
| 2423 |
++are allowed to proxy login to this entry. The |
|
| 2424 |
++.I authzTo |
|
| 2425 |
++attribute in |
|
| 2426 |
++an entry specifies which other users this user can authorize as. Use of |
|
| 2427 |
++.I authzTo |
|
| 2428 |
++rules can be easily |
|
| 2429 |
++abused if users are allowed to write arbitrary values to this attribute. |
|
| 2430 |
++In general the |
|
| 2431 |
++.I authzTo |
|
| 2432 |
++attribute must be protected with ACLs such that |
|
| 2433 |
++only privileged users can modify it. |
|
| 2434 |
++The value of |
|
| 2435 |
++.I authzFrom |
|
| 2436 |
++and |
|
| 2437 |
++.I authzTo |
|
| 2438 |
++describes an |
|
| 2439 |
++.B identity |
|
| 2440 |
++or a set of identities; it can take five forms: |
|
| 2441 |
++.RS |
|
| 2442 |
++.TP |
|
| 2443 |
++.B ldap:///<base>??[<scope>]?<filter> |
|
| 2444 |
++.RE |
|
| 2445 |
++.RS |
|
| 2446 |
++.B dn[.<dnstyle>]:<pattern> |
|
| 2447 |
++.RE |
|
| 2448 |
++.RS |
|
| 2449 |
++.B u[.<mech>[<realm>]]:<pattern> |
|
| 2450 |
++.RE |
|
| 2451 |
++.RS |
|
| 2452 |
++.B group[/objectClass[/attributeType]]:<pattern> |
|
| 2453 |
++.RE |
|
| 2454 |
++.RS |
|
| 2455 |
++.B <pattern> |
|
| 2456 |
++.RE |
|
| 2457 |
++.RS |
|
| 2458 |
++ |
|
| 2459 |
++.B <dnstyle>:={exact|onelevel|children|subtree|regex}
|
|
| 2460 |
++ |
|
| 2461 |
++.RE |
|
| 2462 |
++The first form is a valid LDAP |
|
| 2463 |
++.B URI |
|
| 2464 |
++where the |
|
| 2465 |
++.IR <host>:<port> , |
|
| 2466 |
++the |
|
| 2467 |
++.I <attrs> |
|
| 2468 |
++and the |
|
| 2469 |
++.I <extensions> |
|
| 2470 |
++portions must be absent, so that the search occurs locally on either |
|
| 2471 |
++.I authzFrom |
|
| 2472 |
++or |
|
| 2473 |
++.IR authzTo . |
|
| 2474 |
++ |
|
| 2475 |
++.LP |
|
| 2476 |
++The second form is a |
|
| 2477 |
++.BR DN , |
|
| 2478 |
++with the optional style modifiers |
|
| 2479 |
++.IR exact , |
|
| 2480 |
++.IR onelevel , |
|
| 2481 |
++.IR children , |
|
| 2482 |
++and |
|
| 2483 |
++.I subtree |
|
| 2484 |
++for exact, onelevel, children and subtree matches, which cause |
|
| 2485 |
++.I <pattern> |
|
| 2486 |
++to be normalized according to the DN normalization rules, or the special |
|
| 2487 |
++.I regex |
|
| 2488 |
++style, which causes the |
|
| 2489 |
++.I <pattern> |
|
| 2490 |
++to be treated as a POSIX (''extended'') regular expression, as
|
|
| 2491 |
++discussed in |
|
| 2492 |
++.BR regex (7) |
|
| 2493 |
++and/or |
|
| 2494 |
++.BR re_format (7). |
|
| 2495 |
++A pattern of |
|
| 2496 |
++.I * |
|
| 2497 |
++means any non-anonymous DN. |
|
| 2498 |
++ |
|
| 2499 |
++.LP |
|
| 2500 |
++The third form is a SASL |
|
| 2501 |
++.BR id , |
|
| 2502 |
++with the optional fields |
|
| 2503 |
++.I <mech> |
|
| 2504 |
++and |
|
| 2505 |
++.I <realm> |
|
| 2506 |
++that allow to specify a SASL |
|
| 2507 |
++.BR mechanism , |
|
| 2508 |
++and eventually a SASL |
|
| 2509 |
++.BR realm , |
|
| 2510 |
++for those mechanisms that support one. |
|
| 2511 |
++The need to allow the specification of a mechanism is still debated, |
|
| 2512 |
++and users are strongly discouraged to rely on this possibility. |
|
| 2513 |
++ |
|
| 2514 |
++.LP |
|
| 2515 |
++The fourth form is a group specification. |
|
| 2516 |
++It consists of the keyword |
|
| 2517 |
++.BR group , |
|
| 2518 |
++optionally followed by the specification of the group |
|
| 2519 |
++.B objectClass |
|
| 2520 |
++and |
|
| 2521 |
++.BR attributeType . |
|
| 2522 |
++The |
|
| 2523 |
++.B objectClass |
|
| 2524 |
++defaults to |
|
| 2525 |
++.IR groupOfNames . |
|
| 2526 |
++The |
|
| 2527 |
++.B attributeType |
|
| 2528 |
++defaults to |
|
| 2529 |
++.IR member . |
|
| 2530 |
++The group with DN |
|
| 2531 |
++.B <pattern> |
|
| 2532 |
++is searched with base scope, filtered on the specified |
|
| 2533 |
++.BR objectClass . |
|
| 2534 |
++The values of the resulting |
|
| 2535 |
++.B attributeType |
|
| 2536 |
++are searched for the asserted DN. |
|
| 2537 |
++ |
|
| 2538 |
++.LP |
|
| 2539 |
++The fifth form is provided for backwards compatibility. If no identity |
|
| 2540 |
++type is provided, i.e. only |
|
| 2541 |
++.B <pattern> |
|
| 2542 |
++is present, an |
|
| 2543 |
++.I exact DN |
|
| 2544 |
++is assumed; as a consequence, |
|
| 2545 |
++.B <pattern> |
|
| 2546 |
++is subjected to DN normalization. |
|
| 2547 |
++ |
|
| 2548 |
++.LP |
|
| 2549 |
++Since the interpretation of |
|
| 2550 |
++.I authzFrom |
|
| 2551 |
++and |
|
| 2552 |
++.I authzTo |
|
| 2553 |
++can impact security, users are strongly encouraged |
|
| 2554 |
++to explicitly set the type of identity specification that is being used. |
|
| 2555 |
++A subset of these rules can be used as third arg in the |
|
| 2556 |
++.B olcAuthzRegexp |
|
| 2557 |
++statement (see below); significantly, the |
|
| 2558 |
++.IR URI , |
|
| 2559 |
++provided it results in exactly one entry, |
|
| 2560 |
++and the |
|
| 2561 |
++.I dn.exact:<dn> |
|
| 2562 |
++forms. |
|
| 2563 |
++.RE |
|
| 2564 |
++.TP |
|
| 2565 |
++.B olcAuthzRegexp: <match> <replace> |
|
| 2566 |
++Used by the authentication framework to convert simple user names, |
|
| 2567 |
++such as provided by SASL subsystem, or extracted from certificates |
|
| 2568 |
++in case of cert-based SASL EXTERNAL, or provided within the RFC 4370 |
|
| 2569 |
++"proxied authorization" control, to an LDAP DN used for |
|
| 2570 |
++authorization purposes. Note that the resulting DN need not refer |
|
| 2571 |
++to an existing entry to be considered valid. When an authorization |
|
| 2572 |
++request is received from the SASL subsystem, the SASL |
|
| 2573 |
++.BR USERNAME , |
|
| 2574 |
++.BR REALM , |
|
| 2575 |
++and |
|
| 2576 |
++.B MECHANISM |
|
| 2577 |
++are taken, when available, and combined into a name of the form |
|
| 2578 |
++.RS |
|
| 2579 |
++.RS |
|
| 2580 |
++.TP |
|
| 2581 |
++.B UID=<username>[[,CN=<realm>],CN=<mechanism>],CN=auth |
|
| 2582 |
++ |
|
| 2583 |
++.RE |
|
| 2584 |
++This name is then compared against the |
|
| 2585 |
++.B match |
|
| 2586 |
++POSIX (''extended'') regular expression, and if the match is successful,
|
|
| 2587 |
++the name is replaced with the |
|
| 2588 |
++.B replace |
|
| 2589 |
++string. If there are wildcard strings in the |
|
| 2590 |
++.B match |
|
| 2591 |
++regular expression that are enclosed in parenthesis, e.g. |
|
| 2592 |
++.RS |
|
| 2593 |
++.TP |
|
| 2594 |
++.B UID=([^,]*),CN=.* |
|
| 2595 |
++ |
|
| 2596 |
++.RE |
|
| 2597 |
++then the portion of the name that matched the wildcard will be stored |
|
| 2598 |
++in the numbered placeholder variable $1. If there are other wildcard strings |
|
| 2599 |
++in parenthesis, the matching strings will be in $2, $3, etc. up to $9. The |
|
| 2600 |
++placeholders can then be used in the |
|
| 2601 |
++.B replace |
|
| 2602 |
++string, e.g. |
|
| 2603 |
++.RS |
|
| 2604 |
++.TP |
|
| 2605 |
++.B UID=$1,OU=Accounts,DC=example,DC=com |
|
| 2606 |
++ |
|
| 2607 |
++.RE |
|
| 2608 |
++The replaced name can be either a DN, i.e. a string prefixed by "dn:", |
|
| 2609 |
++or an LDAP URI. |
|
| 2610 |
++If the latter, the server will use the URI to search its own database(s) |
|
| 2611 |
++and, if the search returns exactly one entry, the name is |
|
| 2612 |
++replaced by the DN of that entry. The LDAP URI must have no |
|
| 2613 |
++hostport, attrs, or extensions components, but the filter is mandatory, |
|
| 2614 |
++e.g. |
|
| 2615 |
++.RS |
|
| 2616 |
++.TP |
|
| 2617 |
++.B ldap:///OU=Accounts,DC=example,DC=com??one?(UID=$1) |
|
| 2618 |
++ |
|
| 2619 |
++.RE |
|
| 2620 |
++The protocol portion of the URI must be strictly |
|
| 2621 |
++.BR ldap . |
|
| 2622 |
++Note that this search is subject to access controls. Specifically, |
|
| 2623 |
++the authentication identity must have "auth" access in the subject. |
|
| 2624 |
++ |
|
| 2625 |
++Multiple |
|
| 2626 |
++.B olcAuthzRegexp |
|
| 2627 |
++values can be specified to allow for multiple matching |
|
| 2628 |
++and replacement patterns. The matching patterns are checked in the order they |
|
| 2629 |
++appear in the attribute, stopping at the first successful match. |
|
| 2630 |
++ |
|
| 2631 |
++.\".B Caution: |
|
| 2632 |
++.\"Because the plus sign + is a character recognized by the regular expression engine, |
|
| 2633 |
++.\"and it will appear in names that include a REALM, be careful to escape the |
|
| 2634 |
++.\"plus sign with a backslash \\+ to remove the character's special meaning. |
|
| 2635 |
++.RE |
|
| 2636 |
++.TP |
|
| 2637 |
++.B olcConcurrency: <integer> |
|
| 2638 |
++Specify a desired level of concurrency. Provided to the underlying |
|
| 2639 |
++thread system as a hint. The default is not to provide any hint. This setting |
|
| 2640 |
++is only meaningful on some platforms where there is not a one to one |
|
| 2641 |
++correspondence between user threads and kernel threads. |
|
| 2642 |
++.TP |
|
| 2643 |
++.B olcConnMaxPending: <integer> |
|
| 2644 |
++Specify the maximum number of pending requests for an anonymous session. |
|
| 2645 |
++If requests are submitted faster than the server can process them, they |
|
| 2646 |
++will be queued up to this limit. If the limit is exceeded, the session |
|
| 2647 |
++is closed. The default is 100. |
|
| 2648 |
++.TP |
|
| 2649 |
++.B olcConnMaxPendingAuth: <integer> |
|
| 2650 |
++Specify the maximum number of pending requests for an authenticated session. |
|
| 2651 |
++The default is 1000. |
|
| 2652 |
++.TP |
|
| 2653 |
++.B olcDisallows: <features> |
|
| 2654 |
++Specify a set of features to disallow (default none). |
|
| 2655 |
++.B bind_anon |
|
| 2656 |
++disables acceptance of anonymous bind requests. Note that this setting |
|
| 2657 |
++does not prohibit anonymous directory access (See "require authc"). |
|
| 2658 |
++.B bind_simple |
|
| 2659 |
++disables simple (bind) authentication. |
|
| 2660 |
++.B tls_2_anon |
|
| 2661 |
++disables forcing session to anonymous status (see also |
|
| 2662 |
++.BR tls_authc ) |
|
| 2663 |
++upon StartTLS operation receipt. |
|
| 2664 |
++.B tls_authc |
|
| 2665 |
++disallows the StartTLS operation if authenticated (see also |
|
| 2666 |
++.BR tls_2_anon ). |
|
| 2667 |
++.B proxy_authz_non_critical |
|
| 2668 |
++disables acceptance of the proxied authorization control (RFC4370) |
|
| 2669 |
++with criticality set to FALSE. |
|
| 2670 |
++.B dontusecopy_non_critical |
|
| 2671 |
++disables acceptance of the dontUseCopy control (a work in progress) |
|
| 2672 |
++with criticality set to FALSE. |
|
| 2673 |
++.TP |
|
| 2674 |
++.B olcGentleHUP: { TRUE | FALSE }
|
|
| 2675 |
++A SIGHUP signal will only cause a 'gentle' shutdown-attempt: |
|
| 2676 |
++.B Slapd |
|
| 2677 |
++will stop listening for new connections, but will not close the |
|
| 2678 |
++connections to the current clients. Future write operations return |
|
| 2679 |
++unwilling-to-perform, though. Slapd terminates when all clients |
|
| 2680 |
++have closed their connections (if they ever do), or \- as before \- |
|
| 2681 |
++if it receives a SIGTERM signal. This can be useful if you wish to |
|
| 2682 |
++terminate the server and start a new |
|
| 2683 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 2684 |
++server |
|
| 2685 |
++.B with another database, |
|
| 2686 |
++without disrupting the currently active clients. |
|
| 2687 |
++The default is FALSE. You may wish to use |
|
| 2688 |
++.B olcIdleTimeout |
|
| 2689 |
++along with this option. |
|
| 2690 |
++.TP |
|
| 2691 |
++.B olcIdleTimeout: <integer> |
|
| 2692 |
++Specify the number of seconds to wait before forcibly closing |
|
| 2693 |
++an idle client connection. A setting of 0 disables this |
|
| 2694 |
++feature. The default is 0. You may also want to set the |
|
| 2695 |
++.B olcWriteTimeout |
|
| 2696 |
++option. |
|
| 2697 |
++.TP |
|
| 2698 |
++.B olcIndexHash64: { on | off }
|
|
| 2699 |
++Use a 64 bit hash for indexing. The default is to use 32 bit hashes. |
|
| 2700 |
++These hashes are used for equality and substring indexing. The 64 bit |
|
| 2701 |
++version may be needed to avoid index collisions when the number of |
|
| 2702 |
++indexed values exceeds ~64 million. (Note that substring indexing |
|
| 2703 |
++generates multiple index values per actual attribute value.) |
|
| 2704 |
++Indices generated with 32 bit hashes are incompatible with the 64 bit |
|
| 2705 |
++version, and vice versa. Any existing databases must be fully reloaded |
|
| 2706 |
++when changing this setting. This directive is only supported on 64 bit CPUs. |
|
| 2707 |
++.TP |
|
| 2708 |
++.B olcIndexIntLen: <integer> |
|
| 2709 |
++Specify the key length for ordered integer indices. The most significant |
|
| 2710 |
++bytes of the binary integer will be used for index keys. The default |
|
| 2711 |
++value is 4, which provides exact indexing for 31 bit values. |
|
| 2712 |
++A floating point representation is used to index too large values. |
|
| 2713 |
++.TP |
|
| 2714 |
++.B olcIndexSubstrIfMaxlen: <integer> |
|
| 2715 |
++Specify the maximum length for subinitial and subfinal indices. Only |
|
| 2716 |
++this many characters of an attribute value will be processed by the |
|
| 2717 |
++indexing functions; any excess characters are ignored. The default is 4. |
|
| 2718 |
++.TP |
|
| 2719 |
++.B olcIndexSubstrIfMinlen: <integer> |
|
| 2720 |
++Specify the minimum length for subinitial and subfinal indices. An |
|
| 2721 |
++attribute value must have at least this many characters in order to be |
|
| 2722 |
++processed by the indexing functions. The default is 2. |
|
| 2723 |
++.TP |
|
| 2724 |
++.B olcIndexSubstrAnyLen: <integer> |
|
| 2725 |
++Specify the length used for subany indices. An attribute value must have |
|
| 2726 |
++at least this many characters in order to be processed. Attribute values |
|
| 2727 |
++longer than this length will be processed in segments of this length. The |
|
| 2728 |
++default is 4. The subany index will also be used in subinitial and |
|
| 2729 |
++subfinal index lookups when the filter string is longer than the |
|
| 2730 |
++.I olcIndexSubstrIfMaxlen |
|
| 2731 |
++value. |
|
| 2732 |
++.TP |
|
| 2733 |
++.B olcIndexSubstrAnyStep: <integer> |
|
| 2734 |
++Specify the steps used in subany index lookups. This value sets the offset |
|
| 2735 |
++for the segments of a filter string that are processed for a subany index |
|
| 2736 |
++lookup. The default is 2. For example, with the default values, a search |
|
| 2737 |
++using this filter "cn=*abcdefgh*" would generate index lookups for |
|
| 2738 |
++"abcd", "cdef", and "efgh". |
|
| 2739 |
++ |
|
| 2740 |
++.LP |
|
| 2741 |
++Note: Indexing support depends on the particular backend in use. Also, |
|
| 2742 |
++changing these settings will generally require deleting any indices that |
|
| 2743 |
++depend on these parameters and recreating them with |
|
| 2744 |
++.BR slapindex (8). |
|
| 2745 |
++ |
|
| 2746 |
++.TP |
|
| 2747 |
++.B olcListenerThreads: <integer> |
|
| 2748 |
++Specify the number of threads to use for the connection manager. |
|
| 2749 |
++The default is 1 and this is typically adequate for up to 16 CPU cores. |
|
| 2750 |
++The value should be set to a power of 2. |
|
| 2751 |
++.TP |
|
| 2752 |
++.B olcLocalSSF: <SSF> |
|
| 2753 |
++Specifies the Security Strength Factor (SSF) to be given local LDAP sessions, |
|
| 2754 |
++such as those to the ldapi:// listener. For a description of SSF values, |
|
| 2755 |
++see |
|
| 2756 |
++.BR olcSaslSecProps 's |
|
| 2757 |
++.B minssf |
|
| 2758 |
++option description. The default is 71. |
|
| 2759 |
++.TP |
|
| 2760 |
++.B olcLogFile: <filename> |
|
| 2761 |
++Specify a file for recording slapd debug messages. By default these messages |
|
| 2762 |
++only go to stderr, are not recorded anywhere else, and are unrelated to |
|
| 2763 |
++messages exposed by the |
|
| 2764 |
++.B olcLogLevel |
|
| 2765 |
++configuration parameter. Specifying a logfile copies messages to both stderr |
|
| 2766 |
++and the logfile. |
|
| 2767 |
++.TP |
|
| 2768 |
++.B olcLogFileFormat: debug | syslog-utc | syslog-localtime |
|
| 2769 |
++Specify the prefix format for messages written to the logfile. The debug |
|
| 2770 |
++format is the normal format used for slapd debug messages, with a timestamp |
|
| 2771 |
++in hexadecimal, followed by a thread ID. The other options are to |
|
| 2772 |
++use syslog(3) style prefixes, with timestamps either in UTC or in the |
|
| 2773 |
++local timezone. The default is debug format. |
|
| 2774 |
++.TP |
|
| 2775 |
++.B olcLogFileOnly: TRUE | FALSE |
|
| 2776 |
++Specify that debug messages should only go to the configured logfile, and |
|
| 2777 |
++not to stderr. |
|
| 2778 |
++.TP |
|
| 2779 |
++.B olcLogFileRotate: <max> <Mbytes> <hours> |
|
| 2780 |
++Specify automatic rotation for the configured logfile as the maximum |
|
| 2781 |
++number of old logfiles to retain, a maximum size in megabytes to allow a |
|
| 2782 |
++logfile to grow before rotation, and a maximum age in hours for a logfile |
|
| 2783 |
++to be used before rotation. The maximum number must be in the range 1-99. |
|
| 2784 |
++Setting Mbytes or hours to zero disables the size or age check, respectively. |
|
| 2785 |
++At least one of Mbytes or hours must be non-zero. By default no automatic |
|
| 2786 |
++rotation will be performed. |
|
| 2787 |
++.TP |
|
| 2788 |
++.B olcLogLevel: <integer> [...] |
|
| 2789 |
++Specify the level at which debugging statements and operation |
|
| 2790 |
++statistics should be syslogged (currently logged to the |
|
| 2791 |
++.BR syslogd (8) |
|
| 2792 |
++LOG_LOCAL4 facility). |
|
| 2793 |
++They must be considered subsystems rather than increasingly verbose |
|
| 2794 |
++log levels. |
|
| 2795 |
++Some messages with higher priority are logged regardless |
|
| 2796 |
++of the configured loglevel as soon as any logging is configured. |
|
| 2797 |
++Log levels are additive, and available levels are: |
|
| 2798 |
++.RS |
|
| 2799 |
++.RS |
|
| 2800 |
++.PD 0 |
|
| 2801 |
++.TP |
|
| 2802 |
++.B 1 |
|
| 2803 |
++.B (0x1 trace) |
|
| 2804 |
++trace function calls |
|
| 2805 |
++.TP |
|
| 2806 |
++.B 2 |
|
| 2807 |
++.B (0x2 packets) |
|
| 2808 |
++debug packet handling |
|
| 2809 |
++.TP |
|
| 2810 |
++.B 4 |
|
| 2811 |
++.B (0x4 args) |
|
| 2812 |
++heavy trace debugging (function args) |
|
| 2813 |
++.TP |
|
| 2814 |
++.B 8 |
|
| 2815 |
++.B (0x8 conns) |
|
| 2816 |
++connection management |
|
| 2817 |
++.TP |
|
| 2818 |
++.B 16 |
|
| 2819 |
++.B (0x10 BER) |
|
| 2820 |
++print out packets sent and received |
|
| 2821 |
++.TP |
|
| 2822 |
++.B 32 |
|
| 2823 |
++.B (0x20 filter) |
|
| 2824 |
++search filter processing |
|
| 2825 |
++.TP |
|
| 2826 |
++.B 64 |
|
| 2827 |
++.B (0x40 config) |
|
| 2828 |
++configuration file processing |
|
| 2829 |
++.TP |
|
| 2830 |
++.B 128 |
|
| 2831 |
++.B (0x80 ACL) |
|
| 2832 |
++access control list processing |
|
| 2833 |
++.TP |
|
| 2834 |
++.B 256 |
|
| 2835 |
++.B (0x100 stats) |
|
| 2836 |
++connections, LDAP operations, results (recommended) |
|
| 2837 |
++.TP |
|
| 2838 |
++.B 512 |
|
| 2839 |
++.B (0x200 stats2) |
|
| 2840 |
++stats2 log entries sent |
|
| 2841 |
++.TP |
|
| 2842 |
++.B 1024 |
|
| 2843 |
++.B (0x400 shell) |
|
| 2844 |
++print communication with shell backends |
|
| 2845 |
++.TP |
|
| 2846 |
++.B 2048 |
|
| 2847 |
++.B (0x800 parse) |
|
| 2848 |
++entry parsing |
|
| 2849 |
++\".TP |
|
| 2850 |
++\".B 4096 |
|
| 2851 |
++\".B (0x1000 cache) |
|
| 2852 |
++\"caching (unused) |
|
| 2853 |
++\".TP |
|
| 2854 |
++\".B 8192 |
|
| 2855 |
++\".B (0x2000 index) |
|
| 2856 |
++\"data indexing (unused) |
|
| 2857 |
++.TP |
|
| 2858 |
++.B 16384 |
|
| 2859 |
++.B (0x4000 sync) |
|
| 2860 |
++LDAPSync replication |
|
| 2861 |
++.TP |
|
| 2862 |
++.B 32768 |
|
| 2863 |
++.B (0x8000 none) |
|
| 2864 |
++only messages that get logged whatever log level is set |
|
| 2865 |
++.PD |
|
| 2866 |
++.RE |
|
| 2867 |
++The desired log level can be input as a single integer that combines |
|
| 2868 |
++the (ORed) desired levels, both in decimal or in hexadecimal notation, |
|
| 2869 |
++as a list of integers (that are ORed internally), |
|
| 2870 |
++or as a list of the names that are shown between parenthesis, such that |
|
| 2871 |
++.LP |
|
| 2872 |
++.nf |
|
| 2873 |
++ olcLogLevel: 129 |
|
| 2874 |
++ olcLogLevel: 0x81 |
|
| 2875 |
++ olcLogLevel: 128 1 |
|
| 2876 |
++ olcLogLevel: 0x80 0x1 |
|
| 2877 |
++ olcLogLevel: acl trace |
|
| 2878 |
++.fi |
|
| 2879 |
++.LP |
|
| 2880 |
++are equivalent. |
|
| 2881 |
++The keyword |
|
| 2882 |
++.B any |
|
| 2883 |
++can be used as a shortcut to enable logging at all levels (equivalent to \-1). |
|
| 2884 |
++The keyword |
|
| 2885 |
++.BR none , |
|
| 2886 |
++or the equivalent integer representation, causes those messages |
|
| 2887 |
++that are logged regardless of the configured olcLogLevel to be logged. |
|
| 2888 |
++In fact, if no olcLogLevel (or a 0 level) is defined, no logging occurs, |
|
| 2889 |
++so at least the |
|
| 2890 |
++.B none |
|
| 2891 |
++level is required to have high priority messages logged. |
|
| 2892 |
++ |
|
| 2893 |
++Note that the |
|
| 2894 |
++.BR packets , |
|
| 2895 |
++.BR BER , |
|
| 2896 |
++and |
|
| 2897 |
++.B parse |
|
| 2898 |
++levels are only available as debug output on stderr, and are not |
|
| 2899 |
++sent to syslog. |
|
| 2900 |
++ |
|
| 2901 |
++This setting defaults to \fBstats\fP. |
|
| 2902 |
++This level should usually also be included when using other loglevels, to |
|
| 2903 |
++help analyze the logs. |
|
| 2904 |
++.RE |
|
| 2905 |
++.TP |
|
| 2906 |
++.B olcMaxFilterDepth: <integer> |
|
| 2907 |
++Specify the maximum depth of nested filters in search requests. |
|
| 2908 |
++The default is 1000. |
|
| 2909 |
++.TP |
|
| 2910 |
++.B olcPasswordCryptSaltFormat: <format> |
|
| 2911 |
++Specify the format of the salt passed to |
|
| 2912 |
++.BR crypt (3) |
|
| 2913 |
++when generating {CRYPT} passwords (see
|
|
| 2914 |
++.BR olcPasswordHash ) |
|
| 2915 |
++during processing of LDAP Password Modify Extended Operations (RFC 3062). |
|
| 2916 |
++ |
|
| 2917 |
++This string needs to be in |
|
| 2918 |
++.BR sprintf (3) |
|
| 2919 |
++format and may include one (and only one) %s conversion. |
|
| 2920 |
++This conversion will be substituted with a string of random |
|
| 2921 |
++characters from [A\-Za\-z0\-9./]. For example, "%.2s" |
|
| 2922 |
++provides a two character salt and "$1$%.8s" tells some |
|
| 2923 |
++versions of crypt(3) to use an MD5 algorithm and provides |
|
| 2924 |
++8 random characters of salt. The default is "%s", which |
|
| 2925 |
++provides 31 characters of salt. |
|
| 2926 |
++.TP |
|
| 2927 |
++.B olcPidFile: <filename> |
|
| 2928 |
++The (absolute) name of a file that will hold the |
|
| 2929 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 2930 |
++server's process ID (see |
|
| 2931 |
++.BR getpid (2)). |
|
| 2932 |
++.TP |
|
| 2933 |
++.B olcPluginLogFile: <filename> |
|
| 2934 |
++The ( absolute ) name of a file that will contain log |
|
| 2935 |
++messages from |
|
| 2936 |
++.B SLAPI |
|
| 2937 |
++plugins. See |
|
| 2938 |
++.BR slapd.plugin (5) |
|
| 2939 |
++for details. |
|
| 2940 |
++.TP |
|
| 2941 |
++.B olcReferral: <url> |
|
| 2942 |
++Specify the referral to pass back when |
|
| 2943 |
++.BR slapd (8) |
|
| 2944 |
++cannot find a local database to handle a request. |
|
| 2945 |
++If multiple values are specified, each url is provided. |
|
| 2946 |
++.TP |
|
| 2947 |
++.B olcReverseLookup: TRUE | FALSE |
|
| 2948 |
++Enable/disable client name unverified reverse lookup (default is |
|
| 2949 |
++.BR FALSE |
|
| 2950 |
++if compiled with \-\-enable\-rlookups). |
|
| 2951 |
++.TP |
|
| 2952 |
++.B olcRootDSE: <file> |
|
| 2953 |
++Specify the name of an LDIF(5) file containing user defined attributes |
|
| 2954 |
++for the root DSE. These attributes are returned in addition to the |
|
| 2955 |
++attributes normally produced by slapd. |
|
| 2956 |
++ |
|
| 2957 |
++The root DSE is an entry with information about the server and its |
|
| 2958 |
++capabilities, in operational attributes. |
|
| 2959 |
++It has the empty DN, and can be read with e.g.: |
|
| 2960 |
++.ti +4 |
|
| 2961 |
++ldapsearch \-x \-b "" \-s base "+" |
|
| 2962 |
++.br |
|
| 2963 |
++See RFC 4512 section 5.1 for details. |
|
| 2964 |
++.TP |
|
| 2965 |
++.B olcSaslAuxprops: <plugin> [...] |
|
| 2966 |
++Specify which auxprop plugins to use for authentication lookups. The |
|
| 2967 |
++default is empty, which just uses slapd's internal support. Usually |
|
| 2968 |
++no other auxprop plugins are needed. |
|
| 2969 |
++.TP |
|
| 2970 |
++.B olcSaslAuxpropsDontUseCopy: <attr> [...] |
|
| 2971 |
++Specify which attribute(s) should be subject to the don't use copy control. This |
|
| 2972 |
++is necessary for some SASL mechanisms such as OTP to work in a replicated |
|
| 2973 |
++environment. The attribute "cmusaslsecretOTP" is the default value. |
|
| 2974 |
++.TP |
|
| 2975 |
++.B olcSaslAuxpropsDontUseCopyIgnore TRUE | FALSE |
|
| 2976 |
++Used to disable replication of the attribute(s) defined by |
|
| 2977 |
++olcSaslAuxpropsDontUseCopy and instead use a local value for the attribute. This |
|
| 2978 |
++allows the SASL mechanism to continue to work if the provider is offline. This can |
|
| 2979 |
++cause replication inconsistency. Defaults to FALSE. |
|
| 2980 |
++.TP |
|
| 2981 |
++.B olcSaslHost: <fqdn> |
|
| 2982 |
++Used to specify the fully qualified domain name used for SASL processing. |
|
| 2983 |
++.TP |
|
| 2984 |
++.B olcSaslRealm: <realm> |
|
| 2985 |
++Specify SASL realm. Default is empty. |
|
| 2986 |
++.TP |
|
| 2987 |
++.B olcSaslCbinding: none | tls-unique | tls-endpoint |
|
| 2988 |
++Specify the channel-binding type, see also LDAP_OPT_X_SASL_CBINDING. |
|
| 2989 |
++Default is none. |
|
| 2990 |
++.TP |
|
| 2991 |
++.B olcSaslSecProps: <properties> |
|
| 2992 |
++Used to specify Cyrus SASL security properties. |
|
| 2993 |
++The |
|
| 2994 |
++.B none |
|
| 2995 |
++flag (without any other properties) causes the flag properties |
|
| 2996 |
++default, "noanonymous,noplain", to be cleared. |
|
| 2997 |
++The |
|
| 2998 |
++.B noplain |
|
| 2999 |
++flag disables mechanisms susceptible to simple passive attacks. |
|
| 3000 |
++The |
|
| 3001 |
++.B noactive |
|
| 3002 |
++flag disables mechanisms susceptible to active attacks. |
|
| 3003 |
++The |
|
| 3004 |
++.B nodict |
|
| 3005 |
++flag disables mechanisms susceptible to passive dictionary attacks. |
|
| 3006 |
++The |
|
| 3007 |
++.B noanonymous |
|
| 3008 |
++flag disables mechanisms which support anonymous login. |
|
| 3009 |
++The |
|
| 3010 |
++.B forwardsec |
|
| 3011 |
++flag require forward secrecy between sessions. |
|
| 3012 |
++The |
|
| 3013 |
++.B passcred |
|
| 3014 |
++require mechanisms which pass client credentials (and allow |
|
| 3015 |
++mechanisms which can pass credentials to do so). |
|
| 3016 |
++The |
|
| 3017 |
++.B minssf=<factor> |
|
| 3018 |
++property specifies the minimum acceptable |
|
| 3019 |
++.I security strength factor |
|
| 3020 |
++as an integer approximate to effective key length used for |
|
| 3021 |
++encryption. 0 (zero) implies no protection, 1 implies integrity |
|
| 3022 |
++protection only, 128 allows RC4, Blowfish and other similar ciphers, |
|
| 3023 |
++256 will require modern ciphers. The default is 0. |
|
| 3024 |
++The |
|
| 3025 |
++.B maxssf=<factor> |
|
| 3026 |
++property specifies the maximum acceptable |
|
| 3027 |
++.I security strength factor |
|
| 3028 |
++as an integer (see minssf description). The default is INT_MAX. |
|
| 3029 |
++The |
|
| 3030 |
++.B maxbufsize=<size> |
|
| 3031 |
++property specifies the maximum security layer receive buffer |
|
| 3032 |
++size allowed. 0 disables security layers. The default is 65536. |
|
| 3033 |
++.TP |
|
| 3034 |
++.B olcServerID: <integer> [<URL>] |
|
| 3035 |
++Specify an integer ID from 0 to 4095 for this server. The ID may also be |
|
| 3036 |
++specified as a hexadecimal ID by prefixing the value with "0x". |
|
| 3037 |
++Non-zero IDs are required when using multi-provider replication and each |
|
| 3038 |
++provider must have a unique non-zero ID. Note that this requirement also |
|
| 3039 |
++applies to separate providers contributing to a glued set of databases. |
|
| 3040 |
++If the URL is provided, this directive may be specified |
|
| 3041 |
++multiple times, providing a complete list of participating servers |
|
| 3042 |
++and their IDs. The fully qualified hostname of each server should be |
|
| 3043 |
++used in the supplied URLs. The IDs are used in the "replica id" field |
|
| 3044 |
++of all CSNs generated by the specified server. The default value is zero, which |
|
| 3045 |
++is only valid for single provider replication. |
|
| 3046 |
++Example: |
|
| 3047 |
++.LP |
|
| 3048 |
++.nf |
|
| 3049 |
++ olcServerID: 1 ldap://ldap1.example.com |
|
| 3050 |
++ olcServerID: 2 ldap://ldap2.example.com |
|
| 3051 |
++.fi |
|
| 3052 |
++.TP |
|
| 3053 |
++.B olcSockbufMaxIncoming: <integer> |
|
| 3054 |
++Specify the maximum incoming LDAP PDU size for anonymous sessions. |
|
| 3055 |
++The default is 262143. |
|
| 3056 |
++.TP |
|
| 3057 |
++.B olcSockbufMaxIncomingAuth: <integer> |
|
| 3058 |
++Specify the maximum incoming LDAP PDU size for authenticated sessions. |
|
| 3059 |
++The default is 4194303. |
|
| 3060 |
++.TP |
|
| 3061 |
++.B olcTCPBuffer [listener=<URL>] [{read|write}=]<size>
|
|
| 3062 |
++Specify the size of the TCP buffer. |
|
| 3063 |
++A global value for both read and write TCP buffers related to any listener |
|
| 3064 |
++is defined, unless the listener is explicitly specified, |
|
| 3065 |
++or either the read or write qualifiers are used. |
|
| 3066 |
++See |
|
| 3067 |
++.BR tcp (7) |
|
| 3068 |
++for details. |
|
| 3069 |
++Note that some OS-es implement automatic TCP buffer tuning. |
|
| 3070 |
++.TP |
|
| 3071 |
++.B olcThreads: <integer> |
|
| 3072 |
++Specify the maximum size of the primary thread pool. |
|
| 3073 |
++The default is 16; the minimum value is 2. |
|
| 3074 |
++.TP |
|
| 3075 |
++.B olcThreadQueues: <integer> |
|
| 3076 |
++Specify the number of work queues to use for the primary thread pool. |
|
| 3077 |
++The default is 1 and this is typically adequate for up to 8 CPU cores. |
|
| 3078 |
++The value should not exceed the number of CPUs in the system. |
|
| 3079 |
++.TP |
|
| 3080 |
++.B olcToolThreads: <integer> |
|
| 3081 |
++Specify the maximum number of threads to use in tool mode. |
|
| 3082 |
++This should not be greater than the number of CPUs in the system. |
|
| 3083 |
++The default is 1. |
|
| 3084 |
++.TP |
|
| 3085 |
++.B olcWriteTimeout: <integer> |
|
| 3086 |
++Specify the number of seconds to wait before forcibly closing |
|
| 3087 |
++a connection with an outstanding write. This allows recovery from |
|
| 3088 |
++various network hang conditions. A setting of 0 disables this |
|
| 3089 |
++feature. The default is 0. |
|
| 3090 |
++.SH TLS OPTIONS |
|
| 3091 |
++If |
|
| 3092 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 3093 |
++is built with support for Transport Layer Security, there are more options |
|
| 3094 |
++you can specify. |
|
| 3095 |
++.TP |
|
| 3096 |
++.B olcTLSCipherSuite: <cipher-suite-spec> |
|
| 3097 |
++Permits configuring what ciphers will be accepted and the preference order. |
|
| 3098 |
++<cipher-suite-spec> should be a cipher specification for the TLS library |
|
| 3099 |
++in use (OpenSSL or GnuTLS). |
|
| 3100 |
++Example: |
|
| 3101 |
++.RS |
|
| 3102 |
++.RS |
|
| 3103 |
++.TP |
|
| 3104 |
++.I OpenSSL: |
|
| 3105 |
++olcTLSCipherSuite: HIGH:MEDIUM:+SSLv2 |
|
| 3106 |
++.TP |
|
| 3107 |
++.I GnuTLS: |
|
| 3108 |
++olcTLSCiphersuite: SECURE256:!AES-128-CBC |
|
| 3109 |
++.RE |
|
| 3110 |
++ |
|
| 3111 |
++To check what ciphers a given spec selects in OpenSSL, use: |
|
| 3112 |
++ |
|
| 3113 |
++.nf |
|
| 3114 |
++ openssl ciphers \-v <cipher-suite-spec> |
|
| 3115 |
++.fi |
|
| 3116 |
++ |
|
| 3117 |
++With GnuTLS the available specs can be found in the manual page of |
|
| 3118 |
++.BR gnutls\-cli (1) |
|
| 3119 |
++(see the description of the |
|
| 3120 |
++option |
|
| 3121 |
++.BR \-\-priority ). |
|
| 3122 |
++ |
|
| 3123 |
++In older versions of GnuTLS, where gnutls\-cli does not support the option |
|
| 3124 |
++\-\-priority, you can obtain the \(em more limited \(em list of ciphers by calling: |
|
| 3125 |
++ |
|
| 3126 |
++.nf |
|
| 3127 |
++ gnutls\-cli \-l |
|
| 3128 |
++.fi |
|
| 3129 |
++.RE |
|
| 3130 |
++.TP |
|
| 3131 |
++.B olcTLSCACertificateFile: <filename> |
|
| 3132 |
++Specifies the file that contains certificates for all of the Certificate |
|
| 3133 |
++Authorities that |
|
| 3134 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 3135 |
++will recognize. The certificate for |
|
| 3136 |
++the CA that signed the server certificate must be included among |
|
| 3137 |
++these certificates. If the signing CA was not a top-level (root) CA, |
|
| 3138 |
++certificates for the entire sequence of CA's from the signing CA to |
|
| 3139 |
++the top-level CA should be present. Multiple certificates are simply |
|
| 3140 |
++appended to the file; the order is not significant. |
|
| 3141 |
++.TP |
|
| 3142 |
++.B olcTLSCACertificatePath: <path> |
|
| 3143 |
++Specifies the path of directories that contain Certificate Authority |
|
| 3144 |
++certificates in separate individual files. Usually only one of this |
|
| 3145 |
++or the olcTLSCACertificateFile is defined. If both are specified, both |
|
| 3146 |
++locations will be used. Multiple directories may be specified, |
|
| 3147 |
++separated by a semi-colon. |
|
| 3148 |
++.TP |
|
| 3149 |
++.B olcTLSCertificateFile: <filename> |
|
| 3150 |
++Specifies the file that contains the |
|
| 3151 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 3152 |
++server certificate. |
|
| 3153 |
++ |
|
| 3154 |
++When using OpenSSL that file may also contain any number of intermediate |
|
| 3155 |
++certificates after the server certificate. |
|
| 3156 |
++.TP |
|
| 3157 |
++.B olcTLSCertificateKeyFile: <filename> |
|
| 3158 |
++Specifies the file that contains the |
|
| 3159 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 3160 |
++server private key that matches the certificate stored in the |
|
| 3161 |
++.B olcTLSCertificateFile |
|
| 3162 |
++file. If the private key is protected with a password, the password must |
|
| 3163 |
++be manually typed in when slapd starts. Usually the private key is not |
|
| 3164 |
++protected with a password, to allow slapd to start without manual |
|
| 3165 |
++intervention, so |
|
| 3166 |
++it is of critical importance that the file is protected carefully. |
|
| 3167 |
++.TP |
|
| 3168 |
++.B olcTLSDHParamFile: <filename> |
|
| 3169 |
++This directive specifies the file that contains parameters for Diffie-Hellman |
|
| 3170 |
++ephemeral key exchange. This is required in order to use a DSA certificate on |
|
| 3171 |
++the server, or an RSA certificate missing the "key encipherment" key usage. |
|
| 3172 |
++Note that setting this option may also enable |
|
| 3173 |
++Anonymous Diffie-Hellman key exchanges in certain non-default cipher suites. |
|
| 3174 |
++Anonymous key exchanges should generally be avoided since they provide no |
|
| 3175 |
++actual client or server authentication and provide no protection against |
|
| 3176 |
++man-in-the-middle attacks. |
|
| 3177 |
++You should append "!ADH" to your cipher suites to ensure that these suites |
|
| 3178 |
++are not used. |
|
| 3179 |
++.TP |
|
| 3180 |
++.B olcTLSECName: <name> |
|
| 3181 |
++Specify the name of the curve(s) to use for Elliptic curve Diffie-Hellman |
|
| 3182 |
++ephemeral key exchange. This option is only used for OpenSSL. |
|
| 3183 |
++This option is not used with GnuTLS; the curves may be |
|
| 3184 |
++chosen in the GnuTLS ciphersuite specification. |
|
| 3185 |
++.TP |
|
| 3186 |
++.B olcTLSProtocolMin: <major>[.<minor>] |
|
| 3187 |
++Specifies minimum SSL/TLS protocol version that will be negotiated. |
|
| 3188 |
++If the server doesn't support at least that version, |
|
| 3189 |
++the SSL handshake will fail. |
|
| 3190 |
++To require TLS 1.x or higher, set this option to 3.(x+1), |
|
| 3191 |
++e.g., |
|
| 3192 |
++ |
|
| 3193 |
++.nf |
|
| 3194 |
++ olcTLSProtocolMin: 3.2 |
|
| 3195 |
++.fi |
|
| 3196 |
++ |
|
| 3197 |
++would require TLS 1.1. |
|
| 3198 |
++Specifying a minimum that is higher than that supported by the |
|
| 3199 |
++OpenLDAP implementation will result in it requiring the |
|
| 3200 |
++highest level that it does support. |
|
| 3201 |
++This directive is ignored with GnuTLS. |
|
| 3202 |
++.TP |
|
| 3203 |
++.B olcTLSRandFile: <filename> |
|
| 3204 |
++Specifies the file to obtain random bits from when /dev/[u]random |
|
| 3205 |
++is not available. Generally set to the name of the EGD/PRNGD socket. |
|
| 3206 |
++The environment variable RANDFILE can also be used to specify the filename. |
|
| 3207 |
++This directive is ignored with GnuTLS. |
|
| 3208 |
++.TP |
|
| 3209 |
++.B olcTLSVerifyClient: <level> |
|
| 3210 |
++Specifies what checks to perform on client certificates in an |
|
| 3211 |
++incoming TLS session, if any. |
|
| 3212 |
++The |
|
| 3213 |
++.B <level> |
|
| 3214 |
++can be specified as one of the following keywords: |
|
| 3215 |
++.RS |
|
| 3216 |
++.TP |
|
| 3217 |
++.B never |
|
| 3218 |
++This is the default. |
|
| 3219 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 3220 |
++will not ask the client for a certificate. |
|
| 3221 |
++.TP |
|
| 3222 |
++.B allow |
|
| 3223 |
++The client certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, |
|
| 3224 |
++the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, |
|
| 3225 |
++it will be ignored and the session proceeds normally. |
|
| 3226 |
++.TP |
|
| 3227 |
++.B try |
|
| 3228 |
++The client certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, |
|
| 3229 |
++the session proceeds normally. If a bad certificate is provided, |
|
| 3230 |
++the session is immediately terminated. |
|
| 3231 |
++.TP |
|
| 3232 |
++.B demand | hard | true |
|
| 3233 |
++These keywords are all equivalent, for compatibility reasons. |
|
| 3234 |
++The client certificate is requested. If no certificate is provided, |
|
| 3235 |
++or a bad certificate is provided, the session is immediately terminated. |
|
| 3236 |
++ |
|
| 3237 |
++Note that a valid client certificate is required in order to use the |
|
| 3238 |
++SASL EXTERNAL authentication mechanism with a TLS session. As such, |
|
| 3239 |
++a non-default |
|
| 3240 |
++.B olcTLSVerifyClient |
|
| 3241 |
++setting must be chosen to enable SASL EXTERNAL authentication. |
|
| 3242 |
++.RE |
|
| 3243 |
++.TP |
|
| 3244 |
++.B olcTLSCRLCheck: <level> |
|
| 3245 |
++Specifies if the Certificate Revocation List (CRL) of the CA should be |
|
| 3246 |
++used to verify if the client certificates have not been revoked. This |
|
| 3247 |
++requires |
|
| 3248 |
++.B olcTLSCACertificatePath |
|
| 3249 |
++parameter to be set. This parameter is ignored with GnuTLS. |
|
| 3250 |
++.B <level> |
|
| 3251 |
++can be specified as one of the following keywords: |
|
| 3252 |
++.RS |
|
| 3253 |
++.TP |
|
| 3254 |
++.B none |
|
| 3255 |
++No CRL checks are performed |
|
| 3256 |
++.TP |
|
| 3257 |
++.B peer |
|
| 3258 |
++Check the CRL of the peer certificate |
|
| 3259 |
++.TP |
|
| 3260 |
++.B all |
|
| 3261 |
++Check the CRL for a whole certificate chain |
|
| 3262 |
++.RE |
|
| 3263 |
++.TP |
|
| 3264 |
++.B olcTLSCRLFile: <filename> |
|
| 3265 |
++Specifies a file containing a Certificate Revocation List to be used |
|
| 3266 |
++for verifying that certificates have not been revoked. This parameter is |
|
| 3267 |
++only valid when using GnuTLS. |
|
| 3268 |
++.SH DYNAMIC MODULE OPTIONS |
|
| 3269 |
++If |
|
| 3270 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 3271 |
++is compiled with \-\-enable\-modules then the module-related entries will |
|
| 3272 |
++be available. These entries are named |
|
| 3273 |
++.B cn=module{x},cn=config
|
|
| 3274 |
++and |
|
| 3275 |
++must have the olcModuleList objectClass. One entry should be created |
|
| 3276 |
++per |
|
| 3277 |
++.B olcModulePath. |
|
| 3278 |
++Normally the config engine generates the "{x}" index in the RDN
|
|
| 3279 |
++automatically, so it can be omitted when initially loading these entries. |
|
| 3280 |
++.TP |
|
| 3281 |
++.B olcModuleLoad: <filename> [<arguments>...] |
|
| 3282 |
++Specify the name of a dynamically loadable module to load and any |
|
| 3283 |
++additional arguments if supported by the module. The filename |
|
| 3284 |
++may be an absolute path name or a simple filename. Non-absolute names |
|
| 3285 |
++are searched for in the directories specified by the |
|
| 3286 |
++.B olcModulePath |
|
| 3287 |
++option. |
|
| 3288 |
++.TP |
|
| 3289 |
++.B olcModulePath: <pathspec> |
|
| 3290 |
++Specify a list of directories to search for loadable modules. Typically |
|
| 3291 |
++the path is colon-separated but this depends on the operating system. |
|
| 3292 |
++The default is MODULEDIR, which is where the standard OpenLDAP install |
|
| 3293 |
++will place its modules. |
|
| 3294 |
++.SH SCHEMA OPTIONS |
|
| 3295 |
++Schema definitions are created as entries in the |
|
| 3296 |
++.B cn=schema,cn=config |
|
| 3297 |
++subtree. These entries must have the olcSchemaConfig objectClass. |
|
| 3298 |
++As noted above, the actual |
|
| 3299 |
++.B cn=schema,cn=config |
|
| 3300 |
++entry is predefined and any values specified for it are ignored. |
|
| 3301 |
++ |
|
| 3302 |
++.HP |
|
| 3303 |
++.hy 0 |
|
| 3304 |
++.B olcAttributetypes: "(\ <oid>\ |
|
| 3305 |
++ [NAME\ <name>]\ |
|
| 3306 |
++ [DESC\ <description>]\ |
|
| 3307 |
++ [OBSOLETE]\ |
|
| 3308 |
++ [SUP\ <oid>]\ |
|
| 3309 |
++ [EQUALITY\ <oid>]\ |
|
| 3310 |
++ [ORDERING\ <oid>]\ |
|
| 3311 |
++ [SUBSTR\ <oid>]\ |
|
| 3312 |
++ [SYNTAX\ <oidlen>]\ |
|
| 3313 |
++ [SINGLE\-VALUE]\ |
|
| 3314 |
++ [COLLECTIVE]\ |
|
| 3315 |
++ [NO\-USER\-MODIFICATION]\ |
|
| 3316 |
++ [USAGE\ <attributeUsage>]\ )" |
|
| 3317 |
++.RS |
|
| 3318 |
++Specify an attribute type using the LDAPv3 syntax defined in RFC 4512. |
|
| 3319 |
++The slapd parser extends the RFC 4512 definition by allowing string |
|
| 3320 |
++forms as well as numeric OIDs to be used for the attribute OID and |
|
| 3321 |
++attribute syntax OID. |
|
| 3322 |
++(See the |
|
| 3323 |
++.B olcObjectIdentifier |
|
| 3324 |
++description.) |
|
| 3325 |
++.RE |
|
| 3326 |
++ |
|
| 3327 |
++.HP |
|
| 3328 |
++.hy 0 |
|
| 3329 |
++.B olcDitContentRules: "(\ <oid>\ |
|
| 3330 |
++ [NAME\ <name>]\ |
|
| 3331 |
++ [DESC\ <description>]\ |
|
| 3332 |
++ [OBSOLETE]\ |
|
| 3333 |
++ [AUX\ <oids>]\ |
|
| 3334 |
++ [MUST\ <oids>]\ |
|
| 3335 |
++ [MAY\ <oids>]\ |
|
| 3336 |
++ [NOT\ <oids>]\ )" |
|
| 3337 |
++.RS |
|
| 3338 |
++Specify an DIT Content Rule using the LDAPv3 syntax defined in RFC 4512. |
|
| 3339 |
++The slapd parser extends the RFC 4512 definition by allowing string |
|
| 3340 |
++forms as well as numeric OIDs to be used for the attribute OID and |
|
| 3341 |
++attribute syntax OID. |
|
| 3342 |
++(See the |
|
| 3343 |
++.B olcObjectIdentifier |
|
| 3344 |
++description.) |
|
| 3345 |
++.RE |
|
| 3346 |
++ |
|
| 3347 |
++.HP |
|
| 3348 |
++.hy 0 |
|
| 3349 |
++.B olcLdapSyntaxes "(\ <oid>\ |
|
| 3350 |
++ [DESC\ <description>]\ |
|
| 3351 |
++ [X\-SUBST <substitute-syntax>]\ )" |
|
| 3352 |
++.RS |
|
| 3353 |
++Specify an LDAP syntax using the LDAPv3 syntax defined in RFC 4512. |
|
| 3354 |
++The slapd parser extends the RFC 4512 definition by allowing string |
|
| 3355 |
++forms as well as numeric OIDs to be used for the syntax OID. |
|
| 3356 |
++(See the |
|
| 3357 |
++.B objectidentifier |
|
| 3358 |
++description.) |
|
| 3359 |
++The slapd parser also honors the |
|
| 3360 |
++.B X\-SUBST |
|
| 3361 |
++extension (an OpenLDAP-specific extension), which allows one to use the |
|
| 3362 |
++.B olcLdapSyntaxes |
|
| 3363 |
++attribute to define a non-implemented syntax along with another syntax, |
|
| 3364 |
++the extension value |
|
| 3365 |
++.IR substitute-syntax , |
|
| 3366 |
++as its temporary replacement. |
|
| 3367 |
++The |
|
| 3368 |
++.I substitute-syntax |
|
| 3369 |
++must be defined. |
|
| 3370 |
++This allows one to define attribute types that make use of non-implemented syntaxes |
|
| 3371 |
++using the correct syntax OID. |
|
| 3372 |
++Unless |
|
| 3373 |
++.B X\-SUBST |
|
| 3374 |
++is used, this configuration statement would result in an error, |
|
| 3375 |
++since no handlers would be associated to the resulting syntax structure. |
|
| 3376 |
++.RE |
|
| 3377 |
++ |
|
| 3378 |
++.HP |
|
| 3379 |
++.hy 0 |
|
| 3380 |
++.B olcObjectClasses: "(\ <oid>\ |
|
| 3381 |
++ [NAME\ <name>]\ |
|
| 3382 |
++ [DESC\ <description>]\ |
|
| 3383 |
++ [OBSOLETE]\ |
|
| 3384 |
++ [SUP\ <oids>]\ |
|
| 3385 |
++ [{ ABSTRACT | STRUCTURAL | AUXILIARY }]\
|
|
| 3386 |
++ [MUST\ <oids>] [MAY\ <oids>] )" |
|
| 3387 |
++.RS |
|
| 3388 |
++Specify an objectclass using the LDAPv3 syntax defined in RFC 4512. |
|
| 3389 |
++The slapd parser extends the RFC 4512 definition by allowing string |
|
| 3390 |
++forms as well as numeric OIDs to be used for the object class OID. |
|
| 3391 |
++(See the |
|
| 3392 |
++.B |
|
| 3393 |
++olcObjectIdentifier |
|
| 3394 |
++description.) Object classes are "STRUCTURAL" by default. |
|
| 3395 |
++.RE |
|
| 3396 |
++.TP |
|
| 3397 |
++.B olcObjectIdentifier: <name> "{ <oid> | <name>[:<suffix>] }"
|
|
| 3398 |
++Define a string name that equates to the given OID. The string can be used |
|
| 3399 |
++in place of the numeric OID in objectclass and attribute definitions. The |
|
| 3400 |
++name can also be used with a suffix of the form ":xx" in which case the |
|
| 3401 |
++value "oid.xx" will be used. |
|
| 3402 |
++ |
|
| 3403 |
++.SH GENERAL BACKEND OPTIONS |
|
| 3404 |
++Options in these entries only apply to the configuration of a single |
|
| 3405 |
++type of backend. All backends may support this class of options, but |
|
| 3406 |
++currently only back-mdb does. |
|
| 3407 |
++The entry must be named |
|
| 3408 |
++.B olcBackend=<databasetype>,cn=config |
|
| 3409 |
++and must have the olcBackendConfig objectClass. |
|
| 3410 |
++<databasetype> |
|
| 3411 |
++should be one of |
|
| 3412 |
++.BR asyncmeta , |
|
| 3413 |
++.BR config , |
|
| 3414 |
++.BR dnssrv , |
|
| 3415 |
++.BR ldap , |
|
| 3416 |
++.BR ldif , |
|
| 3417 |
++.BR mdb , |
|
| 3418 |
++.BR meta , |
|
| 3419 |
++.BR monitor , |
|
| 3420 |
++.BR null , |
|
| 3421 |
++.BR passwd , |
|
| 3422 |
++.BR perl , |
|
| 3423 |
++.BR relay , |
|
| 3424 |
++.BR sock , |
|
| 3425 |
++.BR sql , |
|
| 3426 |
++or |
|
| 3427 |
++.BR wt . |
|
| 3428 |
++At present, only back-mdb implements any options of this type, so this |
|
| 3429 |
++entry should not be used for any other backends. |
|
| 3430 |
++ |
|
| 3431 |
++.SH DATABASE OPTIONS |
|
| 3432 |
++Database options are set in entries named |
|
| 3433 |
++.B olcDatabase={x}<databasetype>,cn=config
|
|
| 3434 |
++and must have the olcDatabaseConfig objectClass. Normally the config |
|
| 3435 |
++engine generates the "{x}" index in the RDN automatically, so it
|
|
| 3436 |
++can be omitted when initially loading these entries. |
|
| 3437 |
++ |
|
| 3438 |
++The special frontend database is always numbered "{\-1}" and the config
|
|
| 3439 |
++database is always numbered "{0}".
|
|
| 3440 |
++ |
|
| 3441 |
++.SH GLOBAL DATABASE OPTIONS |
|
| 3442 |
++Options in this section may be set in the special "frontend" database |
|
| 3443 |
++and inherited in all the other databases. These options may be altered |
|
| 3444 |
++by further settings in each specific database. The frontend entry must |
|
| 3445 |
++be named |
|
| 3446 |
++.B olcDatabase=frontend,cn=config |
|
| 3447 |
++and must have the olcFrontendConfig objectClass. |
|
| 3448 |
++.TP |
|
| 3449 |
++.B olcAccess: to <what> "[ by <who> <access> <control> ]+" |
|
| 3450 |
++Grant access (specified by <access>) to a set of entries and/or |
|
| 3451 |
++attributes (specified by <what>) by one or more requestors (specified |
|
| 3452 |
++by <who>). |
|
| 3453 |
++If no access controls are present, the default policy |
|
| 3454 |
++allows anyone and everyone to read anything but restricts |
|
| 3455 |
++updates to rootdn. (e.g., "olcAccess: to * by * read"). |
|
| 3456 |
++See |
|
| 3457 |
++.BR slapd.access (5) |
|
| 3458 |
++and the "OpenLDAP Administrator's Guide" for details. |
|
| 3459 |
++ |
|
| 3460 |
++Access controls set in the frontend are appended to any access |
|
| 3461 |
++controls set on the specific databases. |
|
| 3462 |
++The rootdn of a database can always read and write EVERYTHING |
|
| 3463 |
++in that database. |
|
| 3464 |
++ |
|
| 3465 |
++Extra special care must be taken with the access controls on the |
|
| 3466 |
++config database. Unlike other databases, the default policy for the |
|
| 3467 |
++config database is to only allow access to the rootdn. Regular users |
|
| 3468 |
++should not have read access, and write access should be granted very |
|
| 3469 |
++carefully to privileged administrators. |
|
| 3470 |
++ |
|
| 3471 |
++.TP |
|
| 3472 |
++.B olcDefaultSearchBase: <dn> |
|
| 3473 |
++Specify a default search base to use when client submits a |
|
| 3474 |
++non-base search request with an empty base DN. |
|
| 3475 |
++Base scoped search requests with an empty base DN are not affected. |
|
| 3476 |
++This setting is only allowed in the frontend entry. |
|
| 3477 |
++.TP |
|
| 3478 |
++.B olcExtraAttrs: <attr> |
|
| 3479 |
++Lists what attributes need to be added to search requests. |
|
| 3480 |
++Local storage backends return the entire entry to the frontend. |
|
| 3481 |
++The frontend takes care of only returning the requested attributes |
|
| 3482 |
++that are allowed by ACLs. |
|
| 3483 |
++However, features like access checking and so may need specific |
|
| 3484 |
++attributes that are not automatically returned by remote storage |
|
| 3485 |
++backends, like proxy backends and so on. |
|
| 3486 |
++.B <attr> |
|
| 3487 |
++is an attribute that is needed for internal purposes |
|
| 3488 |
++and thus always needs to be collected, even when not explicitly |
|
| 3489 |
++requested by clients. |
|
| 3490 |
++This attribute is multi-valued. |
|
| 3491 |
++.TP |
|
| 3492 |
++.B olcPasswordHash: <hash> [<hash>...] |
|
| 3493 |
++This option configures one or more hashes to be used in generation of user |
|
| 3494 |
++passwords stored in the userPassword attribute during processing of |
|
| 3495 |
++LDAP Password Modify Extended Operations (RFC 3062). |
|
| 3496 |
++The <hash> must be one of |
|
| 3497 |
++.BR {SSHA} ,
|
|
| 3498 |
++.BR {SHA} ,
|
|
| 3499 |
++.BR {SMD5} ,
|
|
| 3500 |
++.BR {MD5} ,
|
|
| 3501 |
++.BR {CRYPT} ,
|
|
| 3502 |
++and |
|
| 3503 |
++.BR {CLEARTEXT} .
|
|
| 3504 |
++The default is |
|
| 3505 |
++.BR {SSHA} .
|
|
| 3506 |
++ |
|
| 3507 |
++.B {SHA}
|
|
| 3508 |
++and |
|
| 3509 |
++.B {SSHA}
|
|
| 3510 |
++use the SHA-1 algorithm (FIPS 160-1), the latter with a seed. |
|
| 3511 |
++ |
|
| 3512 |
++.B {MD5}
|
|
| 3513 |
++and |
|
| 3514 |
++.B {SMD5}
|
|
| 3515 |
++use the MD5 algorithm (RFC 1321), the latter with a seed. |
|
| 3516 |
++ |
|
| 3517 |
++.B {CRYPT}
|
|
| 3518 |
++uses the |
|
| 3519 |
++.BR crypt (3). |
|
| 3520 |
++ |
|
| 3521 |
++.B {CLEARTEXT}
|
|
| 3522 |
++indicates that the new password should be |
|
| 3523 |
++added to userPassword as clear text. |
|
| 3524 |
++ |
|
| 3525 |
++Note that this option does not alter the normal user applications |
|
| 3526 |
++handling of userPassword during LDAP Add, Modify, or other LDAP operations. |
|
| 3527 |
++This setting is only allowed in the frontend entry. |
|
| 3528 |
++.TP |
|
| 3529 |
++.B olcReadOnly: TRUE | FALSE |
|
| 3530 |
++This option puts the database into "read-only" mode. Any attempts to |
|
| 3531 |
++modify the database will return an "unwilling to perform" error. By |
|
| 3532 |
++default, olcReadOnly is FALSE. Note that when this option is set |
|
| 3533 |
++TRUE on the frontend, it cannot be reset without restarting the |
|
| 3534 |
++server, since further writes to the config database will be rejected. |
|
| 3535 |
++.TP |
|
| 3536 |
++.B olcRequires: <conditions> |
|
| 3537 |
++Specify a set of conditions to require (default none). |
|
| 3538 |
++The directive may be specified globally and/or per-database; |
|
| 3539 |
++databases inherit global conditions, so per-database specifications |
|
| 3540 |
++are additive. |
|
| 3541 |
++.B bind |
|
| 3542 |
++requires bind operation prior to directory operations. |
|
| 3543 |
++.B LDAPv3 |
|
| 3544 |
++requires session to be using LDAP version 3. |
|
| 3545 |
++.B authc |
|
| 3546 |
++requires authentication prior to directory operations. |
|
| 3547 |
++.B SASL |
|
| 3548 |
++requires SASL authentication prior to directory operations. |
|
| 3549 |
++.B strong |
|
| 3550 |
++requires strong authentication prior to directory operations. |
|
| 3551 |
++The strong keyword allows protected "simple" authentication |
|
| 3552 |
++as well as SASL authentication. |
|
| 3553 |
++.B none |
|
| 3554 |
++may be used to require no conditions (useful to clear out globally |
|
| 3555 |
++set conditions within a particular database); it must occur first |
|
| 3556 |
++in the list of conditions. |
|
| 3557 |
++.TP |
|
| 3558 |
++.B olcRestrict: <oplist> |
|
| 3559 |
++Specify a list of operations that are restricted. |
|
| 3560 |
++Restrictions on a specific database override any frontend setting. |
|
| 3561 |
++Operations can be any of |
|
| 3562 |
++.BR add , |
|
| 3563 |
++.BR bind , |
|
| 3564 |
++.BR compare , |
|
| 3565 |
++.BR delete , |
|
| 3566 |
++.BR extended[=<OID>] , |
|
| 3567 |
++.BR modify , |
|
| 3568 |
++.BR rename , |
|
| 3569 |
++.BR search , |
|
| 3570 |
++or the special pseudo-operations |
|
| 3571 |
++.B read |
|
| 3572 |
++and |
|
| 3573 |
++.BR write , |
|
| 3574 |
++which respectively summarize read and write operations. |
|
| 3575 |
++The use of |
|
| 3576 |
++.I restrict write |
|
| 3577 |
++is equivalent to |
|
| 3578 |
++.I olcReadOnly: TRUE |
|
| 3579 |
++(see above). |
|
| 3580 |
++The |
|
| 3581 |
++.B extended |
|
| 3582 |
++keyword allows one to indicate the OID of the specific operation |
|
| 3583 |
++to be restricted. |
|
| 3584 |
++.TP |
|
| 3585 |
++.B olcSchemaDN: <dn> |
|
| 3586 |
++Specify the distinguished name for the subschema subentry that |
|
| 3587 |
++controls the entries on this server. The default is "cn=Subschema". |
|
| 3588 |
++.TP |
|
| 3589 |
++.B olcSecurity: <factors> |
|
| 3590 |
++Specify a set of security strength factors (separated by white space) |
|
| 3591 |
++to require (see |
|
| 3592 |
++.BR olcSaslSecprops 's |
|
| 3593 |
++.B minssf |
|
| 3594 |
++option for a description of security strength factors). |
|
| 3595 |
++The directive may be specified globally and/or per-database. |
|
| 3596 |
++.B ssf=<n> |
|
| 3597 |
++specifies the overall security strength factor. |
|
| 3598 |
++.B transport=<n> |
|
| 3599 |
++specifies the transport security strength factor. |
|
| 3600 |
++.B tls=<n> |
|
| 3601 |
++specifies the TLS security strength factor. |
|
| 3602 |
++.B sasl=<n> |
|
| 3603 |
++specifies the SASL security strength factor. |
|
| 3604 |
++.B update_ssf=<n> |
|
| 3605 |
++specifies the overall security strength factor to require for |
|
| 3606 |
++directory updates. |
|
| 3607 |
++.B update_transport=<n> |
|
| 3608 |
++specifies the transport security strength factor to require for |
|
| 3609 |
++directory updates. |
|
| 3610 |
++.B update_tls=<n> |
|
| 3611 |
++specifies the TLS security strength factor to require for |
|
| 3612 |
++directory updates. |
|
| 3613 |
++.B update_sasl=<n> |
|
| 3614 |
++specifies the SASL security strength factor to require for |
|
| 3615 |
++directory updates. |
|
| 3616 |
++.B simple_bind=<n> |
|
| 3617 |
++specifies the security strength factor required for |
|
| 3618 |
++.I simple |
|
| 3619 |
++username/password authentication. |
|
| 3620 |
++Note that the |
|
| 3621 |
++.B transport |
|
| 3622 |
++factor is measure of security provided by the underlying transport, |
|
| 3623 |
++e.g. ldapi:// (and eventually IPSEC). It is not normally used. |
|
| 3624 |
++.TP |
|
| 3625 |
++.B olcSizeLimit: {<integer>|unlimited}
|
|
| 3626 |
++.TP |
|
| 3627 |
++.B olcSizeLimit: size[.{soft|hard}]=<integer> [...]
|
|
| 3628 |
++Specify the maximum number of entries to return from a search operation. |
|
| 3629 |
++The default size limit is 500. |
|
| 3630 |
++Use |
|
| 3631 |
++.B unlimited |
|
| 3632 |
++to specify no limits. |
|
| 3633 |
++The second format allows a fine grain setting of the size limits. |
|
| 3634 |
++If no special qualifiers are specified, both soft and hard limits are set. |
|
| 3635 |
++Extra args can be added in the same value. |
|
| 3636 |
++Additional qualifiers are available; see |
|
| 3637 |
++.BR olcLimits |
|
| 3638 |
++for an explanation of all of the different flags. |
|
| 3639 |
++.TP |
|
| 3640 |
++.B olcSortVals: <attr> [...] |
|
| 3641 |
++Specify a list of multi-valued attributes whose values will always |
|
| 3642 |
++be maintained in sorted order. Using this option will allow Modify, |
|
| 3643 |
++Compare, and filter evaluations on these attributes to be performed |
|
| 3644 |
++more efficiently. The resulting sort order depends on the |
|
| 3645 |
++attributes' syntax and matching rules and may not correspond to |
|
| 3646 |
++lexical order or any other recognizable order. |
|
| 3647 |
++This setting is only allowed in the frontend entry. |
|
| 3648 |
++.TP |
|
| 3649 |
++.B olcTimeLimit: {<integer>|unlimited}
|
|
| 3650 |
++.TP |
|
| 3651 |
++.B olcTimeLimit: time[.{soft|hard}]=<integer> [...]
|
|
| 3652 |
++Specify the maximum number of seconds (in real time) |
|
| 3653 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 3654 |
++will spend answering a search request. The default time limit is 3600. |
|
| 3655 |
++Use |
|
| 3656 |
++.B unlimited |
|
| 3657 |
++to specify no limits. |
|
| 3658 |
++The second format allows a fine grain setting of the time limits. |
|
| 3659 |
++Extra args can be added in the same value. See |
|
| 3660 |
++.BR olcLimits |
|
| 3661 |
++for an explanation of the different flags. |
|
| 3662 |
++ |
|
| 3663 |
++.SH GENERAL DATABASE OPTIONS |
|
| 3664 |
++Options in this section only apply to the specific database for |
|
| 3665 |
++which they are defined. They are supported by every |
|
| 3666 |
++type of backend. All of the Global Database Options may also be |
|
| 3667 |
++used here. |
|
| 3668 |
++.TP |
|
| 3669 |
++.B olcAddContentAcl: TRUE | FALSE |
|
| 3670 |
++Controls whether Add operations will perform ACL checks on |
|
| 3671 |
++the content of the entry being added. This check is off |
|
| 3672 |
++by default. See the |
|
| 3673 |
++.BR slapd.access (5) |
|
| 3674 |
++manual page for more details on ACL requirements for |
|
| 3675 |
++Add operations. |
|
| 3676 |
++.TP |
|
| 3677 |
++.B olcHidden: TRUE | FALSE |
|
| 3678 |
++Controls whether the database will be used to answer |
|
| 3679 |
++queries. A database that is hidden will never be |
|
| 3680 |
++selected to answer any queries, and any suffix configured |
|
| 3681 |
++on the database will be ignored in checks for conflicts |
|
| 3682 |
++with other databases. By default, olcHidden is FALSE. |
|
| 3683 |
++.TP |
|
| 3684 |
++.B olcLastMod: TRUE | FALSE |
|
| 3685 |
++Controls whether |
|
| 3686 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 3687 |
++will automatically maintain the |
|
| 3688 |
++modifiersName, modifyTimestamp, creatorsName, and |
|
| 3689 |
++createTimestamp attributes for entries. It also controls |
|
| 3690 |
++the entryCSN and entryUUID attributes, which are needed |
|
| 3691 |
++by the syncrepl provider. By default, olcLastMod is TRUE. |
|
| 3692 |
++.TP |
|
| 3693 |
++.B olcLastBind: TRUE | FALSE |
|
| 3694 |
++Controls whether |
|
| 3695 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 3696 |
++will automatically maintain the pwdLastSuccess attribute for |
|
| 3697 |
++entries. By default, olcLastBind is FALSE. |
|
| 3698 |
++.TP |
|
| 3699 |
++.B olcLastBindPrecision: <integer> |
|
| 3700 |
++If olcLastBind is enabled, specifies how frequently pwdLastSuccess |
|
| 3701 |
++will be updated. More than |
|
| 3702 |
++.B integer |
|
| 3703 |
++seconds must have passed since the last successful bind. In a |
|
| 3704 |
++replicated environment with frequent bind activity it may be |
|
| 3705 |
++useful to set this to a large value. |
|
| 3706 |
++.TP |
|
| 3707 |
++.B olcLimits: <selector> <limit> [<limit> [...]] |
|
| 3708 |
++Specify time and size limits based on the operation's initiator or |
|
| 3709 |
++base DN. |
|
| 3710 |
++The argument |
|
| 3711 |
++.B <selector> |
|
| 3712 |
++can be any of |
|
| 3713 |
++.RS |
|
| 3714 |
++.RS |
|
| 3715 |
++.TP |
|
| 3716 |
++anonymous | users | [<dnspec>=]<pattern> | group[/oc[/at]]=<pattern> |
|
| 3717 |
++ |
|
| 3718 |
++.RE |
|
| 3719 |
++with |
|
| 3720 |
++.RS |
|
| 3721 |
++.TP |
|
| 3722 |
++<dnspec> ::= dn[.<type>][.<style>] |
|
| 3723 |
++.TP |
|
| 3724 |
++<type> ::= self | this |
|
| 3725 |
++.TP |
|
| 3726 |
++<style> ::= exact | base | onelevel | subtree | children | regex | anonymous |
|
| 3727 |
++ |
|
| 3728 |
++.RE |
|
| 3729 |
++DN type |
|
| 3730 |
++.B self |
|
| 3731 |
++is the default and means the bound user, while |
|
| 3732 |
++.B this |
|
| 3733 |
++means the base DN of the operation. |
|
| 3734 |
++The term |
|
| 3735 |
++.B anonymous |
|
| 3736 |
++matches all unauthenticated clients. |
|
| 3737 |
++The term |
|
| 3738 |
++.B users |
|
| 3739 |
++matches all authenticated clients; |
|
| 3740 |
++otherwise an |
|
| 3741 |
++.B exact |
|
| 3742 |
++dn pattern is assumed unless otherwise specified by qualifying |
|
| 3743 |
++the (optional) key string |
|
| 3744 |
++.B dn |
|
| 3745 |
++with |
|
| 3746 |
++.B exact |
|
| 3747 |
++or |
|
| 3748 |
++.B base |
|
| 3749 |
++(which are synonyms), to require an exact match; with |
|
| 3750 |
++.BR onelevel , |
|
| 3751 |
++to require exactly one level of depth match; with |
|
| 3752 |
++.BR subtree , |
|
| 3753 |
++to allow any level of depth match, including the exact match; with |
|
| 3754 |
++.BR children , |
|
| 3755 |
++to allow any level of depth match, not including the exact match; |
|
| 3756 |
++.BR regex |
|
| 3757 |
++explicitly requires the (default) match based on POSIX (''extended'')
|
|
| 3758 |
++regular expression pattern. |
|
| 3759 |
++Finally, |
|
| 3760 |
++.B anonymous |
|
| 3761 |
++matches unbound operations; the |
|
| 3762 |
++.B pattern |
|
| 3763 |
++field is ignored. |
|
| 3764 |
++The same behavior is obtained by using the |
|
| 3765 |
++.B anonymous |
|
| 3766 |
++form of the |
|
| 3767 |
++.B <selector> |
|
| 3768 |
++clause. |
|
| 3769 |
++The term |
|
| 3770 |
++.BR group , |
|
| 3771 |
++with the optional objectClass |
|
| 3772 |
++.B oc |
|
| 3773 |
++and attributeType |
|
| 3774 |
++.B at |
|
| 3775 |
++fields, followed by |
|
| 3776 |
++.BR pattern , |
|
| 3777 |
++sets the limits for any DN listed in the values of the |
|
| 3778 |
++.B at |
|
| 3779 |
++attribute (default |
|
| 3780 |
++.BR member ) |
|
| 3781 |
++of the |
|
| 3782 |
++.B oc |
|
| 3783 |
++group objectClass (default |
|
| 3784 |
++.BR groupOfNames ) |
|
| 3785 |
++whose DN exactly matches |
|
| 3786 |
++.BR pattern . |
|
| 3787 |
++ |
|
| 3788 |
++The currently supported limits are |
|
| 3789 |
++.B size |
|
| 3790 |
++and |
|
| 3791 |
++.BR time . |
|
| 3792 |
++ |
|
| 3793 |
++The syntax for time limits is |
|
| 3794 |
++.BR time[.{soft|hard}]=<integer> ,
|
|
| 3795 |
++where |
|
| 3796 |
++.I integer |
|
| 3797 |
++is the number of seconds slapd will spend answering a search request. |
|
| 3798 |
++If no time limit is explicitly requested by the client, the |
|
| 3799 |
++.BR soft |
|
| 3800 |
++limit is used; if the requested time limit exceeds the |
|
| 3801 |
++.BR hard |
|
| 3802 |
++.\"limit, an |
|
| 3803 |
++.\".I "Administrative limit exceeded" |
|
| 3804 |
++.\"error is returned. |
|
| 3805 |
++limit, the value of the limit is used instead. |
|
| 3806 |
++If the |
|
| 3807 |
++.BR hard |
|
| 3808 |
++limit is set to the keyword |
|
| 3809 |
++.IR soft , |
|
| 3810 |
++the soft limit is used in either case; if it is set to the keyword |
|
| 3811 |
++.IR unlimited , |
|
| 3812 |
++no hard limit is enforced. |
|
| 3813 |
++Explicit requests for time limits smaller or equal to the |
|
| 3814 |
++.BR hard |
|
| 3815 |
++limit are honored. |
|
| 3816 |
++If no limit specifier is set, the value is assigned to the |
|
| 3817 |
++.BR soft |
|
| 3818 |
++limit, and the |
|
| 3819 |
++.BR hard |
|
| 3820 |
++limit is set to |
|
| 3821 |
++.IR soft , |
|
| 3822 |
++to preserve the original behavior. |
|
| 3823 |
++ |
|
| 3824 |
++The syntax for size limits is |
|
| 3825 |
++.BR size[.{soft|hard|unchecked}]=<integer> ,
|
|
| 3826 |
++where |
|
| 3827 |
++.I integer |
|
| 3828 |
++is the maximum number of entries slapd will return answering a search |
|
| 3829 |
++request. |
|
| 3830 |
++If no size limit is explicitly requested by the client, the |
|
| 3831 |
++.BR soft |
|
| 3832 |
++limit is used; if the requested size limit exceeds the |
|
| 3833 |
++.BR hard |
|
| 3834 |
++.\"limit, an |
|
| 3835 |
++.\".I "Administrative limit exceeded" |
|
| 3836 |
++.\"error is returned. |
|
| 3837 |
++limit, the value of the limit is used instead. |
|
| 3838 |
++If the |
|
| 3839 |
++.BR hard |
|
| 3840 |
++limit is set to the keyword |
|
| 3841 |
++.IR soft , |
|
| 3842 |
++the soft limit is used in either case; if it is set to the keyword |
|
| 3843 |
++.IR unlimited , |
|
| 3844 |
++no hard limit is enforced. |
|
| 3845 |
++Explicit requests for size limits smaller or equal to the |
|
| 3846 |
++.BR hard |
|
| 3847 |
++limit are honored. |
|
| 3848 |
++The |
|
| 3849 |
++.BR unchecked |
|
| 3850 |
++specifier sets a limit on the number of candidates a search request is allowed |
|
| 3851 |
++to examine. |
|
| 3852 |
++The rationale behind it is that searches for non-properly indexed |
|
| 3853 |
++attributes may result in large sets of candidates, which must be |
|
| 3854 |
++examined by |
|
| 3855 |
++.BR slapd (8) |
|
| 3856 |
++to determine whether they match the search filter or not. |
|
| 3857 |
++The |
|
| 3858 |
++.B unchecked |
|
| 3859 |
++limit provides a means to drop such operations before they are even |
|
| 3860 |
++started. |
|
| 3861 |
++If the selected candidates exceed the |
|
| 3862 |
++.BR unchecked |
|
| 3863 |
++limit, the search will abort with |
|
| 3864 |
++.IR "Unwilling to perform" . |
|
| 3865 |
++If it is set to the keyword |
|
| 3866 |
++.IR unlimited , |
|
| 3867 |
++no limit is applied (the default). |
|
| 3868 |
++If it is set to |
|
| 3869 |
++.IR disabled , |
|
| 3870 |
++the search is not even performed; this can be used to disallow searches |
|
| 3871 |
++for a specific set of users. |
|
| 3872 |
++If no limit specifier is set, the value is assigned to the |
|
| 3873 |
++.BR soft |
|
| 3874 |
++limit, and the |
|
| 3875 |
++.BR hard |
|
| 3876 |
++limit is set to |
|
| 3877 |
++.IR soft , |
|
| 3878 |
++to preserve the original behavior. |
|
| 3879 |
++ |
|
| 3880 |
++In case of no match, the global limits are used. |
|
| 3881 |
++The default values are the same as for |
|
| 3882 |
++.B olcSizeLimit |
|
| 3883 |
++and |
|
| 3884 |
++.BR olcTimeLimit ; |
|
| 3885 |
++no limit is set on |
|
| 3886 |
++.BR unchecked . |
|
| 3887 |
++ |
|
| 3888 |
++If |
|
| 3889 |
++.B pagedResults |
|
| 3890 |
++control is requested, the |
|
| 3891 |
++.B hard |
|
| 3892 |
++size limit is used by default, because the request of a specific page size |
|
| 3893 |
++is considered an explicit request for a limitation on the number |
|
| 3894 |
++of entries to be returned. |
|
| 3895 |
++However, the size limit applies to the total count of entries returned within |
|
| 3896 |
++the search, and not to a single page. |
|
| 3897 |
++Additional size limits may be enforced; the syntax is |
|
| 3898 |
++.BR size.pr={<integer>|noEstimate|unlimited} ,
|
|
| 3899 |
++where |
|
| 3900 |
++.I integer |
|
| 3901 |
++is the max page size if no explicit limit is set; the keyword |
|
| 3902 |
++.I noEstimate |
|
| 3903 |
++inhibits the server from returning an estimate of the total number |
|
| 3904 |
++of entries that might be returned |
|
| 3905 |
++(note: the current implementation does not return any estimate). |
|
| 3906 |
++The keyword |
|
| 3907 |
++.I unlimited |
|
| 3908 |
++indicates that no limit is applied to the pagedResults control page size. |
|
| 3909 |
++The syntax |
|
| 3910 |
++.B size.prtotal={<integer>|hard|unlimited|disabled}
|
|
| 3911 |
++allows one to set a limit on the total number of entries that the pagedResults |
|
| 3912 |
++control will return. |
|
| 3913 |
++By default it is set to the |
|
| 3914 |
++.B hard |
|
| 3915 |
++limit which will use the size.hard value. |
|
| 3916 |
++When set, |
|
| 3917 |
++.I integer |
|
| 3918 |
++is the max number of entries that the whole search with pagedResults control |
|
| 3919 |
++can return. |
|
| 3920 |
++Use |
|
| 3921 |
++.I unlimited |
|
| 3922 |
++to allow unlimited number of entries to be returned, e.g. to allow |
|
| 3923 |
++the use of the pagedResults control as a means to circumvent size |
|
| 3924 |
++limitations on regular searches; the keyword |
|
| 3925 |
++.I disabled |
|
| 3926 |
++disables the control, i.e. no paged results can be returned. |
|
| 3927 |
++Note that the total number of entries returned when the pagedResults control |
|
| 3928 |
++is requested cannot exceed the |
|
| 3929 |
++.B hard |
|
| 3930 |
++size limit of regular searches unless extended by the |
|
| 3931 |
++.B prtotal |
|
| 3932 |
++switch. |
|
| 3933 |
++ |
|
| 3934 |
++The \fBolcLimits\fP statement is typically used to let an unlimited |
|
| 3935 |
++number of entries be returned by searches performed |
|
| 3936 |
++with the identity used by the consumer for synchronization purposes |
|
| 3937 |
++by means of the RFC 4533 LDAP Content Synchronization protocol |
|
| 3938 |
++(see \fBolcSyncrepl\fP for details). |
|
| 3939 |
++ |
|
| 3940 |
++When using subordinate databases, it is necessary for any limits that |
|
| 3941 |
++are to be applied across the parent and its subordinates to be defined in |
|
| 3942 |
++both the parent and its subordinates. Otherwise the settings on the |
|
| 3943 |
++subordinate databases are not honored. |
|
| 3944 |
++.RE |
|
| 3945 |
++.TP |
|
| 3946 |
++.B olcMaxDerefDepth: <depth> |
|
| 3947 |
++Specifies the maximum number of aliases to dereference when trying to |
|
| 3948 |
++resolve an entry, used to avoid infinite alias loops. The default is 15. |
|
| 3949 |
++.TP |
|
| 3950 |
++.B olcMultiProvider: TRUE | FALSE |
|
| 3951 |
++This option puts a consumer database into Multi-Provider mode. Update |
|
| 3952 |
++operations will be accepted from any user, not just the updatedn. The |
|
| 3953 |
++database must already be configured as a syncrepl consumer |
|
| 3954 |
++before this keyword may be set. This mode also requires a |
|
| 3955 |
++.B olcServerID |
|
| 3956 |
++(see above) to be configured. |
|
| 3957 |
++By default, this setting is FALSE. |
|
| 3958 |
++.TP |
|
| 3959 |
++.B olcMonitoring: TRUE | FALSE |
|
| 3960 |
++This option enables database-specific monitoring in the entry related |
|
| 3961 |
++to the current database in the "cn=Databases,cn=Monitor" subtree |
|
| 3962 |
++of the monitor database, if the monitor database is enabled. |
|
| 3963 |
++Currently, only the MDB database provides database-specific monitoring. |
|
| 3964 |
++If monitoring is supported by the backend it defaults to TRUE, otherwise |
|
| 3965 |
++FALSE. |
|
| 3966 |
++.TP |
|
| 3967 |
++.B olcPlugin: <plugin_type> <lib_path> <init_function> [<arguments>] |
|
| 3968 |
++Configure a SLAPI plugin. See the |
|
| 3969 |
++.BR slapd.plugin (5) |
|
| 3970 |
++manpage for more details. |
|
| 3971 |
++.TP |
|
| 3972 |
++.B olcRootDN: <dn> |
|
| 3973 |
++Specify the distinguished name that is not subject to access control |
|
| 3974 |
++or administrative limit restrictions for operations on this database. |
|
| 3975 |
++This DN may or may not be associated with an entry. An empty root |
|
| 3976 |
++DN (the default) specifies no root access is to be granted. It is |
|
| 3977 |
++recommended that the rootdn only be specified when needed (such as |
|
| 3978 |
++when initially populating a database). If the rootdn is within |
|
| 3979 |
++a namingContext (suffix) of the database, a simple bind password |
|
| 3980 |
++may also be provided using the |
|
| 3981 |
++.B olcRootPW |
|
| 3982 |
++directive. Many optional features, including syncrepl, require the |
|
| 3983 |
++rootdn to be defined for the database. |
|
| 3984 |
++The |
|
| 3985 |
++.B olcRootDN |
|
| 3986 |
++of the |
|
| 3987 |
++.B cn=config |
|
| 3988 |
++database defaults to |
|
| 3989 |
++.B cn=config |
|
| 3990 |
++itself. |
|
| 3991 |
++.TP |
|
| 3992 |
++.B olcRootPW: <password> |
|
| 3993 |
++Specify a password (or hash of the password) for the rootdn. The |
|
| 3994 |
++password can only be set if the rootdn is within the namingContext |
|
| 3995 |
++(suffix) of the database. |
|
| 3996 |
++This option accepts all RFC 2307 userPassword formats known to |
|
| 3997 |
++the server (see |
|
| 3998 |
++.B olcPasswordHash |
|
| 3999 |
++description) as well as cleartext. |
|
| 4000 |
++.BR slappasswd (8) |
|
| 4001 |
++may be used to generate a hash of a password. Cleartext |
|
| 4002 |
++and \fB{CRYPT}\fP passwords are not recommended. If empty
|
|
| 4003 |
++(the default), authentication of the root DN is by other means |
|
| 4004 |
++(e.g. SASL). Use of SASL is encouraged. |
|
| 4005 |
++.TP |
|
| 4006 |
++.B olcSubordinate: [TRUE | FALSE | advertise] |
|
| 4007 |
++Specify that the current backend database is a subordinate of another |
|
| 4008 |
++backend database. A subordinate database may have only one suffix. This |
|
| 4009 |
++option may be used to glue multiple databases into a single namingContext. |
|
| 4010 |
++If the suffix of the current database is within the namingContext of a |
|
| 4011 |
++superior database, searches against the superior database will be |
|
| 4012 |
++propagated to the subordinate as well. All of the databases |
|
| 4013 |
++associated with a single namingContext should have identical rootdns. |
|
| 4014 |
++Behavior of other LDAP operations is unaffected by this setting. In |
|
| 4015 |
++particular, it is not possible to use moddn to move an entry from |
|
| 4016 |
++one subordinate to another subordinate within the namingContext. |
|
| 4017 |
++ |
|
| 4018 |
++If the optional \fBadvertise\fP flag is supplied, the naming context of |
|
| 4019 |
++this database is advertised in the root DSE. The default is to hide this |
|
| 4020 |
++database context, so that only the superior context is visible. |
|
| 4021 |
++ |
|
| 4022 |
++If the slap tools |
|
| 4023 |
++.BR slapcat (8), |
|
| 4024 |
++.BR slapadd (8), |
|
| 4025 |
++.BR slapmodify (8), |
|
| 4026 |
++or |
|
| 4027 |
++.BR slapindex (8) |
|
| 4028 |
++are used on the superior database, any glued subordinates that support |
|
| 4029 |
++these tools are opened as well. |
|
| 4030 |
++ |
|
| 4031 |
++Databases that are glued together should usually be configured with the |
|
| 4032 |
++same indices (assuming they support indexing), even for attributes that |
|
| 4033 |
++only exist in some of these databases. In general, all of the glued |
|
| 4034 |
++databases should be configured as similarly as possible, since the intent |
|
| 4035 |
++is to provide the appearance of a single directory. |
|
| 4036 |
++ |
|
| 4037 |
++Note that the subordinate functionality is implemented internally |
|
| 4038 |
++by the \fIglue\fP overlay and as such its behavior will interact with other |
|
| 4039 |
++overlays in use. By default, the glue overlay is automatically configured as |
|
| 4040 |
++the last overlay on the superior database. Its position on the database |
|
| 4041 |
++can be explicitly configured by setting an \fBoverlay glue\fP directive |
|
| 4042 |
++at the desired position. This explicit configuration is necessary e.g. |
|
| 4043 |
++when using the \fIsyncprov\fP overlay, which needs to follow \fIglue\fP |
|
| 4044 |
++in order to work over all of the glued databases. E.g. |
|
| 4045 |
++.RS |
|
| 4046 |
++.nf |
|
| 4047 |
++ dn: olcDatabase={1}mdb,cn=config
|
|
| 4048 |
++ olcSuffix: dc=example,dc=com |
|
| 4049 |
++ ... |
|
| 4050 |
++ |
|
| 4051 |
++ dn: olcOverlay={0}glue,olcDatabase={1}mdb,cn=config
|
|
| 4052 |
++ ... |
|
| 4053 |
++ |
|
| 4054 |
++ dn: olcOverlay={1}syncprov,olcDatabase={1}mdb,cn=config
|
|
| 4055 |
++ ... |
|
| 4056 |
++.fi |
|
| 4057 |
++.RE |
|
| 4058 |
++See the Overlays section below for more details. |
|
| 4059 |
++.TP |
|
| 4060 |
++.B olcSuffix: <dn suffix> |
|
| 4061 |
++Specify the DN suffix of queries that will be passed to this |
|
| 4062 |
++backend database. Multiple suffix lines can be given and at least one is |
|
| 4063 |
++required for each database definition. |
|
| 4064 |
++ |
|
| 4065 |
++If the suffix of one database is "inside" that of another, the database |
|
| 4066 |
++with the inner suffix must come first in the configuration file. |
|
| 4067 |
++You may also want to glue such databases together with the |
|
| 4068 |
++.B olcSubordinate |
|
| 4069 |
++attribute. |
|
| 4070 |
++.TP |
|
| 4071 |
++.B olcSyncUseSubentry: TRUE | FALSE |
|
| 4072 |
++Store the syncrepl contextCSN in a subentry instead of the context entry |
|
| 4073 |
++of the database. The subentry's RDN will be "cn=ldapsync". The default is |
|
| 4074 |
++FALSE, meaning the contextCSN is stored in the context entry. |
|
| 4075 |
++.HP |
|
| 4076 |
++.hy 0 |
|
| 4077 |
++.B olcSyncrepl: rid=<replica ID> |
|
| 4078 |
++.B provider=ldap[s]://<hostname>[:port] |
|
| 4079 |
++.B searchbase=<base DN> |
|
| 4080 |
++.B [type=refreshOnly|refreshAndPersist] |
|
| 4081 |
++.B [interval=dd:hh:mm:ss] |
|
| 4082 |
++.B [retry=[<retry interval> <# of retries>]+] |
|
| 4083 |
++.B [filter=<filter str>] |
|
| 4084 |
++.B [scope=sub|one|base|subord] |
|
| 4085 |
++.B [attrs=<attr list>] |
|
| 4086 |
++.B [exattrs=<attr list>] |
|
| 4087 |
++.B [attrsonly] |
|
| 4088 |
++.B [sizelimit=<limit>] |
|
| 4089 |
++.B [timelimit=<limit>] |
|
| 4090 |
++.B [schemachecking=on|off] |
|
| 4091 |
++.B [network\-timeout=<seconds>] |
|
| 4092 |
++.B [timeout=<seconds>] |
|
| 4093 |
++.B [tcp\-user\-timeout=<milliseconds>] |
|
| 4094 |
++.B [bindmethod=simple|sasl] |
|
| 4095 |
++.B [binddn=<dn>] |
|
| 4096 |
++.B [saslmech=<mech>] |
|
| 4097 |
++.B [authcid=<identity>] |
|
| 4098 |
++.B [authzid=<identity>] |
|
| 4099 |
++.B [credentials=<passwd>] |
|
| 4100 |
++.B [realm=<realm>] |
|
| 4101 |
++.B [secprops=<properties>] |
|
| 4102 |
++.B [keepalive=<idle>:<probes>:<interval>] |
|
| 4103 |
++.B [starttls=yes|critical] |
|
| 4104 |
++.B [tls_cert=<file>] |
|
| 4105 |
++.B [tls_key=<file>] |
|
| 4106 |
++.B [tls_cacert=<file>] |
|
| 4107 |
++.B [tls_cacertdir=<path>] |
|
| 4108 |
++.B [tls_reqcert=never|allow|try|demand] |
|
| 4109 |
++.B [tls_reqsan=never|allow|try|demand] |
|
| 4110 |
++.B [tls_cipher_suite=<ciphers>] |
|
| 4111 |
++.B [tls_ecname=<names>] |
|
| 4112 |
++.B [tls_crlcheck=none|peer|all] |
|
| 4113 |
++.B [tls_protocol_min=<major>[.<minor>]] |
|
| 4114 |
++.B [suffixmassage=<real DN>] |
|
| 4115 |
++.B [logbase=<base DN>] |
|
| 4116 |
++.B [logfilter=<filter str>] |
|
| 4117 |
++.B [syncdata=default|accesslog|changelog] |
|
| 4118 |
++.B [lazycommit] |
|
| 4119 |
++.RS |
|
| 4120 |
++Specify the current database as a consumer which is kept up-to-date with the |
|
| 4121 |
++provider content by establishing the current |
|
| 4122 |
++.BR slapd (8) |
|
| 4123 |
++as a replication consumer site running a |
|
| 4124 |
++.B syncrepl |
|
| 4125 |
++replication engine. |
|
| 4126 |
++The consumer content is kept synchronized to the provider content using |
|
| 4127 |
++the LDAP Content Synchronization protocol. Refer to the |
|
| 4128 |
++"OpenLDAP Administrator's Guide" for detailed information on |
|
| 4129 |
++setting up a replicated |
|
| 4130 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 4131 |
++directory service using the |
|
| 4132 |
++.B syncrepl |
|
| 4133 |
++replication engine. |
|
| 4134 |
++ |
|
| 4135 |
++.B rid |
|
| 4136 |
++identifies the current |
|
| 4137 |
++.B syncrepl |
|
| 4138 |
++directive within the replication consumer site. |
|
| 4139 |
++It is a non-negative integer not greater than 999 (limited |
|
| 4140 |
++to three decimal digits). |
|
| 4141 |
++ |
|
| 4142 |
++.B provider |
|
| 4143 |
++specifies the replication provider site containing the provider content |
|
| 4144 |
++as an LDAP URI. If <port> is not given, the standard LDAP port number |
|
| 4145 |
++(389 or 636) is used. |
|
| 4146 |
++ |
|
| 4147 |
++The content of the |
|
| 4148 |
++.B syncrepl |
|
| 4149 |
++consumer is defined using a search |
|
| 4150 |
++specification as its result set. The consumer |
|
| 4151 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 4152 |
++will send search requests to the provider |
|
| 4153 |
++.B slapd |
|
| 4154 |
++according to the search specification. The search specification includes |
|
| 4155 |
++.BR searchbase ", " scope ", " filter ", " attrs ", " attrsonly ", " sizelimit ", " |
|
| 4156 |
++and |
|
| 4157 |
++.B timelimit |
|
| 4158 |
++parameters as in the normal search specification. The |
|
| 4159 |
++.B exattrs |
|
| 4160 |
++option may also be used to specify attributes that should be omitted |
|
| 4161 |
++from incoming entries. |
|
| 4162 |
++The \fBscope\fP defaults to \fBsub\fP, the \fBfilter\fP defaults to |
|
| 4163 |
++\fB(objectclass=*)\fP, and there is no default \fBsearchbase\fP. The |
|
| 4164 |
++\fBattrs\fP list defaults to \fB"*,+"\fP to return all user and operational |
|
| 4165 |
++attributes, and \fBattrsonly\fP and \fBexattrs\fP are unset by default. |
|
| 4166 |
++The \fBsizelimit\fP and \fBtimelimit\fP only |
|
| 4167 |
++accept "unlimited" and positive integers, and both default to "unlimited". |
|
| 4168 |
++The \fBsizelimit\fP and \fBtimelimit\fP parameters define |
|
| 4169 |
++a consumer requested limitation on the number of entries that can be returned |
|
| 4170 |
++by the LDAP Content Synchronization operation; these should be left unchanged |
|
| 4171 |
++from the default otherwise replication may never succeed. |
|
| 4172 |
++Note, however, that any provider-side limits for the replication identity |
|
| 4173 |
++will be enforced by the provider regardless of the limits requested |
|
| 4174 |
++by the LDAP Content Synchronization operation, much like for any other |
|
| 4175 |
++search operation. |
|
| 4176 |
++ |
|
| 4177 |
++The LDAP Content Synchronization protocol has two operation types. |
|
| 4178 |
++In the |
|
| 4179 |
++.B refreshOnly |
|
| 4180 |
++operation, the next synchronization search operation |
|
| 4181 |
++is periodically rescheduled at an interval time (specified by |
|
| 4182 |
++.B interval |
|
| 4183 |
++parameter; 1 day by default) |
|
| 4184 |
++after each synchronization operation finishes. |
|
| 4185 |
++In the |
|
| 4186 |
++.B refreshAndPersist |
|
| 4187 |
++operation, a synchronization search remains persistent in the provider slapd. |
|
| 4188 |
++Further updates to the provider will generate |
|
| 4189 |
++.B searchResultEntry |
|
| 4190 |
++to the consumer slapd as the search responses to the persistent |
|
| 4191 |
++synchronization search. If the initial search fails due to an error, the |
|
| 4192 |
++next synchronization search operation is periodically rescheduled at an |
|
| 4193 |
++interval time (specified by |
|
| 4194 |
++.B interval |
|
| 4195 |
++parameter; 1 day by default) |
|
| 4196 |
++ |
|
| 4197 |
++If an error occurs during replication, the consumer will attempt to |
|
| 4198 |
++reconnect according to the |
|
| 4199 |
++.B retry |
|
| 4200 |
++parameter which is a list of the <retry interval> and <# of retries> pairs. |
|
| 4201 |
++For example, retry="60 10 300 3" lets the consumer retry every 60 seconds |
|
| 4202 |
++for the first 10 times and then retry every 300 seconds for the next 3 |
|
| 4203 |
++times before stop retrying. The `+' in <# of retries> means indefinite |
|
| 4204 |
++number of retries until success. |
|
| 4205 |
++If no |
|
| 4206 |
++.B retry |
|
| 4207 |
++is specified, by default syncrepl retries every hour forever. |
|
| 4208 |
++ |
|
| 4209 |
++The schema checking can be enforced at the LDAP Sync |
|
| 4210 |
++consumer site by turning on the |
|
| 4211 |
++.B schemachecking |
|
| 4212 |
++parameter. The default is \fBoff\fP. |
|
| 4213 |
++Schema checking \fBon\fP means that replicated entries must have |
|
| 4214 |
++a structural objectClass, must obey to objectClass requirements |
|
| 4215 |
++in terms of required/allowed attributes, and that naming attributes |
|
| 4216 |
++and distinguished values must be present. |
|
| 4217 |
++As a consequence, schema checking should be \fBoff\fP when partial |
|
| 4218 |
++replication is used. |
|
| 4219 |
++ |
|
| 4220 |
++The |
|
| 4221 |
++.B network\-timeout |
|
| 4222 |
++parameter sets how long the consumer will wait to establish a |
|
| 4223 |
++network connection to the provider. Once a connection is |
|
| 4224 |
++established, the |
|
| 4225 |
++.B timeout |
|
| 4226 |
++parameter determines how long the consumer will wait for the initial |
|
| 4227 |
++Bind request to complete. The defaults for these parameters come |
|
| 4228 |
++from |
|
| 4229 |
++.BR ldap.conf (5). |
|
| 4230 |
++The |
|
| 4231 |
++.B tcp\-user\-timeout |
|
| 4232 |
++parameter, if non-zero, corresponds to the |
|
| 4233 |
++.B TCP_USER_TIMEOUT |
|
| 4234 |
++set on the target connections, overriding the operating system setting. |
|
| 4235 |
++Only some systems support the customization of this parameter, it is |
|
| 4236 |
++ignored otherwise and system-wide settings are used. |
|
| 4237 |
++ |
|
| 4238 |
++A |
|
| 4239 |
++.B bindmethod |
|
| 4240 |
++of |
|
| 4241 |
++.B simple |
|
| 4242 |
++requires the options |
|
| 4243 |
++.B binddn |
|
| 4244 |
++and |
|
| 4245 |
++.B credentials |
|
| 4246 |
++and should only be used when adequate security services |
|
| 4247 |
++(e.g. TLS or IPSEC) are in place. |
|
| 4248 |
++.B REMEMBER: simple bind credentials must be in cleartext! |
|
| 4249 |
++A |
|
| 4250 |
++.B bindmethod |
|
| 4251 |
++of |
|
| 4252 |
++.B sasl |
|
| 4253 |
++requires the option |
|
| 4254 |
++.B saslmech. |
|
| 4255 |
++Depending on the mechanism, an authentication identity and/or |
|
| 4256 |
++credentials can be specified using |
|
| 4257 |
++.B authcid |
|
| 4258 |
++and |
|
| 4259 |
++.B credentials. |
|
| 4260 |
++The |
|
| 4261 |
++.B authzid |
|
| 4262 |
++parameter may be used to specify an authorization identity. |
|
| 4263 |
++Specific security properties (as with the |
|
| 4264 |
++.B sasl\-secprops |
|
| 4265 |
++keyword above) for a SASL bind can be set with the |
|
| 4266 |
++.B secprops |
|
| 4267 |
++option. A non default SASL realm can be set with the |
|
| 4268 |
++.B realm |
|
| 4269 |
++option. |
|
| 4270 |
++The identity used for synchronization by the consumer should be allowed |
|
| 4271 |
++to receive an unlimited number of entries in response to a search request. |
|
| 4272 |
++The provider, other than allowing authentication of the syncrepl identity, |
|
| 4273 |
++should grant that identity appropriate access privileges to the data |
|
| 4274 |
++that is being replicated (\fBaccess\fP directive), and appropriate time |
|
| 4275 |
++and size limits. |
|
| 4276 |
++This can be accomplished by either allowing unlimited \fBsizelimit\fP |
|
| 4277 |
++and \fBtimelimit\fP, or by setting an appropriate \fBlimits\fP statement |
|
| 4278 |
++in the consumer's configuration (see \fBsizelimit\fP and \fBlimits\fP |
|
| 4279 |
++for details). |
|
| 4280 |
++ |
|
| 4281 |
++The |
|
| 4282 |
++.B keepalive |
|
| 4283 |
++parameter sets the values of \fIidle\fP, \fIprobes\fP, and \fIinterval\fP |
|
| 4284 |
++used to check whether a socket is alive; |
|
| 4285 |
++.I idle |
|
| 4286 |
++is the number of seconds a connection needs to remain idle before TCP |
|
| 4287 |
++starts sending keepalive probes; |
|
| 4288 |
++.I probes |
|
| 4289 |
++is the maximum number of keepalive probes TCP should send before dropping |
|
| 4290 |
++the connection; |
|
| 4291 |
++.I interval |
|
| 4292 |
++is interval in seconds between individual keepalive probes. |
|
| 4293 |
++Only some systems support the customization of these values; |
|
| 4294 |
++the |
|
| 4295 |
++.B keepalive |
|
| 4296 |
++parameter is ignored otherwise, and system-wide settings are used. |
|
| 4297 |
++ |
|
| 4298 |
++The |
|
| 4299 |
++.B starttls |
|
| 4300 |
++parameter specifies use of the StartTLS extended operation |
|
| 4301 |
++to establish a TLS session before Binding to the provider. If the |
|
| 4302 |
++.B critical |
|
| 4303 |
++argument is supplied, the session will be aborted if the StartTLS request |
|
| 4304 |
++fails. Otherwise the syncrepl session continues without TLS. The |
|
| 4305 |
++.B tls_reqcert |
|
| 4306 |
++setting defaults to "demand", the |
|
| 4307 |
++.B tls_reqsan |
|
| 4308 |
++setting defaults to "allow", and the other TLS settings |
|
| 4309 |
++default to the same as the main slapd TLS settings. |
|
| 4310 |
++ |
|
| 4311 |
++The |
|
| 4312 |
++.B suffixmassage |
|
| 4313 |
++parameter allows the consumer to pull entries from a remote directory |
|
| 4314 |
++whose DN suffix differs from the local directory. The portion of the |
|
| 4315 |
++remote entries' DNs that matches the \fIsearchbase\fP will be replaced |
|
| 4316 |
++with the suffixmassage DN. |
|
| 4317 |
++ |
|
| 4318 |
++Rather than replicating whole entries, the consumer can query logs of |
|
| 4319 |
++data modifications. This mode of operation is referred to as \fIdelta |
|
| 4320 |
++syncrepl\fP. In addition to the above parameters, the |
|
| 4321 |
++.B logbase |
|
| 4322 |
++and |
|
| 4323 |
++.B logfilter |
|
| 4324 |
++parameters must be set appropriately for the log that will be used. The |
|
| 4325 |
++.B syncdata |
|
| 4326 |
++parameter must be set to either "accesslog" if the log conforms to the |
|
| 4327 |
++.BR slapo\-accesslog (5) |
|
| 4328 |
++log format, or "changelog" if the log conforms |
|
| 4329 |
++to the obsolete \fIchangelog\fP format. If the |
|
| 4330 |
++.B syncdata |
|
| 4331 |
++parameter is omitted or set to "default" then the log parameters are |
|
| 4332 |
++ignored. |
|
| 4333 |
++ |
|
| 4334 |
++The |
|
| 4335 |
++.B lazycommit |
|
| 4336 |
++parameter tells the underlying database that it can store changes without |
|
| 4337 |
++performing a full flush after each change. This may improve performance |
|
| 4338 |
++for the consumer, while sacrificing safety or durability. |
|
| 4339 |
++.RE |
|
| 4340 |
++.TP |
|
| 4341 |
++.B olcUpdateDN: <dn> |
|
| 4342 |
++This option is only applicable in a replica |
|
| 4343 |
++database. |
|
| 4344 |
++It specifies the DN permitted to update (subject to access controls) |
|
| 4345 |
++the replica. It is only needed in certain push-mode |
|
| 4346 |
++replication scenarios. Generally, this DN |
|
| 4347 |
++.I should not |
|
| 4348 |
++be the same as the |
|
| 4349 |
++.B rootdn |
|
| 4350 |
++used at the provider. |
|
| 4351 |
++.TP |
|
| 4352 |
++.B olcUpdateRef: <url> |
|
| 4353 |
++Specify the referral to pass back when |
|
| 4354 |
++.BR slapd (8) |
|
| 4355 |
++is asked to modify a replicated local database. |
|
| 4356 |
++If multiple values are specified, each url is provided. |
|
| 4357 |
++ |
|
| 4358 |
++.SH DATABASE-SPECIFIC OPTIONS |
|
| 4359 |
++Each database may allow specific configuration options; they are |
|
| 4360 |
++documented separately in the backends' manual pages. See the |
|
| 4361 |
++.BR slapd.backends (5) |
|
| 4362 |
++manual page for an overview of available backends. |
|
| 4363 |
++.SH OVERLAYS |
|
| 4364 |
++An overlay is a piece of |
|
| 4365 |
++code that intercepts database operations in order to extend or change |
|
| 4366 |
++them. Overlays are pushed onto |
|
| 4367 |
++a stack over the database, and so they will execute in the reverse |
|
| 4368 |
++of the order in which they were configured and the database itself |
|
| 4369 |
++will receive control last of all. |
|
| 4370 |
++ |
|
| 4371 |
++Overlays must be configured as child entries of a specific database. The |
|
| 4372 |
++entry's RDN must be of the form |
|
| 4373 |
++.B olcOverlay={x}<overlaytype>
|
|
| 4374 |
++and the entry must have the olcOverlayConfig objectClass. Normally the |
|
| 4375 |
++config engine generates the "{x}" index in the RDN automatically, so
|
|
| 4376 |
++it can be omitted when initially loading these entries. |
|
| 4377 |
++ |
|
| 4378 |
++See the |
|
| 4379 |
++.BR slapd.overlays (5) |
|
| 4380 |
++manual page for an overview of available overlays. |
|
| 4381 |
++.SH EXAMPLES |
|
| 4382 |
++.LP |
|
| 4383 |
++Here is a short example of a configuration in LDIF suitable for use with |
|
| 4384 |
++.BR slapadd (8) |
|
| 4385 |
++: |
|
| 4386 |
++.LP |
|
| 4387 |
++.RS |
|
| 4388 |
++.nf |
|
| 4389 |
++dn: cn=config |
|
| 4390 |
++objectClass: olcGlobal |
|
| 4391 |
++cn: config |
|
| 4392 |
++olcPidFile: LOCALSTATEDIR/run/slapd.pid |
|
| 4393 |
++olcAttributeOptions: x\-hidden lang\- |
|
| 4394 |
++ |
|
| 4395 |
++dn: cn=schema,cn=config |
|
| 4396 |
++objectClass: olcSchemaConfig |
|
| 4397 |
++cn: schema |
|
| 4398 |
++ |
|
| 4399 |
++include: file://SYSCONFDIR/schema/core.ldif |
|
| 4400 |
++ |
|
| 4401 |
++dn: olcDatabase=frontend,cn=config |
|
| 4402 |
++objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig |
|
| 4403 |
++objectClass: olcFrontendConfig |
|
| 4404 |
++olcDatabase: frontend |
|
| 4405 |
++# Subtypes of "name" (e.g. "cn" and "ou") with the |
|
| 4406 |
++# option ";x\-hidden" can be searched for/compared, |
|
| 4407 |
++# but are not shown. See \fBslapd.access\fP(5). |
|
| 4408 |
++olcAccess: to attrs=name;x\-hidden by * =cs |
|
| 4409 |
++# Protect passwords. See \fBslapd.access\fP(5). |
|
| 4410 |
++olcAccess: to attrs=userPassword by * auth |
|
| 4411 |
++# Read access to other attributes and entries. |
|
| 4412 |
++olcAccess: to * by * read |
|
| 4413 |
++ |
|
| 4414 |
++# set a rootpw for the config database so we can bind. |
|
| 4415 |
++# deny access to everyone else. |
|
| 4416 |
++dn: olcDatabase=config,cn=config |
|
| 4417 |
++objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig |
|
| 4418 |
++olcDatabase: config |
|
| 4419 |
++olcRootPW: {SSHA}XKYnrjvGT3wZFQrDD5040US592LxsdLy
|
|
| 4420 |
++olcAccess: to * by * none |
|
| 4421 |
++ |
|
| 4422 |
++dn: olcDatabase=mdb,cn=config |
|
| 4423 |
++objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig |
|
| 4424 |
++objectClass: olcMdbConfig |
|
| 4425 |
++olcDatabase: mdb |
|
| 4426 |
++olcSuffix: "dc=our\-domain,dc=com" |
|
| 4427 |
++# The database directory MUST exist prior to |
|
| 4428 |
++# running slapd AND should only be accessible |
|
| 4429 |
++# by the slapd/tools. Mode 0700 recommended. |
|
| 4430 |
++olcDbDirectory: LOCALSTATEDIR/openldap\-data |
|
| 4431 |
++# Indices to maintain |
|
| 4432 |
++olcDbIndex: objectClass eq |
|
| 4433 |
++olcDbIndex: cn,sn,mail pres,eq,approx,sub |
|
| 4434 |
++ |
|
| 4435 |
++# We serve small clients that do not handle referrals, |
|
| 4436 |
++# so handle remote lookups on their behalf. |
|
| 4437 |
++dn: olcDatabase=ldap,cn=config |
|
| 4438 |
++objectClass: olcDatabaseConfig |
|
| 4439 |
++objectClass: olcLdapConfig |
|
| 4440 |
++olcDatabase: ldap |
|
| 4441 |
++olcSuffix: "" |
|
| 4442 |
++olcDbUri: ldap://ldap.some\-server.com/ |
|
| 4443 |
++.fi |
|
| 4444 |
++.RE |
|
| 4445 |
++.LP |
|
| 4446 |
++Assuming the above data was saved in a file named "config.ldif" and the |
|
| 4447 |
++ETCDIR/slapd.d directory has been created, this command will initialize |
|
| 4448 |
++the configuration: |
|
| 4449 |
++.RS |
|
| 4450 |
++.nf |
|
| 4451 |
++slapadd \-F ETCDIR/slapd.d \-n 0 \-l config.ldif |
|
| 4452 |
++.fi |
|
| 4453 |
++.RE |
|
| 4454 |
++ |
|
| 4455 |
++.LP |
|
| 4456 |
++"OpenLDAP Administrator's Guide" contains a longer annotated |
|
| 4457 |
++example of a slapd configuration. |
|
| 4458 |
++ |
|
| 4459 |
++Alternatively, an existing slapd.conf file can be converted to the new |
|
| 4460 |
++format using slapd or any of the slap tools: |
|
| 4461 |
++.RS |
|
| 4462 |
++.nf |
|
| 4463 |
++slaptest \-f ETCDIR/slapd.conf \-F ETCDIR/slapd.d |
|
| 4464 |
++.fi |
|
| 4465 |
++.RE |
|
| 4466 |
++ |
|
| 4467 |
++.SH FILES |
|
| 4468 |
++.TP |
|
| 4469 |
++ETCDIR/slapd.conf |
|
| 4470 |
++default slapd configuration file |
|
| 4471 |
++.TP |
|
| 4472 |
++ETCDIR/slapd.d |
|
| 4473 |
++default slapd configuration directory |
|
| 4474 |
++.SH SEE ALSO |
|
| 4475 |
++.BR ldap (3), |
|
| 4476 |
++.BR ldif (5), |
|
| 4477 |
++.BR gnutls\-cli (1), |
|
| 4478 |
++.BR slapd.access (5), |
|
| 4479 |
++.BR slapd.backends (5), |
|
| 4480 |
++.BR slapd.conf (5), |
|
| 4481 |
++.BR slapd.overlays (5), |
|
| 4482 |
++.BR slapd.plugin (5), |
|
| 4483 |
++.BR slapd (8), |
|
| 4484 |
++.BR slapacl (8), |
|
| 4485 |
++.BR slapadd (8), |
|
| 4486 |
++.BR slapauth (8), |
|
| 4487 |
++.BR slapcat (8), |
|
| 4488 |
++.BR slapdn (8), |
|
| 4489 |
++.BR slapindex (8), |
|
| 4490 |
++.BR slapmodify (8), |
|
| 4491 |
++.BR slappasswd (8), |
|
| 4492 |
++.BR slaptest (8). |
|
| 4493 |
++.LP |
|
| 4494 |
++"OpenLDAP Administrator's Guide" (http://www.OpenLDAP.org/doc/admin/) |
|
| 4495 |
++.SH ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS |
|
| 4496 |
++.so ../Project |
|
| 4497 |
+diff -Naurp openldap-2.6.2.orig/include/ldap_defaults.h openldap-2.6.2/include/ldap_defaults.h |
|
| 4498 |
+--- openldap-2.6.2.orig/include/ldap_defaults.h 2022-05-04 16:55:23.000000000 +0200 |
|
| 4499 |
+@@ -40,7 +40,8 @@ |
|
| 4500 |
+ |
|
| 4501 |
+ /* default ldapi:// socket */ |
|
| 4502 |
+ #ifndef LDAPI_SOCK |
|
| 4503 |
+-#define LDAPI_SOCK LDAP_RUNDIR LDAP_DIRSEP "run" LDAP_DIRSEP "ldapi" |
|
| 4504 |
++#define LDAPI_SOCK LDAP_RUNDIR LDAP_DIRSEP "run" LDAP_DIRSEP "openldap" LDAP_DIRSEP "ldapi" |
|
| 4505 |
++ |
|
| 4506 |
+ #endif |
|
| 4507 |
+ |
|
| 4508 |
+ /* |
|
| 4509 |
+@@ -54,7 +55,8 @@ |
|
| 4510 |
+ #define SLAPD_DEFAULT_CONFIGDIR LDAP_SYSCONFDIR LDAP_DIRSEP "slapd.d" |
|
| 4511 |
+ #endif |
|
| 4512 |
+ #ifndef SLAPD_DEFAULT_DB_DIR |
|
| 4513 |
+-#define SLAPD_DEFAULT_DB_DIR LDAP_RUNDIR LDAP_DIRSEP "openldap-data" |
|
| 4514 |
++#define SLAPD_DEFAULT_DB_DIR LDAP_RUNDIR LDAP_DIRSEP "lib" LDAP_DIRSEP "openldap" |
|
| 4515 |
++ |
|
| 4516 |
+ #endif |
|
| 4517 |
+ #define SLAPD_DEFAULT_DB_MODE 0600 |
|
| 4518 |
+ /* default max deref depth for aliases */ |
|
| 4519 |
+diff -Naurp openldap-2.6.2.orig/libraries/liblber/Makefile.in openldap-2.6.2/libraries/liblber/Makefile.in |
|
| 4520 |
+--- openldap-2.6.2.orig/libraries/liblber/Makefile.in 2022-05-04 16:55:23.000000000 +0200 |
|
| 4521 |
+@@ -51,6 +51,6 @@ idtest: $(XLIBS) idtest.o |
|
| 4522 |
+ |
|
| 4523 |
+ install-local: FORCE |
|
| 4524 |
+ -$(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 4525 |
+- $(LTINSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) -m 644 $(LIBRARY) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 4526 |
++ $(LTINSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) -m 755 $(LIBRARY) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 4527 |
+ $(LTFINISH) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 4528 |
+ |
|
| 4529 |
+diff -Naurp openldap-2.6.2.orig/libraries/libldap/Makefile.in openldap-2.6.2/libraries/libldap/Makefile.in |
|
| 4530 |
+--- openldap-2.6.2.orig/libraries/libldap/Makefile.in 2022-05-04 16:55:23.000000000 +0200 |
|
| 4531 |
+@@ -82,7 +82,7 @@ CFFILES=ldap.conf |
|
| 4532 |
+ |
|
| 4533 |
+ install-local: $(CFFILES) FORCE |
|
| 4534 |
+ -$(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 4535 |
+- $(LTINSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) -m 644 $(LIBRARY) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 4536 |
++ $(LTINSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) -m 755 $(LIBRARY) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 4537 |
+ $(LTFINISH) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir) |
|
| 4538 |
+ -$(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(sysconfdir) |
|
| 4539 |
+ @for i in $(CFFILES); do \ |
|
| 4540 |
+diff -Naurp openldap-2.6.2.orig/servers/slapd/Makefile.in openldap-2.6.2/servers/slapd/Makefile.in |
|
| 4541 |
+--- openldap-2.6.2.orig/servers/slapd/Makefile.in 2022-05-04 16:55:23.000000000 +0200 |
|
| 4542 |
+@@ -374,9 +374,10 @@ install-local-srv: install-slapd install |
|
| 4543 |
+ |
|
| 4544 |
+ install-slapd: FORCE |
|
| 4545 |
+ -$(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(libexecdir) |
|
| 4546 |
++ -$(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir) |
|
| 4547 |
+ -$(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(localstatedir)/run |
|
| 4548 |
+ $(LTINSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) $(STRIP_OPTS) -m 755 \ |
|
| 4549 |
+- slapd$(EXEEXT) $(DESTDIR)$(libexecdir) |
|
| 4550 |
++ slapd$(EXEEXT) $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir) |
|
| 4551 |
+ @for i in $(SUBDIRS); do \ |
|
| 4552 |
+ if test -d $$i && test -f $$i/Makefile ; then \ |
|
| 4553 |
+ echo; echo " cd $$i && $(MAKE) $(MFLAGS) install"; \ |
|
| 4554 |
+@@ -452,9 +453,9 @@ install-conf: FORCE |
|
| 4555 |
+ |
|
| 4556 |
+ install-db-config: FORCE |
|
| 4557 |
+ @-$(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(localstatedir) $(DESTDIR)$(sysconfdir) |
|
| 4558 |
+- @-$(INSTALL) -m 700 -d $(DESTDIR)$(localstatedir)/openldap-data |
|
| 4559 |
++ @-$(INSTALL) -m 700 -d $(DESTDIR)$(localstatedir)/lib/openldap |
|
| 4560 |
+ $(INSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) -m 600 $(srcdir)/DB_CONFIG \ |
|
| 4561 |
+- $(DESTDIR)$(localstatedir)/openldap-data/DB_CONFIG.example |
|
| 4562 |
++ $(DESTDIR)$(localstatedir)/lib/openldap/DB_CONFIG.example |
|
| 4563 |
+ $(INSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) -m 600 $(srcdir)/DB_CONFIG \ |
|
| 4564 |
+ $(DESTDIR)$(sysconfdir)/DB_CONFIG.example |
|
| 4565 |
+ |
|
| 4566 |
+@@ -462,6 +463,6 @@ install-tools: FORCE |
|
| 4567 |
+ -$(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir) |
|
| 4568 |
+ for i in $(SLAPTOOLS); do \ |
|
| 4569 |
+ $(RM) $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir)/$$i$(EXEEXT); \ |
|
| 4570 |
+- $(LN_S) -f $(DESTDIR)$(libexecdir)/slapd$(EXEEXT) $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir)/$$i$(EXEEXT); \ |
|
| 4571 |
++ $(LN_S) -f $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir)/slapd$(EXEEXT) $(DESTDIR)$(sbindir)/$$i$(EXEEXT); \ |
|
| 4572 |
+ done |
|
| 4573 |
+ |
|
| 4574 |
+diff -Naurp openldap-2.6.2.orig/servers/slapd/slapd.conf openldap-2.6.2/servers/slapd/slapd.conf |
|
| 4575 |
+--- openldap-2.6.2.orig/servers/slapd/slapd.conf 2022-05-04 16:55:23.000000000 +0200 |
|
| 4576 |
+@@ -10,8 +10,9 @@ include %SYSCONFDIR%/schema/core.schema |
|
| 4577 |
+ # service AND an understanding of referrals. |
|
| 4578 |
+ #referral ldap://root.openldap.org |
|
| 4579 |
+ |
|
| 4580 |
+-pidfile %LOCALSTATEDIR%/run/slapd.pid |
|
| 4581 |
+-argsfile %LOCALSTATEDIR%/run/slapd.args |
|
| 4582 |
++pidfile %LOCALSTATEDIR%/run/openldap/slapd.pid |
|
| 4583 |
++argsfile %LOCALSTATEDIR%/run/openldap/slapd.args |
|
| 4584 |
++ |
|
| 4585 |
+ |
|
| 4586 |
+ # Load dynamic backend modules: |
|
| 4587 |
+ modulepath %MODULEDIR% |
|
| 4588 |
+@@ -69,7 +70,7 @@ rootpw secret |
|
| 4589 |
+ # The database directory MUST exist prior to running slapd AND |
|
| 4590 |
+ # should only be accessible by the slapd and slap tools. |
|
| 4591 |
+ # Mode 700 recommended. |
|
| 4592 |
+-directory %LOCALSTATEDIR%/openldap-data |
|
| 4593 |
++directory %LOCALSTATEDIR%/lib/openldap |
|
| 4594 |
+ # Indices to maintain |
|
| 4595 |
+ index objectClass eq |
|
| 4596 |
+ |
|
| 4597 |
+diff -Naurp openldap-2.6.2.orig/servers/slapd/slapd.ldif openldap-2.6.2/servers/slapd/slapd.ldif |
|
| 4598 |
+--- openldap-2.6.2.orig/servers/slapd/slapd.ldif 2022-05-04 16:55:23.000000000 +0200 |
|
| 4599 |
+@@ -9,8 +9,8 @@ cn: config |
|
| 4600 |
+ # |
|
| 4601 |
+ # Define global ACLs to disable default read access. |
|
| 4602 |
+ # |
|
| 4603 |
+-olcArgsFile: %LOCALSTATEDIR%/run/slapd.args |
|
| 4604 |
+-olcPidFile: %LOCALSTATEDIR%/run/slapd.pid |
|
| 4605 |
++olcArgsFile: %LOCALSTATEDIR%/run/openldap/slapd.args |
|
| 4606 |
++olcPidFile: %LOCALSTATEDIR%/run/openldap/slapd.pid |
|
| 4607 |
+ # |
|
| 4608 |
+ # Do not enable referrals until AFTER you have a working directory |
|
| 4609 |
+ # service AND an understanding of referrals. |
|
| 4610 |
+@@ -88,7 +88,7 @@ olcRootPW: secret |
|
| 4611 |
+ # The database directory MUST exist prior to running slapd AND |
|
| 4612 |
+ # should only be accessible by the slapd and slap tools. |
|
| 4613 |
+ # Mode 700 recommended. |
|
| 4614 |
+-olcDbDirectory: %LOCALSTATEDIR%/openldap-data |
|
| 4615 |
++olcDbDirectory: %LOCALSTATEDIR%/lib/openldap |
|
| 4616 |
+ # Indices to maintain |
|
| 4617 |
+ olcDbIndex: objectClass eq |
|
| 4618 |
+ |
|
| 4619 |
+diff -Naurp openldap-2.6.2.orig/servers/slapd/slapi/Makefile.in openldap-2.6.2/servers/slapd/slapi/Makefile.in |
|
| 4620 |
+--- openldap-2.6.2.orig/servers/slapd/slapi/Makefile.in 2022-05-04 16:55:23.000000000 +0200 |
|
| 4621 |
+@@ -46,6 +46,6 @@ BUILD_MOD = @BUILD_SLAPI@ |
|
| 4622 |
+ install-local: FORCE |
|
| 4623 |
+ if test "$(BUILD_MOD)" = "yes"; then \ |
|
| 4624 |
+ $(MKDIR) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir); \ |
|
| 4625 |
+- $(LTINSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) -m 644 $(LIBRARY) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir); \ |
|
| 4626 |
++ $(LTINSTALL) $(INSTALLFLAGS) -m 755 $(LIBRARY) $(DESTDIR)$(libdir); \ |
|
| 4627 |
+ fi |
|
| 4628 |
+ |
| 0 | 4629 |
new file mode 100644 |
| ... | ... |
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@ |
| 0 |
+From 6779e56fafb0aa8ae5efa7068da34a630b51b530 Mon Sep 17 00:00:00 2001 |
|
| 1 |
+From: Simon Pichugin <spichugi@redhat.com> |
|
| 2 |
+Date: Fri, 5 Aug 2022 13:23:52 -0700 |
|
| 3 |
+Subject: [PATCH] Add export symbols related to LDAP_CONNECTIONLESS |
|
| 4 |
+ |
|
| 5 |
+--- |
|
| 6 |
+ libraries/liblber/lber.map | 1 + |
|
| 7 |
+ libraries/libldap/ldap.map | 1 + |
|
| 8 |
+ 2 files changed, 2 insertions(+) |
|
| 9 |
+ |
|
| 10 |
+diff --git a/libraries/liblber/lber.map b/libraries/liblber/lber.map |
|
| 11 |
+index 9a4094b0f..083cd1f32 100644 |
|
| 12 |
+--- a/libraries/liblber/lber.map |
|
| 13 |
+@@ -121,6 +121,7 @@ OPENLDAP_2.200 |
|
| 14 |
+ ber_sockbuf_io_fd; |
|
| 15 |
+ ber_sockbuf_io_readahead; |
|
| 16 |
+ ber_sockbuf_io_tcp; |
|
| 17 |
++ ber_sockbuf_io_udp; |
|
| 18 |
+ ber_sockbuf_remove_io; |
|
| 19 |
+ ber_sos_dump; |
|
| 20 |
+ ber_start; |
|
| 21 |
+diff --git a/libraries/libldap/ldap.map b/libraries/libldap/ldap.map |
|
| 22 |
+index b28c9c21e..021aaba63 100644 |
|
| 23 |
+--- a/libraries/libldap/ldap.map |
|
| 24 |
+@@ -200,6 +200,7 @@ OPENLDAP_2.200 |
|
| 25 |
+ ldap_is_ldap_url; |
|
| 26 |
+ ldap_is_ldapi_url; |
|
| 27 |
+ ldap_is_ldaps_url; |
|
| 28 |
++ ldap_is_ldapc_url; |
|
| 29 |
+ ldap_is_read_ready; |
|
| 30 |
+ ldap_is_write_ready; |
|
| 31 |
+ ldap_ld_free; |
|
| 32 |
+-- |
|
| 33 |
+2.37.1 |
|
| 34 |
+ |
| ... | ... |
@@ -1,10 +1,10 @@ |
| 1 | 1 |
%global _default_patch_fuzz 2 |
| 2 |
-%global debug_package %{nil}
|
|
| 2 |
+%global debug_package %{nil}
|
|
| 3 | 3 |
|
| 4 | 4 |
Summary: OpenLdap-2.4.43 |
| 5 | 5 |
Name: openldap |
| 6 |
-Version: 2.4.58 |
|
| 7 |
-Release: 2%{?dist}
|
|
| 6 |
+Version: 2.6.3 |
|
| 7 |
+Release: 1%{?dist}
|
|
| 8 | 8 |
License: OpenLDAP |
| 9 | 9 |
URL: https://www.openldap.org |
| 10 | 10 |
Group: System Environment/Security |
| ... | ... |
@@ -12,20 +12,23 @@ Vendor: VMware, Inc. |
| 12 | 12 |
Distribution: Photon |
| 13 | 13 |
|
| 14 | 14 |
Source0: https://www.openldap.org/software/download/OpenLDAP/openldap-release/%{name}-%{version}.tgz
|
| 15 |
-%define sha512 %{name}=2fa2aa36117692eca44e55559f162c8c796f78469e6c2aee91b06d46f2b755d416979c913a3d89bbf9db14cc84881ecffee69af75b48e1d16b7aa9d2e3873baa
|
|
| 15 |
+%define sha512 %{name}=56efbbfc68779ad635d2c25228eb9c4f1553b107b96e8a438029b1c5d2f2647cf4d437770554392b436718ea44a4813e17f5195049f67fc09d063a981096cd85
|
|
| 16 | 16 |
|
| 17 |
-Patch0: openldap-2.4.51-consolidated-2.patch |
|
| 17 |
+# Patch0 is downloaded from: |
|
| 18 |
+# https://www.linuxfromscratch.org/patches/blfs/svn |
|
| 19 |
+Patch0: %{name}-%{version}-consolidated-1.patch
|
|
| 20 |
+Patch2: openldap-add-export-symbols-LDAP_CONNECTIONLESS.patch |
|
| 18 | 21 |
|
| 19 |
-Requires: openssl >= 1.0.1 |
|
| 20 |
-Requires: cyrus-sasl >= 2.1 |
|
| 21 |
-Requires: systemd |
|
| 22 |
+Requires: openssl |
|
| 23 |
+Requires: cyrus-sasl |
|
| 24 |
+Requires: systemd |
|
| 22 | 25 |
|
| 23 |
-BuildRequires: cyrus-sasl-devel >= 2.1 |
|
| 24 |
-BuildRequires: openssl-devel >= 1.0.1 |
|
| 25 |
-BuildRequires: groff |
|
| 26 |
-BuildRequires: e2fsprogs-devel |
|
| 27 |
-BuildRequires: libtool |
|
| 28 |
-BuildRequires: systemd-devel |
|
| 26 |
+BuildRequires: cyrus-sasl-devel |
|
| 27 |
+BuildRequires: openssl-devel |
|
| 28 |
+BuildRequires: groff |
|
| 29 |
+BuildRequires: e2fsprogs-devel |
|
| 30 |
+BuildRequires: libtool |
|
| 31 |
+BuildRequires: systemd-devel |
|
| 29 | 32 |
|
| 30 | 33 |
%description |
| 31 | 34 |
OpenLDAP is an open source suite of LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access |
| ... | ... |
@@ -36,51 +39,54 @@ similar to the way DNS (Domain Name System) information is propagated |
| 36 | 36 |
over the Internet. The openldap package contains configuration files, |
| 37 | 37 |
libraries, and documentation for OpenLDAP. |
| 38 | 38 |
|
| 39 |
+%package devel |
|
| 40 |
+Summary: LDAP development libraries and header files |
|
| 41 |
+Requires: %{name} = %{version}-%{release}
|
|
| 42 |
+Requires: cyrus-sasl-devel |
|
| 43 |
+ |
|
| 44 |
+%description devel |
|
| 45 |
+The openldap-devel package includes the development libraries and |
|
| 46 |
+header files needed for compiling applications that use LDAP |
|
| 47 |
+(Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) internals. LDAP is a set of |
|
| 48 |
+protocols for enabling directory services over the Internet. Install |
|
| 49 |
+this package only if you plan to develop or will need to compile |
|
| 50 |
+customized LDAP clients. |
|
| 51 |
+ |
|
| 39 | 52 |
%prep |
| 40 | 53 |
%autosetup -p1 |
| 41 | 54 |
|
| 42 | 55 |
%build |
| 43 |
-autoconf |
|
| 44 |
-sed -i '/6.0.20/ a\\t__db_version_compat' configure |
|
| 45 |
-export CPPFLAGS="-D_REENTRANT -DLDAP_CONNECTIONLESS -D_GNU_SOURCE -D_AVL_H" |
|
| 56 |
+export CFLAGS="${CFLAGS} ${LDFLAGS} -Wl,--as-needed -DLDAP_CONNECTIONLESS"
|
|
| 46 | 57 |
%configure \ |
| 47 | 58 |
$(test %{_host} != %{_build} && echo "CC=%{_host}-gcc --with-yielding-select=yes --with-sysroot=/target-%{_arch}") \
|
| 48 |
- --disable-static \ |
|
| 49 |
- --disable-slapd \ |
|
| 50 |
- --with-tls=openssl \ |
|
| 51 |
- --enable-debug \ |
|
| 52 |
- --enable-dynamic \ |
|
| 53 |
- --enable-syslog \ |
|
| 54 |
- --enable-ipv6 \ |
|
| 55 |
- --enable-local \ |
|
| 56 |
- --enable-crypt \ |
|
| 57 |
- --enable-spasswd \ |
|
| 58 |
- --enable-modules \ |
|
| 59 |
- --enable-backends \ |
|
| 60 |
- --disable-ndb --enable-overlays=mod \ |
|
| 61 |
- --with-cyrus-sasl \ |
|
| 62 |
- --with-threads |
|
| 63 |
-sed -i -e 's/ -shared / -Wl,-O1,--as-needed\0/g' libtool |
|
| 59 |
+ --disable-static \ |
|
| 60 |
+ --disable-slapd \ |
|
| 61 |
+ --disable-ndb \ |
|
| 62 |
+ --with-tls=openssl \ |
|
| 63 |
+ --enable-debug \ |
|
| 64 |
+ --enable-dynamic \ |
|
| 65 |
+ --enable-syslog \ |
|
| 66 |
+ --enable-ipv6 \ |
|
| 67 |
+ --enable-local \ |
|
| 68 |
+ --enable-crypt \ |
|
| 69 |
+ --enable-spasswd \ |
|
| 70 |
+ --enable-modules \ |
|
| 71 |
+ --enable-backends \ |
|
| 72 |
+ --enable-overlays=mod \ |
|
| 73 |
+ --with-cyrus-sasl \ |
|
| 74 |
+ --with-threads \ |
|
| 75 |
+ --with-pic \ |
|
| 76 |
+ --with-gnu-ld |
|
| 64 | 77 |
|
| 65 | 78 |
if [ %{_host} != %{_build} ]; then
|
| 66 | 79 |
sed -i '/#define NEED_MEMCMP_REPLACEMENT 1/d' include/portable.h |
| 67 | 80 |
fi |
| 68 |
-%make_build depend |
|
| 69 | 81 |
%make_build |
| 70 | 82 |
|
| 71 | 83 |
%install |
| 72 | 84 |
%make_install %{?_smp_mflags}
|
| 73 | 85 |
%{_fixperms} %{buildroot}/*
|
| 74 | 86 |
|
| 75 |
-pushd %{buildroot}%{_libdir}
|
|
| 76 |
-v=%{version}
|
|
| 77 |
-version=$(echo ${v%.[0-9]*})
|
|
| 78 |
-for lib in liblber libldap libldap_r libslapi; do |
|
| 79 |
- rm -f ${lib}.so
|
|
| 80 |
- ln -s ${lib}-${version}.so.2 ${lib}.so
|
|
| 81 |
-done |
|
| 82 |
-popd |
|
| 83 |
- |
|
| 84 | 87 |
%if 0%{?with_check}
|
| 85 | 88 |
%check |
| 86 | 89 |
make %{?_smp_mflags} test
|
| ... | ... |
@@ -96,16 +102,24 @@ rm -rf %{buildroot}/*
|
| 96 | 96 |
%files |
| 97 | 97 |
%defattr(-,root,root) |
| 98 | 98 |
%{_bindir}/*
|
| 99 |
-%{_includedir}/*
|
|
| 100 | 99 |
%dir %{_sysconfdir}/%{name}
|
| 101 |
-%{_sysconfdir}/%{name}/*
|
|
| 102 |
-%{_libdir}/*
|
|
| 100 |
+%{_sysconfdir}/%{name}/ldap.conf.default
|
|
| 101 |
+%config(noreplace) %{_sysconfdir}/%{name}/ldap.conf
|
|
| 102 |
+%{_libdir}/*.so.*
|
|
| 103 |
+ |
|
| 104 |
+%files devel |
|
| 105 |
+%defattr(-,root,root) |
|
| 106 |
+%{_includedir}/*
|
|
| 107 |
+%{_libdir}/*.so
|
|
| 108 |
+%{_libdir}/pkgconfig/*.pc
|
|
| 103 | 109 |
%{_mandir}/man1/*
|
| 104 | 110 |
%{_mandir}/man3/*
|
| 105 | 111 |
%{_mandir}/man5/*
|
| 106 | 112 |
%{_mandir}/man8/*
|
| 107 | 113 |
|
| 108 | 114 |
%changelog |
| 115 |
+* Fri Feb 10 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 2.6.3-1 |
|
| 116 |
+- Upgrade to v2.6.3 |
|
| 109 | 117 |
* Wed Aug 04 2021 Satya Naga Vasamsetty <svasamsetty@vmware.com> 2.4.58-2 |
| 110 | 118 |
- Bump up release for openssl |
| 111 | 119 |
* Tue Apr 13 2021 Gerrit Photon <photon-checkins@vmware.com> 2.4.58-1 |
| ... | ... |
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ |
| 12 | 12 |
Summary: PostgreSQL database engine |
| 13 | 13 |
Name: postgresql13 |
| 14 | 14 |
Version: 13.8 |
| 15 |
-Release: 11%{?dist}
|
|
| 15 |
+Release: 12%{?dist}
|
|
| 16 | 16 |
License: PostgreSQL |
| 17 | 17 |
URL: www.postgresql.org |
| 18 | 18 |
Group: Applications/Databases |
| ... | ... |
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ BuildRequires: libxslt-devel |
| 37 | 37 |
BuildRequires: linux-api-headers |
| 38 | 38 |
BuildRequires: Linux-PAM-devel |
| 39 | 39 |
BuildRequires: llvm-devel |
| 40 |
-BuildRequires: openldap |
|
| 40 |
+BuildRequires: openldap-devel |
|
| 41 | 41 |
BuildRequires: perl |
| 42 | 42 |
BuildRequires: perl-IPC-Run |
| 43 | 43 |
BuildRequires: python3-devel |
| ... | ... |
@@ -644,6 +644,8 @@ rm -rf %{buildroot}/*
|
| 644 | 644 |
%{_pglibdir}/plpython3.so
|
| 645 | 645 |
|
| 646 | 646 |
%changelog |
| 647 |
+* Fri Feb 10 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 13.8-12 |
|
| 648 |
+- Bump version as a part of openldap upgrade |
|
| 647 | 649 |
* Thu Feb 09 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 13.8-11 |
| 648 | 650 |
- Fix CVE-2022-41862 |
| 649 | 651 |
* Thu Jan 26 2023 Ashwin Dayanand Kamat <kashwindayan@vmware.com> 13.8-10 |
| ... | ... |
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ |
| 12 | 12 |
Summary: PostgreSQL database engine |
| 13 | 13 |
Name: postgresql14 |
| 14 | 14 |
Version: 14.5 |
| 15 |
-Release: 11%{?dist}
|
|
| 15 |
+Release: 12%{?dist}
|
|
| 16 | 16 |
License: PostgreSQL |
| 17 | 17 |
URL: www.postgresql.org |
| 18 | 18 |
Group: Applications/Databases |
| ... | ... |
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ BuildRequires: linux-api-headers |
| 38 | 38 |
BuildRequires: Linux-PAM-devel |
| 39 | 39 |
BuildRequires: llvm-devel |
| 40 | 40 |
BuildRequires: lz4-devel |
| 41 |
-BuildRequires: openldap |
|
| 41 |
+BuildRequires: openldap-devel |
|
| 42 | 42 |
BuildRequires: perl |
| 43 | 43 |
BuildRequires: perl-IPC-Run |
| 44 | 44 |
BuildRequires: python3-devel |
| ... | ... |
@@ -660,6 +660,8 @@ rm -rf %{buildroot}/*
|
| 660 | 660 |
%{_pglibdir}/plpython3.so
|
| 661 | 661 |
|
| 662 | 662 |
%changelog |
| 663 |
+* Fri Feb 10 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 14.5-12 |
|
| 664 |
+- Bump version as a part of openldap upgrade |
|
| 663 | 665 |
* Thu Feb 09 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 14.5-11 |
| 664 | 666 |
- Fix CVE-2022-41862 |
| 665 | 667 |
* Thu Jan 26 2023 Ashwin Dayanand Kamat <kashwindayan@vmware.com> 14.5-10 |
| ... | ... |
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@ |
| 12 | 12 |
Summary: PostgreSQL database engine |
| 13 | 13 |
Name: postgresql15 |
| 14 | 14 |
Version: 15.1 |
| 15 |
-Release: 3%{?dist}
|
|
| 15 |
+Release: 4%{?dist}
|
|
| 16 | 16 |
License: PostgreSQL |
| 17 | 17 |
URL: www.postgresql.org |
| 18 | 18 |
Group: Applications/Databases |
| ... | ... |
@@ -37,7 +37,7 @@ BuildRequires: linux-api-headers |
| 37 | 37 |
BuildRequires: Linux-PAM-devel |
| 38 | 38 |
BuildRequires: llvm-devel |
| 39 | 39 |
BuildRequires: lz4-devel |
| 40 |
-BuildRequires: openldap |
|
| 40 |
+BuildRequires: openldap-devel |
|
| 41 | 41 |
BuildRequires: perl |
| 42 | 42 |
BuildRequires: perl-IPC-Run |
| 43 | 43 |
BuildRequires: python3-devel |
| ... | ... |
@@ -663,6 +663,8 @@ rm -rf %{buildroot}/*
|
| 663 | 663 |
%{_pglibdir}/plpython3.so
|
| 664 | 664 |
|
| 665 | 665 |
%changelog |
| 666 |
+* Fri Feb 10 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 15.1-4 |
|
| 667 |
+- Bump version as a part of openldap upgrade |
|
| 666 | 668 |
* Thu Feb 09 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 15.1-3 |
| 667 | 669 |
- Fix CVE-2022-41862 |
| 668 | 670 |
* Thu Jan 26 2023 Ashwin Dayanand Kamat <kashwindayan@vmware.com> 15.1-2 |
| ... | ... |
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ |
| 1 | 1 |
Summary: Samba Client Programs |
| 2 | 2 |
Name: samba-client |
| 3 | 3 |
Version: 4.14.4 |
| 4 |
-Release: 8%{?dist}
|
|
| 4 |
+Release: 9%{?dist}
|
|
| 5 | 5 |
License: GPLv3+ and LGPLv3+ |
| 6 | 6 |
Group: Productivity/Networking |
| 7 | 7 |
Vendor: VMware, Inc. |
| ... | ... |
@@ -11,9 +11,9 @@ URL: https://www.samba.org |
| 11 | 11 |
Source0: https://www.samba.org/ftp/samba/stable/samba-%{version}.tar.gz
|
| 12 | 12 |
%define sha512 samba=200b2b2b08b369915e045f22ee993d5deea7a2533c6c582d4b88c614adcad5529109d449e843a2a1f292e5cfb1877d66421b5b0801ad988896cbe5413717e4dc |
| 13 | 13 |
|
| 14 |
-Source1: smb.conf.vendor |
|
| 14 |
+Source1: smb.conf.vendor |
|
| 15 | 15 |
|
| 16 |
-Patch0: rename_dcerpc_to_smbdcerpc_%{version}.patch
|
|
| 16 |
+Patch0: rename_dcerpc_to_smbdcerpc_%{version}.patch
|
|
| 17 | 17 |
|
| 18 | 18 |
%define samba_ver %{version}-%{release}
|
| 19 | 19 |
|
| ... | ... |
@@ -29,11 +29,11 @@ BuildRequires: libxslt-devel |
| 29 | 29 |
BuildRequires: docbook-xsl |
| 30 | 30 |
BuildRequires: docbook-xml |
| 31 | 31 |
BuildRequires: gcc |
| 32 |
-BuildRequires: gnutls-devel >= 3.4.7 |
|
| 32 |
+BuildRequires: gnutls-devel |
|
| 33 | 33 |
BuildRequires: jansson-devel |
| 34 | 34 |
BuildRequires: libxml2-devel |
| 35 | 35 |
BuildRequires: lmdb |
| 36 |
-BuildRequires: openldap |
|
| 36 |
+BuildRequires: openldap-devel |
|
| 37 | 37 |
BuildRequires: perl-Parse-Yapp |
| 38 | 38 |
BuildRequires: dbus-devel |
| 39 | 39 |
|
| ... | ... |
@@ -108,7 +108,7 @@ echo "^samba4.rpc.echo.*on.*ncacn_np.*with.*object.*nt4_dc" >> selftest/knownfai |
| 108 | 108 |
%global _samba_pdb_modules pdb_tdbsam,pdb_ldap,pdb_smbpasswd,pdb_wbc_sam,pdb_samba4 |
| 109 | 109 |
%global _samba_modules %{_samba_pdb_modules}
|
| 110 | 110 |
|
| 111 |
-export CFLAGS="-I/usr/include/tirpc" |
|
| 111 |
+export CFLAGS="-I%{_includedir}/tirpc"
|
|
| 112 | 112 |
export LDFLAGS="-ltirpc" |
| 113 | 113 |
|
| 114 | 114 |
%configure \ |
| ... | ... |
@@ -339,7 +339,6 @@ rm -rf %{buildroot}/*
|
| 339 | 339 |
# Samba Client |
| 340 | 340 |
%files |
| 341 | 341 |
%defattr(-,root,root,-) |
| 342 |
-%doc source3/client/README.smbspool |
|
| 343 | 342 |
%{_bindir}/cifsdd
|
| 344 | 343 |
%{_bindir}/dbwrap_tool
|
| 345 | 344 |
%{_bindir}/dumpmscat
|
| ... | ... |
@@ -567,6 +566,8 @@ rm -rf %{buildroot}/*
|
| 567 | 567 |
%{_libdir}/pkgconfig/wbclient.pc
|
| 568 | 568 |
|
| 569 | 569 |
%changelog |
| 570 |
+* Wed Feb 08 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 4.14.4-9 |
|
| 571 |
+- Bump version as a part of openldap upgrade |
|
| 570 | 572 |
* Thu Dec 08 2022 Dweep Advani <dadvani@vmware.com> 4.14.4-8 |
| 571 | 573 |
- Rebuild for perl version upgrade to 5.36.0 |
| 572 | 574 |
* Tue Dec 06 2022 Ashwin Dayanand Kamat <kashwindayan@vmware.com> 4.14.4-7 |
| ... | ... |
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ |
| 1 | 1 |
Summary: Commonly used Mail transport agent (MTA) |
| 2 | 2 |
Name: sendmail |
| 3 | 3 |
Version: 8.17.1 |
| 4 |
-Release: 5%{?dist}
|
|
| 4 |
+Release: 6%{?dist}
|
|
| 5 | 5 |
URL: http://www.sendmail.org |
| 6 | 6 |
License: BSD and CDDL1.1 and MIT |
| 7 | 7 |
Group: Email/Server/Library |
| ... | ... |
@@ -14,7 +14,7 @@ Source0: https://ftp.sendmail.org/sendmail.%{version}.tar.gz
|
| 14 | 14 |
Patch0: fix-compatibility-with-openssl-3.0.patch |
| 15 | 15 |
|
| 16 | 16 |
BuildRequires: systemd-devel |
| 17 |
-BuildRequires: openldap |
|
| 17 |
+BuildRequires: openldap-devel |
|
| 18 | 18 |
BuildRequires: openssl-devel |
| 19 | 19 |
BuildRequires: shadow |
| 20 | 20 |
BuildRequires: tinycdb-devel |
| ... | ... |
@@ -132,8 +132,8 @@ if ! getent passwd smmsp >/dev/null; then |
| 132 | 132 |
useradd -c "Sendmail Daemon" -g smmsp -d /dev/null -s /bin/false -u 26 smmsp |
| 133 | 133 |
fi |
| 134 | 134 |
|
| 135 |
-chmod -v 1775 /var/mail |
|
| 136 |
-install -v -m700 -d /var/spool/mqueue |
|
| 135 |
+chmod -v 1775 %{_var}/mail
|
|
| 136 |
+install -v -m700 -d %{_var}/spool/mqueue
|
|
| 137 | 137 |
|
| 138 | 138 |
%post |
| 139 | 139 |
if [ $1 -eq 1 ] ; then |
| ... | ... |
@@ -149,8 +149,8 @@ EOF |
| 149 | 149 |
m4 m4/cf.m4 submit.mc > submit.cf |
| 150 | 150 |
fi |
| 151 | 151 |
|
| 152 |
-chmod 700 /var/spool/clientmqueue |
|
| 153 |
-chown smmsp:smmsp /var/spool/clientmqueue |
|
| 152 |
+chmod 700 %{_var}/spool/clientmqueue
|
|
| 153 |
+chown smmsp:smmsp %{_var}/spool/clientmqueue
|
|
| 154 | 154 |
|
| 155 | 155 |
%systemd_post %{name}.service
|
| 156 | 156 |
|
| ... | ... |
@@ -193,6 +193,8 @@ fi |
| 193 | 193 |
%exclude %{_sysconfdir}/mail/cf/*
|
| 194 | 194 |
|
| 195 | 195 |
%changelog |
| 196 |
+* Fri Feb 10 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 8.17.1-6 |
|
| 197 |
+- Bump version as a part of openldap upgrade |
|
| 196 | 198 |
* Wed Feb 08 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 8.17.1-5 |
| 197 | 199 |
- Add cyrus-sasl to requires |
| 198 | 200 |
* Thu Nov 17 2022 Nitesh Kumar <kunitesh@vmware.com> 8.17.1-4 |
| ... | ... |
@@ -1,22 +1,26 @@ |
| 1 | 1 |
Summary: A high performance C-based HTTP client library built upon the Apache Portable Runtime (APR) library |
| 2 | 2 |
Name: serf |
| 3 | 3 |
Version: 1.3.9 |
| 4 |
-Release: 6%{?dist}
|
|
| 4 |
+Release: 7%{?dist}
|
|
| 5 | 5 |
License: Apache License 2.0 |
| 6 |
-URL: https://serf.apache.org/ |
|
| 6 |
+URL: https://serf.apache.org |
|
| 7 | 7 |
Group: System Environment/Libraries |
| 8 | 8 |
Vendor: VMware, Inc. |
| 9 | 9 |
Distribution: Photon |
| 10 |
-Source0: https://www.apache.org/dist/serf/%{name}-%{version}.tar.bz2
|
|
| 11 |
-%define sha512 serf=9f5418d991840a08d293d1ecba70cd9534a207696d002f22dbe62354e7b005955112a0d144a76c89c7f7ad3b4c882e54974441fafa0c09c4aa25c49c021ca75d |
|
| 12 |
-Patch0: 0001-openssl-3.0.0-compatibility.patch |
|
| 10 |
+ |
|
| 11 |
+Source0: https://www.apache.org/dist/serf/%{name}-%{version}.tar.bz2
|
|
| 12 |
+%define sha512 serf=9f5418d991840a08d293d1ecba70cd9534a207696d002f22dbe62354e7b005955112a0d144a76c89c7f7ad3b4c882e54974441fafa0c09c4aa25c49c021ca75d |
|
| 13 |
+ |
|
| 14 |
+Patch0: 0001-openssl-3.0.0-compatibility.patch |
|
| 15 |
+ |
|
| 13 | 16 |
Requires: openldap |
| 17 |
+ |
|
| 14 | 18 |
BuildRequires: python3-setuptools |
| 15 | 19 |
BuildRequires: apr-devel |
| 16 | 20 |
BuildRequires: apr-util-devel |
| 17 | 21 |
BuildRequires: scons |
| 18 | 22 |
BuildRequires: openssl-devel |
| 19 |
-BuildRequires: openldap |
|
| 23 |
+BuildRequires: openldap-devel |
|
| 20 | 24 |
|
| 21 | 25 |
%description |
| 22 | 26 |
The Apache Serf library is a C-based HTTP client library built upon the Apache |
| ... | ... |
@@ -34,19 +38,20 @@ It contains the libraries and header files to create serf applications. |
| 34 | 34 |
%autosetup -p1 |
| 35 | 35 |
|
| 36 | 36 |
%build |
| 37 |
-ln -sf /usr/bin/python3 /usr/bin/python |
|
| 38 |
-sed -i "/Append/s:RPATH=libdir,::" SConstruct && |
|
| 39 |
-sed -i "/Default/s:lib_static,::" SConstruct && |
|
| 40 |
-sed -i "/Alias/s:install_static,::" SConstruct && |
|
| 41 |
-sed -i "/ print/{s/print/print(/; s/$/)/}" SConstruct &&
|
|
| 42 |
-sed -i "/get_contents()/s/,/.decode()&/" SConstruct && |
|
| 37 |
+sed -i "/Append/s:RPATH=libdir,::" SConstruct |
|
| 38 |
+sed -i "/Default/s:lib_static,::" SConstruct |
|
| 39 |
+sed -i "/Alias/s:install_static,::" SConstruct |
|
| 40 |
+sed -i "/ print/{s/print/print(/; s/$/)/}" SConstruct
|
|
| 41 |
+sed -i "/get_contents()/s/,/.decode()&/" SConstruct |
|
| 43 | 42 |
scons PREFIX=%{_prefix}
|
| 44 | 43 |
|
| 45 | 44 |
%install |
| 46 | 45 |
scons PREFIX=%{buildroot}%{_prefix} install
|
| 47 | 46 |
|
| 47 |
+%if 0%{?with_check}
|
|
| 48 | 48 |
%check |
| 49 | 49 |
scons check |
| 50 |
+%endif |
|
| 50 | 51 |
|
| 51 | 52 |
%files |
| 52 | 53 |
%defattr(-,root,root) |
| ... | ... |
@@ -58,6 +63,8 @@ scons check |
| 58 | 58 |
%{_libdir}/pkgconfig/*
|
| 59 | 59 |
|
| 60 | 60 |
%changelog |
| 61 |
+* Wed Feb 08 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 1.3.9-7 |
|
| 62 |
+- Bump version as a part of openldap upgrade |
|
| 61 | 63 |
* Tue Dec 06 2022 Prashant S Chauhan <psinghchauha@vmware.com> 1.3.9-6 |
| 62 | 64 |
- Update release to compile with python 3.11 |
| 63 | 65 |
* Sun Aug 01 2021 Satya Naga Vasamsetty <svasamsetty@vmware.com> 1.3.9-5 |
| ... | ... |
@@ -1,7 +1,10 @@ |
| 1 |
+%define _confdir %{_sysconfdir}
|
|
| 2 |
+%define _squiddatadir %{_datadir}/%{name}
|
|
| 3 |
+ |
|
| 1 | 4 |
Summary: Caching and forwarding HTTP web proxy |
| 2 | 5 |
Name: squid |
| 3 | 6 |
Version: 5.7 |
| 4 |
-Release: 3%{?dist}
|
|
| 7 |
+Release: 4%{?dist}
|
|
| 5 | 8 |
License: GPL-2.0-or-later |
| 6 | 9 |
URL: http://www.squid-cache.org |
| 7 | 10 |
Group: Networking/Web/Proxy |
| ... | ... |
@@ -28,7 +31,7 @@ BuildRequires: libecap-devel |
| 28 | 28 |
BuildRequires: libgpg-error-devel |
| 29 | 29 |
BuildRequires: libxml2-devel |
| 30 | 30 |
BuildRequires: nettle-devel |
| 31 |
-BuildRequires: openldap |
|
| 31 |
+BuildRequires: openldap-devel |
|
| 32 | 32 |
BuildRequires: openssl-devel |
| 33 | 33 |
BuildRequires: systemd-devel |
| 34 | 34 |
BuildRequires: systemd-rpm-macros |
| ... | ... |
@@ -60,9 +63,6 @@ lookup program (dnsserver), a program for retrieving FTP data |
| 60 | 60 |
%prep |
| 61 | 61 |
%autosetup -p1 |
| 62 | 62 |
|
| 63 |
-%define _confdir %{_sysconfdir}
|
|
| 64 |
-%define _squiddatadir %{_datadir}/%{name}
|
|
| 65 |
- |
|
| 66 | 63 |
%build |
| 67 | 64 |
%define _lto_cflags %{nil}
|
| 68 | 65 |
|
| ... | ... |
@@ -158,15 +158,15 @@ d /run/%{name} 0755 %{name} %{name} - -
|
| 158 | 158 |
EOF |
| 159 | 159 |
|
| 160 | 160 |
%pre |
| 161 |
-if ! getent group %{name} >/dev/null 2>&1; then
|
|
| 162 |
- /usr/sbin/groupadd -g 53 %{name}
|
|
| 161 |
+if ! getent group %{name} &> /dev/null; then
|
|
| 162 |
+ groupadd -g 53 %{name} &> /dev/null
|
|
| 163 | 163 |
fi |
| 164 | 164 |
|
| 165 |
-if ! getent passwd %{name} >/dev/null 2>&1 ; then
|
|
| 166 |
- /usr/sbin/useradd -g 53 -u 53 -d /var/spool/%{name} -r -s /sbin/nologin %{name} >/dev/null 2>&1 || exit 1
|
|
| 165 |
+if ! getent passwd %{name} &> /dev/null; then
|
|
| 166 |
+ useradd -g 53 -u 53 -d %{_var}/spool/%{name} -r -s /sbin/nologin %{name} &>/dev/null || exit 1
|
|
| 167 | 167 |
fi |
| 168 | 168 |
|
| 169 |
-for i in /var/log/%{name} /var/spool/%{name}; do
|
|
| 169 |
+for i in %{_var}/log/%{name} %{_var}/spool/%{name}; do
|
|
| 170 | 170 |
if [ -d $i ]; then |
| 171 | 171 |
for adir in $(find $i -maxdepth 0 \! -user %{name}); do
|
| 172 | 172 |
chown -R %{name}:%{name} $adir
|
| ... | ... |
@@ -188,10 +188,7 @@ rm -rf %{buildroot}
|
| 188 | 188 |
|
| 189 | 189 |
%files |
| 190 | 190 |
%defattr(-,root,root) |
| 191 |
-%license COPYING |
|
| 192 |
-%doc CONTRIBUTORS README ChangeLog QUICKSTART src/%{name}.conf.documented
|
|
| 193 | 191 |
%doc contrib/url-normalizer.pl contrib/user-agents.pl |
| 194 |
- |
|
| 195 | 192 |
%{_unitdir}/%{name}.service
|
| 196 | 193 |
%attr(755,root,root) %dir %{_libexecdir}/%{name}
|
| 197 | 194 |
%attr(755,root,root) %{_libexecdir}/%{name}/cache_swap.sh
|
| ... | ... |
@@ -226,6 +223,8 @@ rm -rf %{buildroot}
|
| 226 | 226 |
%{_libdir}/%{name}/*
|
| 227 | 227 |
|
| 228 | 228 |
%changelog |
| 229 |
+* Wed Feb 08 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 5.7-4 |
|
| 230 |
+- Bump version as a part of openldap upgrade |
|
| 229 | 231 |
* Thu Jan 26 2023 Ashwin Dayanand Kamat <kashwindayan@vmware.com> 5.7-3 |
| 230 | 232 |
- Bump version as a part of krb5 upgrade |
| 231 | 233 |
* Thu Dec 22 2022 Guruswamy Basavaiah <bguruswamy@vmware.com> 5.7-2 |
| ... | ... |
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@ |
| 1 | 1 |
Summary: Application Container Server for Networked/Clustered Web Applications |
| 2 | 2 |
Name: uwsgi |
| 3 | 3 |
Version: 2.0.21 |
| 4 |
-Release: 4%{?dist}
|
|
| 4 |
+Release: 5%{?dist}
|
|
| 5 | 5 |
License: GPLv2 with exceptions |
| 6 | 6 |
Group: Productivity/Networking/Web/Servers |
| 7 | 7 |
Vendor: VMware, Inc. |
| ... | ... |
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@ BuildRequires: libcap-devel |
| 31 | 31 |
BuildRequires: httpd-devel |
| 32 | 32 |
BuildRequires: curl-libs |
| 33 | 33 |
BuildRequires: libstdc++-devel |
| 34 |
-BuildRequires: openldap |
|
| 34 |
+BuildRequires: openldap-devel |
|
| 35 | 35 |
BuildRequires: boost-devel |
| 36 | 36 |
BuildRequires: attr-devel |
| 37 | 37 |
BuildRequires: libxslt-devel |
| ... | ... |
@@ -96,8 +96,8 @@ This package contains support for Python 3 applications via the WSGI protocol. |
| 96 | 96 |
cp -p %{SOURCE1} buildconf/
|
| 97 | 97 |
|
| 98 | 98 |
%build |
| 99 |
-%{__python3} uwsgiconfig.py --verbose --build photon.ini
|
|
| 100 |
-%{__python3} uwsgiconfig.py --verbose --plugin plugins/python core
|
|
| 99 |
+%{python3} uwsgiconfig.py --verbose --build photon.ini
|
|
| 100 |
+%{python3} uwsgiconfig.py --verbose --plugin plugins/python core
|
|
| 101 | 101 |
|
| 102 | 102 |
%install |
| 103 | 103 |
install -d %{buildroot}%{_sysconfdir}/%{name}.d
|
| ... | ... |
@@ -116,15 +116,12 @@ cat >> %{buildroot}%{_tmpfilesdir}/%{name}.conf << EOF
|
| 116 | 116 |
d /run/%{name} 0775 %{name} %{name}
|
| 117 | 117 |
EOF |
| 118 | 118 |
|
| 119 |
-%if 0%{?with_check}
|
|
| 120 |
-%check |
|
| 121 |
-%endif |
|
| 122 |
- |
|
| 123 | 119 |
%pre |
| 124 |
-getent group %{name} >/dev/null || groupadd -r %{name}
|
|
| 125 |
-getent passwd %{name} >/dev/null || \
|
|
| 120 |
+getent group %{name} &> /dev/null || groupadd -r %{name} &> /dev/null || exit 1
|
|
| 121 |
+getent passwd %{name} &> /dev/null || \
|
|
| 126 | 122 |
useradd -c "uWSGI daemon user" -d /run/%{name} -g %{name} \
|
| 127 |
- -s /sbin/nologin -M -r %{name}
|
|
| 123 |
+ -s /sbin/nologin -M -r %{name} &> /dev/null || exit 1
|
|
| 124 |
+ |
|
| 128 | 125 |
%post |
| 129 | 126 |
%systemd_post %{name}.service
|
| 130 | 127 |
|
| ... | ... |
@@ -144,8 +141,6 @@ rm -rf %{buildroot}/*
|
| 144 | 144 |
%{_unitdir}/%{name}.service
|
| 145 | 145 |
%{_tmpfilesdir}/%{name}.conf
|
| 146 | 146 |
%dir %{_sysconfdir}/%{name}.d
|
| 147 |
-%doc README |
|
| 148 |
-%license LICENSE |
|
| 149 | 147 |
|
| 150 | 148 |
%files devel |
| 151 | 149 |
%defattr(-,root,root,-) |
| ... | ... |
@@ -239,6 +234,8 @@ rm -rf %{buildroot}/*
|
| 239 | 239 |
%{python3_sitelib}/uwsgidecorators.py*
|
| 240 | 240 |
|
| 241 | 241 |
%changelog |
| 242 |
+* Wed Feb 08 2023 Shreenidhi Shedi <sshedi@vmware.com> 2.0.21-5 |
|
| 243 |
+- Bump version as a part of openldap upgrade |
|
| 242 | 244 |
* Tue Jan 31 2023 Ashwin Dayanand Kamat <kashwindayan@vmware.com> 2.0.21-4 |
| 243 | 245 |
- Bump version as a part of krb5 upgrade |
| 244 | 246 |
* Mon Jan 30 2023 Nitesh Kumar <kunitesh@vmware.com> 2.0.21-3 |